OperationmanualLMKLabSoft Eng

Operation manual LMK LabSoft
Editors:
Ralf Poschmann (Software, Manual)
Udo Krüger (Applications, Excel)
Tobias Porsch (Applications, Excel)
Heiko Kempe (Labview)
Januar 3, 2018
TechnoTeam Bildverarbeitung GmbH, Ilmenau, Germany

Table of Contents
1 Comparison of program versions 8
2 Quick lead-in 9
2.1 How to start-up and quit the program? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2 Where to find the different items? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.3 How to exchange the camera and the lens in the program? . . . . . . . . . 12
2.4 How to prepare the camera for capturing images? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.5 How to capture images? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.6 How to change the image display? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.7 Cursor options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.8 How to define measuring regions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.9 How to use coordinate systems? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.10 How to define statistical evaluations? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.11 What are the image processing options? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.12 How to record and replay courses? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.13 What color evaluation options do exist? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.14 How to print or export the results? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.15 How to store results for a later evaluation? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.16 How to exchange data between different measuring records . . . . . . . . 26
2.17 How can the program work with other programs? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.18 How can the program be reset to the factory settings? . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.19 Where to get help? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3 Software license 28
4 Starting and closing the program 30

4.1 Starting the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.2 Closing the program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.3 Program and data directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.4 The main window of the application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.4.1 Main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.4.2 Tool bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.4.3 Image display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.4.4 Tables and graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.4.5 Context menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5 Camera, lens and recalibration 43

5.1 Installing new calibration data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.2 Selecting camera and lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
2
Table of Contents
5.3 Setting camera and lens properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

5.3.1 Color factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
6 Capturing images 50
6.1 Capturing camera images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6.1.1 Turning on the permanent capture mode (live mode) . . . . . . . . 50
6.1.2 Turning off the permanent capture mode (freeze mode) . . . . . . 50
6.1.3 Modifying the capture mode properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6.1.4 Set image area for overdrive control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.2 Capturing luminance and color images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.2.1 Capturing algoritms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.2.2 Capture parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.2.3 Capturing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.2.4 Live capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6.3 Captures made with the LMK mobile advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6.4 Triggered captures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.5 Camera set-up (orientation, focussing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
6.5.1 Camera adjustment“ dialog page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
”
6.5.2 Orientation“ dialog page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
”
6.5.3 Focussing“ dialog page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
”
6.5.4 Structure of the initialization file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
6.6 Image set-up dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7 Measurement series 78
7.1 Capturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.1.1 Manual capture series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.1.2 Time-controlled capture series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
7.1.3 Mechanics-controlled capture series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.1.4 File-controlled capture series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
7.2 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.2.1 Image directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7.2.2 Time list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
7.2.3 Position list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
7.3 Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
7.3.1 Calculation of luminance images from series of camera images . . . 91
7.3.2 Composing images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
7.3.3 Image converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
8 Protocols 96
8.1 Read and write . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
8.2 Update protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.3 Several program instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
9 Images 99
9.1 Input and output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
9.1.1 Loading and saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
9.1.2 Capture parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
9.1.3 Copying and pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
3
Table of Contents
9.1.4 Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

9.2 Enlarging the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
9.3 Scaling the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
9.4 Color palettes for black-and-white images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
9.4.1 User-defined palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
9.4.2 Isocolor palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
9.5 Color spaces for color images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.6 Further options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
9.6.1 Duplicating and filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
9.6.2 Image properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
9.6.3 Exporting an image to text file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
10 Measuring regions 113

10.1 Processing measuring regions via mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
10.1.1 Generating a region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
10.1.2 Marking regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
10.1.3 Shifting regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
10.1.4 Duplicating regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
10.1.5 Deleting regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
10.1.6 Shifting a contour point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
10.1.7 Inserting a contour point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
10.1.8 Deleting a contour point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
10.1.9 Undoing changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
10.2 Putting regions together to form a group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
10.3 Editing measuring regions via dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
10.3.1 Create and change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
10.3.2 Shift and duplicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
10.3.3 Changing display attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
10.4 Loading and saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10.5 Copying and pasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10.5.1 Copying and pasting the whole region list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
10.5.2 Copying and pasting several marked regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
10.5.3 Copying and pasting a marked rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
10.6 Filling regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10.7 Equal region lists in different images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
11 Coordinate systems 127

11.1 Cartesian coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
11.2 Polar coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
12 Cursors 130
12.1 Cursor types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
12.1.1 Standard cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
12.1.2 Focus cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
12.1.3 Enlargement cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
12.1.4 Line cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
12.1.5 Rectangle and circle cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
12.2 Cursor parameterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4
Table of Contents
13 Statistic evaluations 135

13.1 Generating and parameterizing a statistic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
13.1.1 Standard statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
13.1.2 Sectional views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
13.1.3 Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
13.1.4 Projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
13.1.5 Luminance objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
13.1.6 Integral objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
13.1.7 Symbol objects in luminance images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
13.1.8 Symbol objects in color images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
13.1.9 Evaluation in the case of negative contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
13.1.10 Three-dimensional views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
13.1.11 Chromaticity diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
13.1.12 Arc objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
13.1.13 Filament objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
13.1.14 Contrast objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
13.1.15 Quantile objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
13.2 The dialog Statistic type“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
”
13.3 Statistic parameter dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
13.4 Statistical parameter table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
13.5 Result views of a statistic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
13.5.1 Standard tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
13.5.2 Table All color statistics“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
”
13.5.3 Value tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
13.5.4 Graphics of a standard statistic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
13.5.5 Graphics of the curve progressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
13.5.6 Chromaticity diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
13.5.7 3D views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
14 Image processing and evaluation images 194

14.1 Using evaluation images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
14.2 Copying display options to other images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
14.3 One- and two-window views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
14.4 Assigning region lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
14.5 Region view properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
14.6 Searching for regions and using them automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
14.7 Projective rectification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
14.8 Coordinate transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
14.9 Isoline and isocolor representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
14.9.1 Isoline representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
14.9.2 Isocolor representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
14.10Image processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
14.10.1 Register card Common“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
”
14.10.2 Register card Arithmetic“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
”
14.10.3 Register card Message box“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
”
14.11Recording recurrent operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
14.12Calculation of a luminous intensity distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
14.13Exporting a luminous intensity distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
5
Table of Contents
15 Evaluating color images 227

15.1 Decomposing into color extracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
15.2 Merging color extracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
15.3 Calculating the color difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
15.3.1 Color difference between two images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
15.3.2 Color difference to a color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
15.4 Color look-up table transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
16 Printing and exporting 234

16.1 Immediately printing images, tables, graphics and diagrams . . . . . . . . 234
16.2 Copying via clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
16.3 Export to Microsoft Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
16.4 Export to Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
16.5 Print reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
17 External Program Control 243

17.1 ActiveX-server interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
17.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
17.1.2 Preparation of MS Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
17.1.3 Example 1: Test frame in MS Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
17.1.4 Example 2: Linearity measurement in MS Excel . . . . . . . . . . . 247
17.1.5 Example 3: Glare evaluation according to the UGR method . . . . 249
17.1.6 Preparation in NI LabView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
17.1.7 Example 4: Measurement series in LabView . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
17.2 Tcl as script language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
17.2.1 Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
17.2.2 Using Tcl in LabSoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
18 Extras 262
18.1 Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
18.2 Template image generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
18.2.1 Dialog part Target“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
”
18.2.2 Dialog part Border size“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
”
18.2.3 Tab sheet Adjustment“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
”
18.2.4 Tab sheet BlackMura“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
”
18.2.5 Tab sheet Sticking images“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
”
18.2.6 Tab sheet Pixel cross talk“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
”
18.2.7 Tab sheet Luminance“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
”
18.2.8 Tab sheet Color“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
”
18.2.9 Tab sheet User defined“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
”
18.2.10 Buttons in the lower part of the dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
18.3 BlackMura“ software package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
”
18.3.1 Installation and Call-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
18.3.2 Making a project file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
18.3.3 Deviating parameterisations of the captures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
18.3.4 Measurement and analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
18.3.5 Automatic measurement (using the Template image generator) . . 284
18.4 Sticking images“ software package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
”
6
Table of Contents
18.4.1 Installation and Call-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

18.4.2 Create burn-in templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
18.4.3 Instruction with burn-in image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
18.4.4 Analysis of burn-in behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
18.5 Add-on COLORzones“ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
”
18.5.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
18.5.2 Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
18.5.3 Manual creation of a region file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
18.5.4 Visual creation of a region file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
18.6 Pixel Crosstalk“ software package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
”
18.6.1 Automatic sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
18.6.2 Manual recording and further action buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
A Formats 298
A.1 Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
A.1.1 Binary formats *.pus, *.pf, *.pcf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
A.1.2 Text format *.txt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
A.1.3 Color image format *.cos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
A.1.4 Export of images in a text format with a coordinate system . . . . 302
A.2 Region lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
A.3 Measuring value tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
A.4 Parameter data records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
B Color metric 309

B.1 Color spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
B.1.1 CIE-RGB, sRGB, EBU-RGB, User-RGB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
B.1.2 Lxy, Luv, Lu’v’, L*u*v*, C*h*s*uv, L*a*b*, C*h*ab . . . . . . . . 311
B.1.3 HSL-color spaces such as HSI and HSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
B.1.4 WST-color space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
B.1.5 LWS-color space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
B.1.6 Lrg-color space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
B.2 Color differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
C Shortcuts 316
D Triggered captures 318

D.1 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
D.2 Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
E Installation of a GigE camera 321
F Translation 325
7
1. Comparison of program versions
Normal Color
Simple Color
Normal
Simple
Function
Capturing luminance images x x x x
Capturing color images x x
Live capture x x
Measurement series x x
Statistic evaluations x x x x
3D-views of luminance x x x x
Projective rectification x x x x
Isolines x x x x
Coordinate transformation x x
Additional evaluation images 1 1+1 N N
Image processing algorithms x x
Use user-defined macros x x x x
Record user-defined macros x x
Calculation of color differences x x
Chromaticity diagrams x x
Decomposing and composing of color images x
Data export to MS Word and MS Excel x x x x
ActiveX programming interface o o o o
Lenses 1 1 N N
Movement units o o
Photometer o o
Legend
x Function is available.
o Function is optional.
1 One monochrome image image and one lens.
1+1 One monochrome and one color evaluation image.
N Any number of evaluation images and lenses.
8
2. Quick lead-in
2.1. How to start-up and quit the program?
The program is opened by the start menu of Windows, in the example by Start |
”
Program | TechnoTeam | Lmk LabSoft“, or by double-clicking on the relevant
start icon.
If a camera is installed on the computer the dialog Select camera and lens“ is
”
opened when the program is started-up. In this dialog either the camera-lens combination
to be used or the evaluation version without the use of hardware can be selected. If there
is no camera installed on the computer this dialog does not appear and the software
evaluation version is started immediately. See section 5.2 on page 43.
9
2. Quick lead-in
When starting the program it is also possible to restore the settings which existed when
the program had been quited. Select Yes“ when asked Restore last settings?“.
” ”
Program start Program end
To restore the settings they had to be saved at the end of the program. Select Yes“
”
when asked Save settings?“. See also chapter 4 beginning on page 30.
”
2.2. Where to find the different items?
The program having started and the program settings saved before having possibly been
loaded the main window of the application appears. For a more detailed documentation
see section 4.4 on page 34.
The main menu contains the menu options which can currently be accessed to:
• The items from Protocol“ to Macros“ contain menus which can be used
” ”
to call up functions such as capturing new images, changing camera parameters
or different image processing operations. The appearance and the behavior of the
entire program are also influenced by the menus on the right-hand side of the main
menu.
10
2.2. Where to find the different items?
• The items from Image“ to Image view“ contain menus which can be used to
” ”
change the image which can currently be seen and this image can for example be
saved.
• The menu Table“ can be accessed if there is a table shown in the lower part
”
of the program. This table can for example be saved, it can be copied into the
clipboard or it can be printed by means of the options of this menu.
• The same is true with the menu Diagram“ whose menu items can be used when
”
a diagram such as a luminance sectional view or a histogram is displayed in the
lower program area.
• The menu items of the menu Diagram“ can be accessed when a horseshoe dia-
”
gram of a color statistic or a three-dimensional view of a monochromatic image
are shown. These diagrams are not shown in the lower tab window together with
tables and graphics of the statistics. However, they are displayed in the upper tab
window together with the images.
Below the main menu there is a button bar containing some of the most important
commands of the menu. Thus, they can be accessed directly by a mouse click. If the
mouse is moved over one of the buttons a help text of this button is displayed for a short
time.
In the middle part of the program window there are all the images which are worked with
in the program. There is always a Camera image“ and a Luminance image“. The
” ”
Color image“ only exists if a color evaluation version or a color camera are worked
”
with. Additionally, the user can generate several evaluation images where measuring
regions, statistics and image processing operations can be used as well.
In the middle part of the the program window the horseshoe diagrams of the statistic ty-
pes Horseshoe line diagram“, Horseshoe area diagram“ and Color symbol
” ” ”
object“ for color images and the 3d view“ for monochromatic images are displayed
”
as well.
To get a better overview, to be able to compare images with each other or to consider an
image and a diagram simultaneously there is additionally to the standard one-window
view a two-window view available. Here, the images and the diagrams can be assigned
at will to the right-hand or left-hand sides.
The tables and diagrams of the statistical evaluations are shown in the tab window at the
lower edge of the program. As mentioned above the menus Table“ and Diagram“ of
” ”
11
2. Quick lead-in
the main menu are influenced by the view selected here. In addition to the presentation
of the statistical results there are:
• The table Overview“ containing a list of all statistics generated in the program.
”
• The views Cursor - table“ and Cursor - graphic“ which are operative
” ”
when a line cursor, a circle cursor or a rectangle cursor are worked with in the
current image.
• The table Last capture“ where the capture parameters and the results of the
”
last luminance or color captures are stored.
Information on the program version, the camera and lens used, and also on the last
measuring protocol can be found in the status bar of the program.
2.3. How to exchange the camera and the lens in the program?
Camera and lens changes are not only possible when the program is started. They can
also be exchanged when the program is worked with. When the menu item Camera |
”
change“ is chosen, the dialog Selection of camera and lens“ is opened where the
”
new selection can be performed. After an exchange the calibration data required for the
relevant camera-lens-combination is loaded. It is possible to change between different
cameras and lenses and it is possible to change between a version with and without
capturing hardware use as well. If such a case occurs the option No camera | No
”
lens“ should be selected in the dialog, see also section 5.2 on page 43.
2.4. How to prepare the camera for capturing images?
The cameras and lenses are delivered with the calibration data needed for their later use.
Before a capture, however, some adaptations are necessary or recommended at least, e.g.
• The adaptation to the brightness of the scene to be captured by selecting a suitable

exposure time or a neutral grey filter.
• The use of a lens which can be focused and the selection of the appropriate cap-
turing distance if a non-focusable lens is used, respectively.
• The adaptation of the spectral corrective data of color cameras if narrow-band
light sources are to be captured.
To set the most suitable camera exposure time set the camera into the live-mode. When
the camera is in this mode it continuously captures and displays images. This mode is
started by the menu item Camera | Live“ or by the relevant quick start button .
”
12
2.4. How to prepare the camera for capturing images?
In the dialog Exposure time“ which opens simultaneously the image can be made
”
brighter or darker by selecting a different exposure time. The options possible in this
dialog are described in section section 6.1.3 on page 51.
The section Filter wheel“ only exists when a filter wheel color camera is used. If
”
required, the operating frequency of the light source can be adjusted on the tab sheet
Modulation“. The live mode is finished by means of the menu item Camera |
” ”
Freeze“ or by the quick start button .
A sharp optical image is of great importance especially if small objects in the image
are in the focus of interest. Otherwise, great differences between the data measured
and the real photometric and colorimetric data would occur. For exact adjustment of
the camera before capturing there is the section Focusing and saturation“ in the
”
dialog. Switching the checkbox of this section on, a measurement region Focusing and
”
saturation“ is displayed in the camera image and values for focus, contrast and saturation
are calculated.
• Focus: In the measurement region edges between light and dark areas of the image
are searched and the width of these edges is measured. The narrower such an edge,
the sharper the optical imaging.
• Contrast: To find edges, a sufficiently large difference in brightness between the
dark and light areas must be present in the measurement area.
13
2. Quick lead-in
• Saturation: Here, the modulation of the image is measured. A sufficient brightness

in the image is a prerequisite for subsequent successful image analysis. The user
can use the radiobuttons Saturation in whole image’änd in marked region“ below
” ”
to decide whether the brightness of the whole image or in the marked region is
used.
Satisfactory values are represented by green bars, insufficient red, yellow or blue:
With focusable lenses the optical properties differ depending on the measuring distance.
Thus, the program has to be informed about the focus set before capturing a luminance
or color image. The adjustment is performed in the dialog itself. After setting the check
box Capture settings“ you can change the values of Focus“, Grey filter“ and
” ” ”
Color correction“ here:
”
14
2.5. How to capture images?
Another possibility is in the dialog Capture options“ which can be opened via the
”
menu item Capture | Properties“.
”
In this dialog all settings which are important for capturing luminance and color images
can be performed. For a more detailed description of all camera and lens settings available
2.5. How to capture images?
15
2. Quick lead-in
In the previous section we mentioned the dialog Capture options“.It also contains
”
the tab sheet Capture options“ where the parameters of the different capturing
”
procedures can be set. The settings of the different options of the capture of luminance
and color images is described in more detail in section 6.2.2 on page 57. The available
capturing algorithms depend on the used camera (color or not):
• By means of the SinglePic algorithm“ a camera image is captured and conver-

”
ted into a luminance image. The capture is started via the menu item Capture
”
| SinglePic“ or the quick start button .
• The algorithm MultiPic“ successively captures several camera images using the
”
same exposure time and produces one common luminance image: Owing to the use
of several camera images the noise in the calculated luminance image is reduced.
The capture is started via the menu item Capture | MultiPic“ or the quick
”
start button .
• By means of the HighDyn“ algorithm several camera images with different ex-
”
posure times are converted to one luminance image. The use of different times
allows a higher dynamic range of the captured scene. A capture is generated via
the menu item Capture | HighDyn“ or the quick start button .
”
• By means of the Color-Highdyn-Simple“ algorithm color captures are possi-
”
ble. The program takes monochromatic HighDyn images with every color filter.
Afterwards it composes them to a color image. The first exposure time is equal
for every color filter. To start such a capture the menu item Capture | Color
”
HighDyn simple“ or the quick start button are used.
• The Color MultiPic“ algorithm takes monochromatic images with every color
”
filter by means of the MultiPic algorithm and combines them to a color image.
The exposure time can be separately chosen for every color filter. To start such a
capture please use menu item Capture | Color MultiPic“ or press the quick
”
start button .
• By means of the Color-Highdyn“ algorithm color captures are possible. The
”
program takes monochromatic HighDyn images with every color filter. Afterwards
it composes them to a color image. The first exposure time can be separately
chosen for every color filter. To start such a capture the menu item Capture |
”
Color HighDyn“ or the quick start button are used.
2.6. How to change the image display?
All images can be enlarged or reduced in size thus allowing either the total image or the
region of interest in an enlarged size to be considered. To select a region of interest is
most convenient by means of the mouse.
• The enlargement is set via the scroll wheel. Scrolling up results in a greater en-
largement whereas scrolling down leads to a reduction as long as the entire image
can be seen again.
• If the complete image does not fit in the display the visible area can be set by
means of horizontal and vertical scrollbars.
16
2.7. Cursor options
• Furthermore, it is possible to adjust the enlargement and the visibility of an image

section by means of the dialog Image enlargement“, see section 9.2 on page 101.
”
Image view Scaling Palettes
The dynamic range of the black-and-white or the color values of an image can be very
large so that with a linear scaling the bright and dark image regions of the screen cannot
simultaneously be seen with the same quality. In those cases a logarithmic scaling can
be used. To change the scaling in a simple way use the relevant button in the button
bar. The scaling options are described in section 9.3 on page 102.
Different color palettes can be assigned to each black-and-white image thus allowing a
pseudo-color representation of this image. Along with pre-defined ranges, it is possible to
define your own palettes and to define luminance regions with threshold values and colors
which may freely be chosen. The palettes may most easily be accessed via the relevant
button in the button bar. Color palettes are documented beginning with section 9.4 on
page 103.
The visibility of different window components such as the color range, the co-ordinate
system and the measuring regions of each image can be changed. These options can be
found in the menu Image view“.
”
2.7. Cursor options
If the mouse pointer is moved over the image box, in the status line information on the
image content or on the regions under the mouse pointer is displayed. The displays of
the status line change in the different mouse modes. Several mouse operations and in
some additionally opened dialogs can be performed. A change of the mouse mode is done
either in the menu Image view | Cursor“, by the relevant button or via a right mouse
”
click in the context menu of the image. See also chapter 12 beginning on page 130.
17
2. Quick lead-in
Main menu Button Context menu
• If the Standard cursor“ is operative, the image value is displayed in the status
”
line at the place of the mouse pointer. With color images it is displayed in the color
space which is set, with black-and-white images in the unit which is valid in this
image.
A region can be marked by clicking on this region by means of the left mouse
button. The marking is required for some measuring region operations such as
displacing, duplicating, changing, deleting, generating and changing a statistical
evaluation. If the mouse pointer is over a marked region, information on this region
is displayed in the status line such as position, size etc.
• If the Line cursor“ is on, a graphical representation of the image values along
”
the cursor line is displayed below the image. The position and length of the line
cursor can be defined either by drawing a new line by means of the pressed left
mouse button or via a dialog which is opened at the same time when the line cursor
is switched on. See section 12.2 on page 133.
• A histogram of the values in a rectangular or circular region around the mouse

pointer can be displayed by means of a Rectangle“ or Circle cursor“. And
” ”
again it is possible to define the size of this region either by dragging with the
mouse or by a dialog.
• All the other mouse modes (new rectangle, new line, new circle, new polygon, new
polyline, new circular ring, new ellipse, new region in dialog) are used to generate
new measuring regions, see the short description in the next section or the more
detailed part in chapter 10 beginning on page 113.
Pressing the right mouse button opens a context menu containi ng all operations possible
at present.
18
2.8. How to define measuring regions?
Nothing marked Marked region
2.8. How to define measuring regions?
The procedure of drawing regions into the image by switching to the relevant cursor
mode was described in the previous section. Measuring regions can be defined in the
mouse modes New rectangle“, New Line“ and New Circle“ by pressing the
” ” ”
left mouse button, moving the mouse and releasing the mouse button. The first point of
the new region is defined by pressing and the second one by releasing.
Just like a circle, a Circular ring“ is defined. Press the left mouse button, you
”
determine the center. Releasing the mouse button to determine a point on the outer
circle. The radius of the inner circle is half of the outer circle. After creating the circular
ring, the radii of the two circles can be changed by moving the point on the circumference
of each circle.
Polygons are defined by more than two points. Therefore, dragging the pressed mouse
button generates a new side of the polygon. The definition of a polygon is finished by
clicking a second time on the last drawn polygon point without moving the mouse or
when the mouse mode New polygon is left. New polylines“ can be created as well as
”
polylines.
The dialog List of regions“ which can be opened by the menu item Regions |
” ”
properties“ is another option to generate new regions. Here, it is possible to modify
the properties of regions already existing. By means of the menu item Regions |
”
Undo“ it is possible to undo erroneously performed changes in the regions. There is a
detailed documentation beginning in chapter 10 beginning on page 113 where all options
to generate, change and handle measuring regions.
2.9. How to use coordinate systems?
Geometric information in the image is always displayed in units of a coordinate system. If

no special coordinate system is defined, pixels are displayed without explicitly displaying
any units. The origin of coordinates is in the upper corner on the left. The x-values grow
from left to right, the y-values grow from top to bottom. The settings of the used
coordinate system can be changed via the menu item Coordinate system | pro-
”
perties“. It is possible to define another Cartesian or a polar coordinate system. The
19
2. Quick lead-in
work with coordinate systems in the program is described in chapter 11 beginning on

page 127.
The coordinate system currently used can be displayed via the menu item Image view
”
| coordinate system“.
2.10. How to define statistical evaluations?
To generate a statistical evaluation first draw measuring regions into an image for the
desired evaluation and mark them. After that, either call up the menu item Statistics“
”
in the context menu of the image or the menu item Evaluation | Statistics“ in the
”
main menu of the program. See section 13.1 on page 136.
Statistiktyp Statistikparameter
A statistical object is characterized by the 5 properties below:
• Image“: A black-and-white or a color image delivers the pixel values.

”
• Measuring region“: The region defined in the image determines the image
”
points the evaluation is used for.
• Type“: The type of calculation to be carried out. At present, the following
”
types are implemented in the program: Standard statistic“, Sectional
” ”
20
2.11. What are the image processing options?
view“, Histogram“, Projection“, Luminance object“, Integral ob-

” ” ” ”
ject“, Symbol object“, 3d-view diagram“, Color symbol object“,
” ” ”
Horseshoe line diagram“, Horseshoe area diagram“.
” ”
• Calculation parameters“: Depending on type different calculation parame-
”
ters are required.
• Views“: The presentation of measuring results can occur in different formats.

”
When handling images, measuring regions and statistics there are two main differences
between the Lmk LabSoft“ and the Lmk2000“:
” ”
• When a measuring region has been generated no standard statistic is calculated
for the new region.
• For each measuring region only one statistic can be calculated.

The representation of the statistical results is shown in tabular or graphical form. In the
default setting not all the views existing for a statistic are displayed. In sectional views
and histograms for example the table with the standard statistics (mean value, variance,
minimum, maximum) is not displayed but only the measured course of the function in
a graph. The visibility settings can be changed for each type of statistic via the menu
item Program view | visibility of tables and diagrams“.
”
Table Standard color statistics
There is a context menu in all of the views which can be opened by pressing the right
mouse button. It contains the same menu items existing in the main menu of the program
in the menus Table“, Diagram“ and Graph“. For more details see section 13.5 on
” ” ”
page 179.
2.11. What are the image processing options?
In some applications it is useful to link the values of the different images with arithmetic
or logic operations. Contrast, for example, can be calculated by linking two images
arithmetically. The options available in the program for that are mainly summarized in
the dialog Image processing“ which can be called up via the menu item Evaluation
” ”
| image processing“. For more detailed information see section 14.10 on page 212.
21
2. Quick lead-in
The additional evaluation images required for these operations can be generated via the
menu items Evaluation | generate a new image“ or Duplicate image“. For
” ”
more information see section 14.1 on page 196.
There are other image evaluation and processing operations available. They are as fol-
lows:
• Projective rectification“: Perspective distortions which are produced by an

”
oblique view of the camera on the measuring scene can be corrected. This method
is described in section 14.7 on page 205.
• Isolines“: Isolines are lines of equal brightness in the image. If there is a con-
”
tinuous course of brightness in the image e.g. bright areas gradually changing to
dark, it is possible to mark areas whose brightness is higher or lower than selec-
ted threshold values by means of an isoline representation. The representation of
isolines is handled in section 14.9 on page 209.
• Transformation of coordinates“: The correction of heavy lens distortions

”
and the conversion of images in polar and in sphere coordinate systems are cha-
racteristic fields of application. For coordinate transformation see section 14.8 on
page 208.
The Image set-up dialog“ can be useful as it allows the user to measure and
”
also to save the position of the object to be measured in the camera image and
the imaging scale, i.e., the size of the object to be measured, in the object system
22
2.12. How to record and replay courses?
of coordinates. This information can then be used to correct - through projective

equalization - the twisting and tilting of the object to be measured with regard to
the camera, and to assign to the corrected result image a system of coordinates
containing the real dimensions of the object. See section 6.6 on page 74.
Using the menu item Evaluation | Searching for regions and using them
”
automatically“, a dialog is opened which allows the user to find regions auto-
matically in a luminance or color image through their brightness. See section 14.6
on page 14.6.
2.12. How to record and replay courses?
There is a macro recorder in the program which can record a series of user actions and
save them as a menu item. If this menu item is called up later, the instruction sequence
recorded before is carried out again. The main operations which can be recorded are:
• Capturing luminance or color images
• Generating and deleting evaluation images
• Loading and saving images
• Arithmetic and logic operations on images
• Projective rectification
• Isolines
• Transforming coordinates
The macro recorder can be called up either via the menu item Macros | Macro-
”
recorder“ or by the button Macro recorder“ in the dialog Image processing“.
” ”
After recording the menu items generated can be found in the menu Macros“. The
”
use of the recorder is described in detail in section 14.11 on page 220.
2.13. What color evaluation options do exist?
The measuring values in a color image are displayed in a color space which is set via the
menu item Image | color space“ and where - in case of color spaces with reference
”
color - the parameters can be set in the dialog Color space“. The handling of the
”
dialog are documented in section 9.5 on page 108.
23
2. Quick lead-in
The color space being changed, the measuring data for this image and the statistical
evaluations generated in the selected color space are output.
As for black-and-white images, in color images the Standard statistics“ (mean va-
”
lues, variance, minimum and maximum), Sectional views“ and Histograms“ can
” ”
be calculated. The statistical objects Color symbol object“, Horseshoe line
” ”
diagram“ and Horseshoe area diagram“ are especially suitable for the statistical
”
evaluation of color image regions.
Color distances can be calculated via the menu items Color | color difference
”
between two images“ and Color | color difference to one color“. The
”
calculation of color differences is described in section 15.3 on page 229.
A color image can be decomposed into components via the menu item Color | De-
”
compose into color extracts“ e.g.. into X, Y, Z, L, x, y etc. As a result of the
decomposition there are monochromatic images which can be analyzed and handled by
image processing methods. If it makes sense to compose the results of the processing to
a new image it can be done by means of the menu item Color | Compose color
”
extracts“. These procedures are described in section 15.1 on page 228.
2.14. How to print or export the results?
The menus and context menus, respectively of images, tables, graphs and diagrams have
the menu items Print“, Copy“ and Export“. Short description:
” ” ”
• Print“: Direct output of a relevant view to a printer connected.
”
• Copy“: Filing the relevant view into the clipboard thus enabling it to be inserted
”
into a different program. The data format depends on the view, sometimes data is
copied into the clipboard in different formats simultaneously. Therefore, the menu
24
2.15. How to store results for a later evaluation?
item Insert contents“ or Insert as“ should be used if available instead of

” ”
Insert“ in order to have full control about the format to be inserted.
”
• Exporting“: The results are stored in a file. And again the data format is de-
”
pendent on the relevant view.
To generate, process and represent reports in a word processing system or in a table

calculation the program has export interfaces to Microsoft Word“ and Microsoft
” ”
Excel“. The dialogs for the data export are called via the menu items Protocol |
”
Export to MS-Word“ and Protocol | Export to MS Excel“, respectively.
”
A more detailed description of the export options to Word and Excel can be seen in
section 16.3 beginning on page 236.
When exporting to Word text markers are used in order to identify the insertion places,
when exporting to Excel the names of the tab sheets are used. Hence, it is possible to
generate in both programs customer-defined and task-specific source documents where
the data is updated by the Lmk software.
2.15. How to store results for a later evaluation?
The current program state can be saved in a protocol file via the menu item Protocol
”
| Save file“. The state can be restored later via the menu item Protocol | Load“.
”
The protocol files with the ending *.ttcs (TechnoTeam Compressed Stream) contain:
• Images.
• Measuring regions.
• Parameters of all statistical evaluations, thus allowing them to be reconstructed
after loading the images and regions.
• Display parameters thus enabling the representation of the measuring results to
be set into the state as they were when they were stored.
• Results of the time statistic.
When at the end of the program the software offers to store the current state in order
to allow it to be reconstructed when the program is started again thus allowing you
25
2. Quick lead-in
to continue work at the same point then storing is performed in the same format. For
details see chapter 8 beginning on page 96.
Protocols in HDF5 format as used in the Lmk2000“ software can be loaded via the
”
menu item Protocol | Import HDF5 file“. Storing in this format is not possible.
”
Images, measuring regions and parameter files of statistics and some image processing
operations can be saved in single files and loaded again later. It is, however, not possible
to load results again which are calculated by the program automatically such as tables,
diagrams, graphs.
2.16. How to exchange data between different measuring

records
It is often the case that images or measuring regions saved in a particular measuring
record shall be used also for another evaluation. However, when loading a new protocol
which contains the data of interest, the data already existing in the program will be
overwritten. Now, a second instance of the program can simply be opened to load a
second protocol there. When starting another instance of the software, first a security
query will have to be answered:
In the second program which is opened, the second protocol can be opened. Now, data
can be exchanged between both programs via the clipboard.
Another option is to make sure that, by means of the menu item Update protocol“,
”
not all of the already existing data are overwritten, but, for example, only the contents
of the images or the kind of the evaluations. See also paragraph 8.2 on page 97.
2.17. How can the program work with other programs?
The export options to the clipboard and the compatibility with Microsoft Word and
Microsoft Excel were described in section 2.14 on page 24. Additionally, the program
version LabSoft Extended“ can be used as ActiveX-Server. A possible application
”
is to write your own Excel application where the Lmk“ functions can be accessed by
”
means of Visual Basic“. At present, the ActiveX interface is capable of performing
”
the functions below:
• Opening and closing application and camera.
• Capturing camera, luminance and color images.
• Loading and saving images and protocols. They can already have the evaluation
images and statistics needed.
26
2.18. How can the program be reset to the factory settings?
• Access to the measuring values of the statistics.

• Handling different menu items. Hence, the user can work with macros of his own.
The ActiveX interface is described in chapter 17 beginning on page 243. If desired, the
existing range of functions can be expanded.
2.18. How can the program be reset to the factory settings?
Many settings implemented in the program are saved after the program is finished. When
it is restarted later, these settings will be loaded, such as:
• The display of the results of statistical analyses,

• the colored representation of image points for luminance, integral and symbol ob-
jects,
• images and parameters used in the image arithmetic functions,
• parameters and settings found in numerous dialogs.
Using the menu item Program preview | Reset to factory settings“, these
”
entries can be deleted in order to return to that state provided during the original
program installation.
After calling this function, the program must be restarted to allow any modifications to
become effective.
2.19. Where to get help?
In the program this manual is opened via the menu item Help | manual“. In case
”
of problems which cannot be solved by reading the manual we recommend you to col-
lect some information on the items listed below before contacting our customer service
department:
• What program version is worked with? Use the menu item Help | On“.
”
• What hardware is used (number of camera, additional hardware)?
• What function do you want to be informed on, when and where do the problems
occur?
• In what section of the manual is the function described? What is wrong and does
not work as described in the manual?
• Save the data which cause the problem. We recommend to save the data in a pro-
tocol file (menu item Protocol | save file“). These files contain the complete
”
program state and are a convenient tool for describing the problem.
• Note the step of the process the problem resulted from.
Having collected this information contact the customer service department, please:
info@technoteam.de
27
3. Software license
If you call the program after the initial installation, then at the start the license dialog
will be opened:
In the first line of the dialog, the current license key is displayed. As can be seen in the
bottom line, this key is valid for 30 days after installation. Within this period a new key
can be requested by Techno Team, which has a longer validity.
The second line of the dialog displays information that has automatically determined by
the program. In the third line input fields are present, in which the user can enter his
information. The program here also tries to independently identify information. In the
figure above the Camera number“ is filled in from existing calibration data on the
”
computer and Contact person“ from the Windows credentials.
”
After pressing the button Help“, the procedure is displayed how you can receive a new
”
license key:
28
The three fields Camera number“, Contact person“ and Mail address“ are
” ” ”
provided with an *“, because this information is required by TechnoTeam“. Our goal
” ”
is to get to any camera or software installation a contact name and email address in order
to always be informed on program updates due to eliminated errors or innovations the
right one: Either the IT administrator or the main user of the program on this computer.
After completing the three fields marked with an *“ the button Copy to Clipboard“
” ”
is unlocked. After pressing it the prepared mail text is copied to the Windows Clipboard
and can be inserted from there into your own mail program:
The first line contains the email address to which the license request is to be sent, the
second the subject of the mail. After sending the mail you will obtained an answer mail
with the new key within a few days:
The new key can be entered in the license dialog. After pressing the button Take over
”
new key“, the licensing has been completed:
29
4. Starting and closing the program
4.1. Starting the program
The program is opened by the start menu of Windows, in the example by Start
”
| Program files | TechnoTeam | Lmk LabSoft“, or by double-clicking on the
relevant start icon.
If a camera is installed on the computer the dialog Select camera and lens“ is
”
opened when the program is started-up. In this dialog either the camera-lens combination
to be used or the evaluation version without the use of hardware can be selected. If there
is no camera installed on the computer this dialog does not appear and the software
evaluation version is started immediately. See section 5.2 on page 43.
30
4.2. Closing the program
If the dialog is left by Cancel“ the default settings marked as a red line remain. After
”
Ok“ the hardware desired is initialized. After that, the program will ask you whether
”
you want to load a program state again which had possibly been saved before.
The last program state is saved in the file lastwork.ttcs“. This file and some
”
other temporary files are saved in the temporary user directory in the subdirectory
/lmk4.exe/“.
”
4.2. Closing the program
The program can be closed by the icon Close“ in the top right-hand corner of the
”
program window, by the menu item Protocol | Close“ or by the key Alt-F4“.
” ”
Then, the user is asked if he wants to save the current state.
As described in the previous section, the saving is performed in the protocol file last-
”
work.ttcs“. When working with the program other protocols can be loaded or saved.
The work with protocol files is described in detail in chapter 8 beginning on page 96.
4.3. Program and data directories
After installation of the program the directories containing calibration and result data
are presetted to sub directories of the installation directory. In many cases other settings
are preferable. For example in Windows 7 there are problems writing to these default
directories. By means of the menu point Program view | Program directories“
”
it is possible to view and change these allocations. After pressing the menu button the
dialog Program directories“ is opened.
”
If the check box Installation directories“ is set in the dialog, all directories created
”
meanwhile installation are shown:
31
In the lower part of the dialog all directories are visible, which are used also for writing
in the program. In Windows 7 the data are not written in these directories but in the so
called Virtual Store“, which is created separately for every user:
”
The operating system automatically creates a path name. It contains the directory name
of the virtual store“ of the current user
”
c:/users/user name/appdata/local/virtualstore“ and the installation direc-
”
tory of the program /program files/technoteam/labsoft/subdir/“.
”
In every line of the dialog the user can:
1. Get an information about the usage of the associated directory in the program by
pressing the button ?“.
”
2. Change to the presetted default directory by pressing the button Default“.
”
3. Type in the wished directory in a directory select dialog after pressing Change“.
”
If a directory is changed all data are not copied from the old directory to the new one.
That’s why if there are already files with the same name, they will be not overwritten
by the copied one.
32
4.3. Program and data directories
The files in the source directory remain undeleted. By this behavior conflicts are avoided,
which comes into existence, if files to be copied and deleted are still in use in source
directory.
All changes in directories are active immediately after pressing the mentioned buttons.
They remain active even after closing the program.
33
4.4. The main window of the application
When the program has been started and a program state which had been saved before
has been loaded again, you are in the main window of the application.
4.4.1. Main menu
The items of the main menu are divided into groups.
In the first group there are the main menu items.

• The menu Protocol“ contains the menu items for loading and saving protocols,
”
for importing HDF5“ files (protocol format of Lmk2000 software), for changing
”
the language used in the program and for calling up the dialogs for the data export
to Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel.
• The menu items which are used to control the used camera are summarized in the
menu Camera“: Turning on and off the capture mode, selecting the exposure
”
time, recalibrating the camera, exchanging camera and lens.
• The menu items of the menu Capture“ contain all the menu items needed to
”
capture new luminance and color images and the parameterization of the capturing
algorithms as well.
• The functions listed below are summarized in the menu Evaluation“:
”
– Accessing the statistical calculations (see chapter 13 beginning on page 135).
34
– Creating and deleting evaluation images. Evaluation images are essential for
a lot of image processing algorithms (see section 14.1 on page 196).
– Assigning lists of regions to images (see section 14.4 on page 198).
– Accessing to the general image processing dialog (see section 14.10 on pa-
ge 212).
– Calling different image processing operations: projective rectification, trans-
formation of coordinates, calculation of isolines. These operations are descri-
bed in chapter 14 beginning on page 194.
The image menu items are required for processing the current image. In the one-tab-
window view the image displayed is always the current image. In the two-tab-window
view either the image on the right-hand side or on the left-hand side can be made active
by clicking with the left mouse key on the image desired. Then, the image menu is part
of the enabled image.
Luminance image“ is enabled

”
Evaluation[1]“ is enabled
”
The tasks performed by the image menu items are as follows:
• Image“: Loading, saving, printing, duplicating, deleting, copying and pasting

”
images, changing existing image properties. For a more detailed description see
chapter 9 beginning on page 99.
• Regions“: Loading, saving, copying and pasting lists of regions. Creating, de-
”
leting and changing regions via dialog. Operations possible with regions can be
found in chapter 10 beginning on page 113.
35
• Coordinate system“: Loading, saving, copying and pasting a coordinate sys-

”
tem. Changing the coordinate system properties of the current image via a dialog.
The coordinate systems are described in detail in chapter 11 beginning on page 127.
• Image view“: Changing the image display: scaling, palette, zoom, cursor, status
”
line. For a more detailed description see section 9.2 on page 101.
The accessibility of the menu items of the menus Table“, Graphic“ or Diagram“
” ” ”
depends on the existence and the condition of these views in the program.
• The menu Table“ contains the option to save, to copy into the clipboard or
”
to print an existing table. Furthermore, existing columns of a table can be made
invisible. The invisible columns are no longer taken into consideration during the
saving, copying and printing operations.
• The menu items of the menu Graphic“ can be used to save, copy or print graphics
”
such as sectional views of luminance or histograms or to change their display
properties.
• The menu Diagram“ contains the possible operations for horseshoe diagrams or
”
3D-views. The functionality is the same as for graphics.
36
The total view of the program can be modified in the menu Window“. You can select
”
either a one-tab-window or a two-tab-window view or you can decide to display images
and diagrams or tables and graphics.
In the menu Help“ you can open this operation manual or you can get information on
”
the current program version.
4.4.2. Tool bar
A tool bar below the main menu allows quick access to the most important menu com-
mands. Thus, they can directly be accessed via a mouse click. If the mouse is moved
over one of these buttons a help text is shown for a short time.
Protocols and printing
New protocol, deleting all images, tables, graphics and diagrams.
Loading protocol.
Saving protocol.
Calling up the dialog Print report“.

”
For more information on protocols see chapter 8 beginning on page 96. For printing
outputs see section 16.3 on page 236.
Camera and capturing
Live mode, i.e. turning on permanent capture mode.
Turning off permanent capture mode.
Opening the dialog Exposure time“.

”
Capturing a luminance image by means of the algorithm SinglePic“.
”
Capturing a luminance image by means of the algorithm MultiPic“.
”
Capturing a luminance image by means of the algorithm HighDyn“.
”
Capturing a color image by means of the algorithm Color HighDyn sim-
”
ple“.
Capturing a color image by means of the algorithm Color MultiPic“.

”
37
Capturing a color image by means of the algorithm Color HighDyn“.

”
For further information on turning the live mode and the exposure time“ dialog
”
on and off see section 6.1.1 on page 50. For capturing luminance and color images see
section 6.2 on page 55.
Program view
Restoring the standard vertical distribution of images and tables.
Restoring the standard horizontal distribution of images and tables.
Switching to the one-tab-window view. In this view the image can be seen
in full width.
Switching to the two-tab-window view . In this view two images are displayed
side by side.
The menu items by means of which these displays can also be changed can be found in
the menu item Window“ in the main menu.
”
Image display
Behind the last 3 buttons of the tool bar there are menus where you can modify the
display of the current image. Depending on the current settings also the appearance of
the buttons changes. To modify the settings do not click on the button but on the arrow
on the right.
Display of the current scaling and the option to modify it. For more detailed
information see section 9.3 on page 102.
Display of the current color palette and the option to modify it. For more
detailed information see section 9.4 on page 103.
Display of the current cursor and the option to modify it. For more detailed
information see chapter 12 beginning on page 130.
38
4.4.3. Image display
In the center part of the program the images and diagrams are displayed in a tab window.
The image or diagram desired can be shown in the foreground by clicking on the tab.
After the start of the program there are the Camera image“ and the Luminance
” ”
image“. The Color image“ only exists if a color camera or the color evaluation version
”
of the program is used.
While working with the program the other tabs were created if desired:
• The 3D View diagram“ is the result view of a statistical evaluation see chap-
”
ter 13 beginning on page 135.
• The image Evaluation[1]“ is a monochromatic evaluation image, the image
”
Evaluation[2]“ is a color evaluation image. For working with evaluation images
”
in image processing see chapter 14 beginning on page 194 and for color evaluation
see chapter 15 beginning on page 227.
A part of the luminance image is displayed in the middle. The colors used for the pseudo
colorization of the luminance values can be seen in the color palette on the right-hand
side of the image. The values in this palette show what luminance appears in what color
in the image.
In the top right-hand part of the rectangular measuring region, displayed in the image,
you can find its designation 1“. The name of the image and the name of the region allow
”
a distinct relation between the measuring values of the statistics and their measuring
places in the image.
The horizontal and vertical auxiliary lines in the image are part of theused coordinate
system . The axis marking can be found on the left and on the top edge of the image.
Measuring values belonging to the cursor used in the image are displayed in a box below
the image. In the example, a luminance value L in cd/m2 was measured at the position (x,
y) . The names and units of the geometric position depend on the coordinate system used,
see chapter 11 beginning on page 127. Physical parameters and units can be modified
via the dialog Image properties“, see section 9.6.2 on page 110.
”
39
The scroll bar next to the right-hand side and the bottom of the image allows to navigate
in the image. The enlargement of the image is achieved best by means of the scroll wheel
of the mouse.
4.4.4. Tables and graphics
There is a second tab window in the lower part of the program where the results are
displayed. Here, the results of the statistical evaluations are represented as tables and
graphics. The following information is always displayed there:
• Overview“: This table contains a list of all statistics defined in the program
”
together with their parameters such as type of statistic, image and region the
statistic was created for.
In the example shown two objects of the Standard color statistic“ type were
”
created in the Color image“. There is another evaluation of the 3D View
” ”
diagram“ type in the Luminance image“.
”
• Last capture“: This table contains the parameters used after a capture.
”
• Cursor - Graphic“ and Cursor - Table“: These two views are only enabled
” ”
if in the current image a rectangle“, circle“ or line cursor“ is used.
” ” ”
In those cases the statistical measuring results are represented in table form or
graphically at the cursor position. If there is a rectangle or a circle cursor the
display contains a histogram of the measuring values within the cursor; if there is
a line cursor then a sectional view is shown along the cursor.
40
• All the other tables and graphics are created when statistical objects are created
and the visibility of the views is desired. Creating, parameterizating and deleting
statistical evaluations are described in chapter 13 beginning on page 135.
4.4.5. Context menus
In several views of the program there are context menus available. They can be opened
by pressing the right mouse key. Some of them have the same menu items as you can find
for these views in the main menu. Others, however, contain additional options relating
to the current state of the relevant view.
The context menu of the image tab window contains menu items which can also be found
in the menu Evaluation“ of the main menu. In contrast to user-defined evaluation
”
images, the Luminance image“ as a permanently existing image cannot be deleted.
”
Therefore, the menu item Delete current image“ is not enabled.
”
The menu item Change side“ can only be used when working in the two-tab window
”
mode. An image can be displaced from the tab window on the left to the one on the
right by means of this menu item without using the dialog Evaluation | Assigning
”
the windows“.
41
The context menus in the displays of the tables and graphics in the lower part of the
program are identical to the corresponding menu items in the main menu when Table“
”
and Graphic“ are used.
”
The menu items in the context menu of an image are different depending on the existence
of no marked region, one marked region or two marked regions. Furthermore, not all
operations are possible with all region types. For example, when working with rectangular
regions it is not possible to delete or insert contour points.
42
5. Camera, lens and recalibration
5.1. Installing new calibration data
After the installation of the program the calibration data for the camera and its lenses
to be used does still not exist. They can be engaged via the menu item Camera | New
”
calibration data“. A directory dialog is opened allowing the directory (usually on a
CD) which contains the data needed to be selected.
The selected directory with the calibration data is automatically copied into the subdi-
rectory Camera“ of the existing program installation.
”
There is a security query before existing data is overwritten during an update operation.
After the copying step the new data is immediately available and can be used without
a new program start.
5.2. Selecting camera and lens
If there is some calibration data available when the program is started, a dialog for the
selection of a camera-lens combination opens automatically. If required this dialog can
manually be opened by calling up the menu item Camera | change“. Hence, you
”
can change to a different camera, to a different lens or to the evaluation version of the
program without using hardware.
43
If the dialog is left by Cancel“ the current settings marked as a red line remain. Using
”
Ok“ the hardware desired is initialized.
”
5.3. Setting camera and lens properties
The dialog Capture options“ can be opened by selecting the menu item Camera |
” ”
recalibration“. The dialog contains the page Recalibration“. Here, the calibration
”
data loaded by selecting the camera-lens-combination can be complemented.
The unit and the conversion factor for the luminance calculation are defined in the section
Converting units“. The TechnoTeam“ cameras for luminance measurements are
” ”
calibrated in cd/m2“ and the conversion factor is 1“. If a result output in for example
” ”
Footlambert is desired, the unit fL“ and the conversion factor 0.291864 (1.0/3.4262591)
”
have to be entered.
If there is a deviation of the measured luminance from the calibration standards of the
company, it can be corrected by entering a factor in the section Recalibration“.
”
44
The corrections possible in the section Capture settings“ are as follows:

”
• When working with a focusable lens a calibration factor changes depending on the
distance settings of the lens. In such a case the scale value has to be read from
the lens, the button Change“ in the line Focus“ has to be used and the focus
” ”
value desired has to be selected in the dialog:
• If neutral grey filters or other filters are used and if there are the corresponding
factors available in the calibration data, the used filters can be entered into the
line Grey filter“ after having selected the button Change“. Several filters can
” ”
be selected simultaneously by keeping the Ctrl.-key in the dialog Grey filter“
”
pressed. For them a common correction factor is calculated then.
The image on the right hand side shows an example of the usage of neutral density
filters together with a color camera. The calibration of these filters takes into ac-
count that the transmission of those filters depends on the color filters of the color
wheel camera. Thats why the correction factor changes if the color filter currently
used has changed.
• The luminance calibration of the camera is performed with standard light
”
type A“. When measuring narrow-band light sources, some deviations of the
measured luminance are possible. Therefore, in the line Color correction“
”
you can define your own calibration factors where deviations in always repeating
measuring tasks with known light sources of this type can be corrected.
45
In contrast to the dialogs for the selection of a focus factor and of a neutral grey
filter, the list for the color correction factors is usually empty when the program
is delivered. By means of the button New item“ a new correction factor can be
”
defined and a value can be entered. Existing entries can be edited via Change
”
item“ and removed again via Delete item“.
”
When working with a color camera the color matrixing can be modified by means of
the button Change“ in the section Color factors“. This option is described in
” ”
section 5.3.1 on page 48.
All settings of the dialog are reset to the standard settings after using the button
Default“:
”
• Luminance measurement in cd/m2 .

• Recalibration factor = 1.
• No focus factor, no neutral grey filter, no color correction factor.
• The use of standard color factors when using color filters.
User-defined calibration data records can be managed via the buttons Load“ and
”
Save“. The dialogs Save capture options“ or Load capture options“ are
” ” ”
opened:
46
When saving options by means of the button New“ a new data record with capture
”
options can be created in these dialogs. When a data record has been changed data
is accepted by means of Accept“, by Reject“ the changes are canceled. When the
” ”
dialog is called up the data from the recalibration dialog is accepted in the program or
written into a file.
In the section Set coordinate system in captured images“ can be set, whether
”
in captured camera, luminance and color image a coordinate system is calculated from
the properties of the lens and the shooting distance. Basis of the calculation are the pro-
perties of the lens, which are stored in the calibration data of the camera. For automatic
assignment of a coordinate system, the checkbox of this section must be turned on:
You can choose one of three options:
1. Pixels“: In this case, the default coordinate system is used for images. A con-
”
version of pixel coordinates in angles or lengths does not take place.
2. Angles“: Angle coordinates are calculated for each pixel in degrees from the
”
horizontal and vertical aperture angle of the lens.
3. Units of lengths“: If the coordinate system should work in length units such
”
as millimeters or centimeters, the input of the distance between the camera and
the object is necessary in addition to the already known aperture angle of the lens.
There are two input fields Camera-object distance“ and Unit“. The output
” ”
of the lengths in the coordinate system is carried out in the same unit that was
used in the dialog to input the distance between camera and object.
The so automatically assigned coordinate system is not very accurate, since for example
lens distortion or twisting of the object to be measured is not taken into account. If a
more accurate coordinate system is required, the facilities can be used, as described in
the section 6.6 Image set-up dialog“ on page 74. About coordinate systems see also
”
chapter 11 Coordinate systems“ on page 127. A lens with a strong distortion can be
”
corrected only with the possibilities, which are described in section 14.8 Coordinate
”
transformation“ on page 208. But for this additional calibration data are required.
47
5.3.1. Color factors
When a filter wheel color camera is used, the company-based color matrixing can be
replaced by a user-defined matrixing in order to achieve a better adaptation of the
measured color values to the measuring tasks desired. Changing the color matrixing can
be performed as described in the previous section via the capture option dialog.
Company-based matrixing
User-defined matrixing
In the upper part of the dialog there is a tab with the matrixing existing in the program.
In the middle of the dialog there is the following information for a matrixing:
• Last change“: Time of the last change of the color factor set.
”
• Comment“: Here, remarks with respect to matrixing can be entered.
”
• By means of the six check boxes arranged side by side you can select which of
the 6 filters in the filter wheel are to be used for a luminance or color capture,
respectively.
• Factor 1“: A prefactor for the color image and another one for the black-and-
”
white image.
• Factor 2“: A prefactor per color channel.
”
• 4x6 field with factors for the weighting of a color filter in the corresponding result
image.
48
The lower part of the dialog contains the following functions:
• The view in the dialog changes depending on whether the corresponding view had
been selected via the radio buttons In RGB“ or In XYZ“. The factors are
” ”
displayed in the corresponding color space.
• The check box Changeable“ shows whether the data record coefficients may be
”
changed by the user. In the default settings the first data record Standard“ is
”
write-protected. The default parameters are accepted for other user-defined data
records.
• The check box Used“ shows if the next color images can be calculated by means
”
of the parameters currently displayed. One data record can exactly be in this state.
If it is not set the data record displayed can be transformed into the record which
is used by means of the button Use current“.
”
• A new data record can be created by the button New“. In a dialog you first have
”
to give the name of the new data record, then the new data record is displayed
in the tab window. During the creation the parameters of the Standard“ data
”
record are entered.
• The data record displayed can be deleted by means of the button Delete“. All
”
data records designated as Changeable“ can be deleted. The first standard data
”
record cannot be deleted.
• The two buttons Copy“ and Paste“ allow the factors to be exchanged bet-
” ”
ween data records via the clipboard. Name, comment and the flags Used“ and
”
Changeable“ are not copied.
”
• The data of the Standard“ data record is transferred to the current record by
”
means of the button Default“.
”
• If the changes made in the dialog have not been saved the previous state can be
reconstructed via the button Reload“.
”
• The color space transformation can be adapted to the measuring value of a re-
ference device (Lxy) by means of the button Adjust“. For that, simultaneous
”
measurements with the Lmk and the reference device are required.
• By means of the button Reset“ the factors in the column Factor 2“ are set
” ”
to 1 (only visible in the view In XYZ“).
”
• A new name for the new data record can be entered by means of the button
Rename“. The program does not allow a name to be used twice.
”
• Changes of the current data record can be accepted by using the button Save
”
current“.
If the parameter changes have been performed they are available in the program only
and are not permanently saved in the calibration data. Thus a corresponding query when
the dialog is left by the button Close“.
”
49
6. Capturing images
6.1. Capturing camera images
A single camera image with the current exposure time is captured via the menu item
Camera | grab“.
”
One or more camera images are captured via the menu item Capture | Autoscan“.
”
After each capture the brightness of the image is checked. If the brightest parts of an
image are not overdriven yet this image is said to have its optimal brightness. The
program corrects the exposure time automatically taking further shots as long as the
optimal brightness has been achieved.
6.1.1. Turning on the permanent capture mode (live mode)
The permanent capture mode by the camera is turned on either by means of the button
or via the menu item Camera | Live“. At the same time, the view of the program is
”
changed so that the camera image can also be seen. For that, the camera image is made
the active window in the tab window. The dialog Exposure time“ is simultaneously
”
opened at the beginning of the live mode in order to set the exposure to light.
When a wheel color camera is used, the currently set color filter is not changed by the
auto-scan algorithm. The calculated exposure time is therefore only optimal for this
filter. Normally the V(λ)-filter is chosen, so with the auto-scan algorithm the calculated
time is optimal for succeeding luminance recordings.
For color captures it is expedient to calculate the optimal exposure times for every color
filter separately. For this task there is the menu item Capture | Color auto scan“.
”
Both for monochromatic and for color cameras it may be useful to limit the image
area used for the determination of the optimum exposure time. If there are bright glare
sources outside the area of interest, they will produce an overdrive in the images. But
if this overdrive is irrelevant in later measurements, the image area for determination of
optimal exposure times can be reduced. For the selection of an image area for overdrive
control there is the menu item Capture | Set region for overdrive control“.
”
6.1.2. Turning off the permanent capture mode (freeze mode)
The permanent capture mode of the camera can be closed by the button or via the
menu item Camera | Freeze“. The exposure time dialog possibly still open is closed
”
at the same time.
50
6.1.3. Modifying the capture mode properties
Together with the previous menu items the exposure time setting dialog is opened si-
multaneously and then closed again. However it can also be opened whenever you want
by means of the menu item Camera | Exposure time“ or by the button in order to
”
be informed about the parameters currently set or in order to modify them.
The dialog contains the two pages Time“ and Modulation“. The appearance of the
” ”
page Time“ depends on working with a filter wheel color camera or a black-and-white
”
camera. The section Filter wheel“ only exists if a filter wheel camera is used.
”
Page Time“ Page Modulation“

” ”
Current exposure time
The exposure time currently used by the camera is displayed in the entry field Current
”
exposure time“ where it can also be changed by the user. All entries have to be
terminated either by the enter key or by the button Set“. The region allowing user-
”
defined entries contains information on the longest and on the shortest exposure times.
In contrast to numerical entries, it is also possible to use the buttons Brighter“ or
”
Darker“ or the function keys F8“ or Shift-F8“ if a different exposure time has to
” ” ”
be selected.
In applications where the objects to be measured contain the brightest image regions
a suitable exposure time is selected by the program itself. The option Automatic
”
control in live mode“ is available for this purpose. After the capture of every single
camera image the algorithm implemented checks for overdriving and carries out relevant
corrections of the exposure time.
51
6. Capturing images
Filter wheel
If a filter wheel camera is worked with the filter used can be changed in the section
Filter wheel“. With this filter the next capture of a monochromatic image with the
”
algorithms SinglePic“, MultiPic“ or HighDyn“ is shot, see the following sections.
” ” ”
The capture of a color image with the algorithm ColorHighDyn“ is not influenced
”
by the selection of the filter in the dialog. For the use of filters for capturing color images
see section 5.3.1 on page 48.
Modulation
If the light sources are operated by alternating voltage the light emitted is modulated.
To avoid modulation-caused measuring errors it is recommended to use exposure times
which are integer multiples of the cycle duration of the modulation. On the page Mo-
”
dulation“ the modulation frequency can be entered and the program can be instructed
by the option Modulated light existing“ to use suitable times only.
”
With alternating voltage, usually double the frequency can be entered since the light is
modulated with the doubled frequency.
The modulation frequency entered into the dialog Exposure time“ is equal to the one
”
used in the dialog Capture options“ on the page Modulation“, see section 6.2.2
” ”
on page 57.
Please, note that with enabled modulation option exposure times shorter than the duration
of one cycle are impossible.
Focusing and saturation
A sharp optical image is of great importance especially if small objects in the image
are in the focus of interest. Otherwise, great differences between the data measured
and the real photometric and colorimetric data would occur. For exact adjustment of
the camera before capturing there is the section Focusing and saturation“ in the
”
dialog. Switching the checkbox of this section on, a measurement region Focusing and
”
saturation“ is displayed in the camera image and values for focus, contrast and saturation
are calculated.
• Focus: In the measurement region edges between light and dark areas of the image
are searched and the width of these edges is measured. The narrower such an edge,
the sharper the optical imaging.
• Contrast: To find edges, a sufficiently large difference in brightness between the
dark and light areas must be present in the measurement area.
52
• Saturation: Here, the modulation of the image is measured. A sufficient brightness

in the image is a prerequisite for subsequent successful image analysis. The user
can use the radiobuttons Saturation in whole image’änd in marked region“ below
” ”
to decide whether the brightness of the whole image or in the marked region is
used.
Satisfactory values are represented by green bars, insufficient red, yellow or blue:
Capture settings
Especially for small objects of interest in the image a sharp optical reproduction is very
important. Otherwise there are large deviations between the measured and the true
photometric and colorimetric values. As with focusable lenses, the optical properties
depend on the measuring distance, the program must be informed about the focus before
taking a luminance or color image.
Putting the check box Capture Settings“ the values for Focus“, Grey filter“
” ” ”
and Color correction“ can be inserted:
”
A detailed explanation of these settings can be found in section section 5.3 on page 44.
There is the dialog Capture options“. In this dialog, all settings can be made, which
”
are important for the recording of the luminance and color images.
53
6. Capturing images
Auto scan and Color auto scan
To simplify the setting of the camera the lower part of the dialog contains the button
Auto scan“ and in the case of a color camera the button Color auto scan“.
” ”
With these two buttons the two menu items Capture | Auto scan“ and Capture
” ”
| Color auto scan“ can be called. These two methods have already been presented
in section section 6.1 on page 50.
6.1.4. Set image area for overdrive control
Both for monochromatic and for color cameras it may be useful to limit the used image
area for the determination of the optimum exposure time. If there are bright glare sources
outside the area of interest, they will produce an overdrive in the images. But if this
overdrive is irrelevant in later measurements, the image area for determination of optimal
exposure times can be reduced. For the selection of an image area for overdrive control
there is the menu item Capture | Set region for overdrive control“. The
”
dialog Set region for overdrive control“ is opened.
”
Whole image Marked region
• If you select the option use whole image“, then the whole image is used for
”
overdrive control in all recording algorithms.
• However one chooses use rectangular region“, then you can specify the coor-
”
dinates of a region, to be used for this purpose. To facilitate the input then serve
the two buttons Read size from rectangle marked“ und Write size to
” ”
rectangle marked“. The prerequisite is of course that the user has such a region
marked in the image.
With the Ok“ button, the information provided in the dialog are applied. With Can-
” ”
cel“ remains the old state.
54
6.2. Capturing luminance and color images
The capture commands are available in the menu Capture“ and in the relevant buttons
”
of the bar, respectively. (The option for capturing measurement series is available in
chapter 7 beginning on page 78.)
6.2.1. Capturing algoritms
The capturing of luminance images is possible with the menu items Capture | Single-
”
Pic“, Capture | MultiPic“ and Capture | HighDyn“ and via the corresponding
” ”
buttons of the bar.
If a color camera is used, the filter wheel is not newly positioned for monochromatic
captures. Therefore, it is possible to generate one-channel captures with an optional filter
existing in the filter wheel. The filter wheel can be positioned by means of the dialog
Exposure time“ which can be retrieved via the menu item Camera | Exposure
” ”
time“. It was described in the previous section.
True luminance images are captured with a filter wheel camera using a V(λ) filter. This
filter is set automatically by the program:
• after each program start

• after each color image shot
SinglePic“ captures
”
By means of the algorithm SinglePic“ a camera image is captured and converted into
”
a luminance image. A capture is started via the menu item Capture | SinglePic“ or
”
via the quick start button .
MultiPic“ captures
”
By means of the algorithm MultiPic“ several camera images are captured one after
”
another using the same exposure time and are converted into one common luminance
image. The use of several camera images results in a noise reduction in the luminance
image calculated. A capture is started via the menu item Capture | MultiPic“ or
”
via the quick start button .
HighDyn“ captures
”
By means of the algorithm HighDyn“ several camera images with different exposure
”
times are shot and converted into a luminance image. The use of different exposure
times allows a higher dynamic range in the captured scene. A capture is generated via
the menu item Capture | HighDyn“ or via the quick start button .
”
55
6. Capturing images
Color HighDyn simple“ captures

”
The algorithm Color HighDyn simple“ is only available when a filter wheel color
”
camera is used. When this camera type is used a lot of camera images with different
exposure times and with different color filters are converted into one color image.
To start such a capture the menu item Capture | Color HighDyn simple“ or the
”
quick start button can be used.
This recording method was by mid-2013 the only, that was available for color images.
It differs from that described below, wherein, that it is started for all used color filters
with the same maximum exposure time. This can have two disadvantages:
• Choose a shorter exposure time because this is optimal for one or more filter, then
the other color channels maybe too dark. The accuracy of the determined color
values will be less than possible.
• Choose a longer exposure time because this is optimal for one or more filter, au-
tomatically increases the total time for recording a color image, because all other
filters also start with this longer exposure time.
Color HighDyn“ captures

”
In contrast to the algorithm described in the previous section in this recording method
the starting exposure time can be set individually for each color filter. The images are
taken with each filter as has been described in the section HighDyn“ captures“.
””
The monochromatic images with each color filter are then put together into the result
color image.
To start such a capture the menu item Capture | Color HighDyn“ or the quick
”
start button can be used.
Color MultiPic“ captures

”
As has been described in section MultiPic captures“ the monochromatic images are
”
taken for each filter separately. Then they were combined to a color image. Also in this
recording method the exposure time can be set separately for each filter. If you select the
image number to be captured for each color filter equal to one, then this is the fastest
way to capture color images. In this case only one single camera image must be taken
for each color channel.
To start such a capture the menu item Capture | Color MultiPic“ or the quick
”
start button can be used.
56
6.2.2. Capture parameterization
With the menu item Capture | properties“ parameters for the recording process
”
can be inspected and changed. This opens a dialog in which the parameters can be set
for each method.
MultiPic Color HighDyn
Besides the parameters for the recording process, there are other pages in this dialog:
• Recalibration“: On this page recalibration, focus, grey filter and color factors
”
can be viewed and changed. The description of this page took place in connection
with the possiblities of camera recalibration in section section 5.3 on page 44.
• Last capture“: On this page, the parameters and results of the last monochrome
”
or color image can be entered which was carried out in the program.
Parameters existing for each capturing method
• In the top line the currently set exposure time of the camera is displayed. It can be
modified via the exposure time dialog being described in section 6.1.3 on page 51.
• If the option Autoscan“ is on, then the exposure time of the camera is automa-
”
tically determined before each capture by the autoscan algorithm. In the case of a
color capture the autoscan algorithm is applied to each color filter separately.
• By default, the option Automatic recalculation before each capture“
”
is turned on. Using this switch the exposure times of the recording method be
automatically enlarged or reduced, if the currently set camera time is increased or
decreased. One can for example in live mode of the camera set a time at which
57
6. Capturing images
there is still no overdrive, and then let the next shots to use a similarly adjusted
exposure time.
If you switch off this option, then the following captures of luminance and color
images are made with the times, which have previously been fixed in the capture
properties dialog. Changes of the camera exposure time in live mode are then not
included in subsequent recordings.
In most cases, it is advisable to leave this option switched on.
• Smear“ is an effect which may occur when very high luminance is captured.
”
There are vertical white stripes in the images which do not exist in the measuring
scene. These stripes are removed by switching on the option Smear“.
”
• When working with modulated light, either because the light source itself should
be captured or the scene is illuminated with it, then the program must be informed
about the modulation frequency. The exposure times are then adjusted accordingly.
• If data available for the Scattered light correction“ then this option can
”
be switched on or off in the dialog.
• If triggered captures are possible for your camera, then this possibility can be swit-
ched on or off in the dialog. See also section TriggeredCaptures“ on page 66.
”
• If you turn on the option Suppress progress dialog“, then the small informa-
”
tion window is not displayed, informing else while captures about their progress:
• With the option Darkening during capture“ you can reduce the brightness
”
of the monitor dramatically during recording. If a darkening is desired, then you
can with the option Switch monitor off while darkening“ select their type
”
and specify in the field Wait time after darkening“ an additional waiting
”
period between the time of the darkening and the start of the recordings.
Caution: Switch monitor on again does not work correctly under Windows 8. In
this operating system it is better to obstain from turning off the monitor.
58
Single parameters of the capturing methods
SinglePic MultiPic
• Wished exposure time“: In the SinglePic“- and MultiPic“ algorithm the

” ” ”
camera images are recorded with this exposure time.
• Number of shots“: In the MultiPic“ algorithm this number of images is ta-
” ”
ken from the camera and transformed into a luminance image.
HighDyn Color HighDyn simple
Both in monochrome and in color HighDyn captures multiple images taken with different
exposure times, respectively. The program begins here with the longest exposure time.
Is there overdriven pixels, the exposure time is gradually reduced until there is no more
overdrive. There are three parameters of interest for the exposure time control:
• Wished exposure time“: The time entered here is the time base for the shots.
”
Generally, this time is the same as for SinglePic or MultiPic recordings is used.
• Highdyn start ratio“: The program does not start its capturing with the
”
time specified in Wished exposure time“, but using the product of Wished
” ”
exposure time“ and Highdyn start ratio“. In the example, this would be
”
0.04 * 10 = 0.4s.
• Time ratio“: Are there at a certain exposure time overdriven pixels, the program
”
reduces the exposure time for the next camera image by this factor. In the example
the next exposure time after 0.4s would 0.4s / 3 = 0.133s.
59
6. Capturing images
In the case of the Color HighDyn simple“ algorithm monochrome HighDyn recor-
”
dings are performed sequentially according to this algorithm for all color filters and
summarized together to a color image.
Just as in the case of the MultiPic“ algorithm it can be set with the parameter
”
Number of shots“ that with each exposure time more than one camera image is
”
recorded.
Color MultiPic Color HighDyn
In contrast to the Color HighDyn simple“ recording method it can be set for the last
”
two color recording methods an own exposure time for each color filter. After pressing
the button Edit list“ in the line Exposure times“, the dialog Color capture
” ” ”
times“ is open for:
In this dialog, the exposure times for each filter can be edited. After the execution of a
Color auto scan“ are the times determined for the individual filters in these fields.
”
With the two buttons Brighter“ and Darker“ the exposure times of all filters are
” ”
changed by a constant factor. With the button Take over exposure times from
”
program“, the current times from the program are included in the dialog.
60
SinglePic MultiPic
Loading and saving capture parameters
As described in section 5.3 on page 44, a data record generated in the Capture op-
”
tions“ dialog can be saved and reloaded later. Thus, it is not necessary to enter the
parameters required for a certain measuring task again and again. For this task there
are the buttons Load“ and Save“ in the dialog.
” ”
6.2.3. Capturing images
It can be defined to darken the monitor during the shot via the menu item Capture
”
| Darkening during capture“. Hence, the results of the measuring scene are not
negatively influenced by the light emitted by the monitor.
Because there is a problem of some monitors with an insufficiently rapid darkening, it is

possible to change the kind of darkening with the additional option Switch monitor
”
off while darkening“. If this option is switched off, then darkening is realized by
showing a dark image in the foreground instead of darkening the monitor itself. By
means of menu point Capture | x seconds wait time after darkening“ the
”
delay between the time of darkening and the start of capturing can be choosen. (Some
displays need more time to switch off.)
61
6. Capturing images
Caution: Switch monitor on again does not work correctly under Windows 8. In this
operating system it is better to obstain from turning off the monitor.
The parameters and the results of the shot are displayed after capturing a luminance or
color image:
The display of the results can be disabled for successive captures by means of the option
Do not show after capture“. This option can be enabled again later since the page
”
Last capture“ also exists in the dialog Capture options“ (menu item Capture
” ” ”
| Properties“). In the lower part of the program the same information is displayed in
the table Last capture“ independently of the dialog.
”
The line Relative magnitude“ shows the magnitude in the camera images in per
”
cent. The accuracy of the luminance values of the image is the better the modulation
approaches to 100%. If the values are very low the shot should be repeated with longer
exposure times. If the values are higher than 100% there is an overdrive in the camera
image. In this case the percentage in the line Overflow“ shows the relative count
”
of overdriven pixels in the image. For overdriven pixels the luminance calculated is
incorrect.
62
6.3. Captures made with the LMK mobile advanced
6.2.4. Live capture
The dialog Live capture“ which can be opened via the menu item Evaluation |
” ”
Live capture“ is mainly used for setting purposes.
Having pressed the button Start“ the consecutive capture of luminance or color images
”
is started. These captures can be finished by pressing the button Stop“.
”
On the right-hand side of the dialog different exposure times can be set. This is accom-
plished either by the buttons Brighter“ and Darker“ or by entering the desired
” ”
time into the input box.
If a filter wheel camera is used, the filter to be used for capturing monochrome images
can be set in the section Filter wheel“.
”
If an LMK mobile advanced“ is employed (Canon EOS 350D, ..., Canon EOS 80D),
”
the camera images captured and saved on the hard disk can be converted into luminance
or also color images.
The options concerning the operation of the camera, the image capture and the copying
of image files are described in detail in the documentation Lmk mobile advanced“.
”
In the following, only the conversion of the image files is described, allowing the user to
further process the images captured by means of the program LMK LabSoft“.
”
After loading the calibration data for the camera using the menu item Camera |
”
Change“, the menu item Canon files“ is available in the menu Capture“. Via
” ”
this item, the dialog Converting Canon image files“ is opened.
”
63
6. Capturing images
When pressing the button Select“, a directory selection dialog is displayed where
”
that directory can be selected which contains the image data to be converted in the
*.cr2-format. After this, a list of the images in this directory is displayed.
Using the two buttons Single shots“ or also Image series“, you can toggle between
” ”
the displays of the files in the dialog. Using the view Image series“, the captures made
”
at one and the same time are displayed in one and the same line, too.
At the same time, the view selected in this way determines the manner in which the
images concerned will be converted later. In the preview Image series“, those camera
”
images which are together in one line are calculated together into a color Highdyn or
also luminance Highdyn image.
64
By clicking with the mouse, lines in the list of files can be marked. If the control button is
kept depressed while clicking with the mouse, several lines can be marked simultaneously.
Using the buttons in the lower part of the dialog, only the files marked are processed in
each case. If only one line in the list is marked, both a preview and some information
about the image captured are displayed on the right-hand side of the dialog:
In the paragraph Converting to“, conversion parameters are fixed:

”
If the option Program“ is selected, the camera images are converted into the luminance
”
image and the color image. (The conversion into a color image can be effected only in a
program version which allows color evaluations.)
If the option Directory“ is selected, the images calculated can be saved in a directory.
”
Using the two option switches Luminance image“ and Color image“, it is possible
” ”
to fix those images which are to be calculated and saved. Upon pressing the button
Select“, the target directory can be determined in a directory selection dialog.
”
The file names are formed on the basis of the names of the converted camera files. In
doing so, -0“ is attached in the case of those camera images which are not overdriven,
”
and -1“ in the case of those camera images which are overdriven. The ending of the file
”
name is determined by the image type. For color images, it is .pcf“, whereas for black
”
and white images, it is .pf“.
”
The option No warning message in case of overdriven images“ prevents a
”
corresponding warning in cases where image parts have been exceeded during recording.
This case can occur, for example, if the exposure time for the image parts of interest
was selected to be sufficiently high, but this resulted in overdrive in other image parts.
The option Rotate automatically“ allows you to automatically rotate images that
”
have been recorded in the portrait format for viewing in the program.
65
6. Capturing images
The conversion of all marked files in the list is started by pressing the button Execute“.
”
After conversion, the image loaded last of the Canon camera can be seen in the Camera
”
image“. The luminance or also the color image contains the results of the last conversion.
A progress dialog is displayed during conversion:
The two buttons on the bottom side of the dialog can be used for testing purposes or
also for converting single files:
• The button MultiPic“ allows several image files presenting the same capture
”
parameters (exposure time, zoom, aperture, focus) to be converted into a common
luminance or color image.
• Using the button HighDyn“, several images captured at different exposure times
”
can be converted into a common image. However, in order to be able to do this,
all other capture parameters such as zoom, aperture and focus must be the same.
The buttons are activated only if some corresponding files have been selected in the list
of files.
6.4. Triggered captures
In the case of the capturing methods presented so far, the instruction for drawing in the
next camera capture during the capture of a luminance or colour image is released by
the program. In some application cases, however, it may also be necessary to synchronize
the time of the capture with an external event and to make it happen at a well-defined
point in time. A possible application is, for example, the measurement of LEDs in the
case of which the capture must take place at a precisely fixed moment after these light
sources have been switched on.
Cameras of the types
• LMK98-2 with Kappa DXPS-Framegrabber

• LMK98-3 FireWire or Kappa DXPS-Framegrabber
• LMK98-4 FrameLink and Titan CL/Gamma CL Framegrabber
• LMK98-5
permit the use of an external triggering signal which then releases the image capture.
For working with external triggering signals, some additional hardware which provides
the camera with this signal is required. The technical implementation depends on the
type of used camera. The additional documentations necessary for working with triggered
66
6.4. Triggered captures
captures can be found in Appendix D on page 318 ff. There, the user will find information
on:
• how the trigger option in the program can be cleared, and

• how the necessary external electric wiring has to be effected.
If this option is available in the software, luminance and color captures can be started in
the triggered mode. In order to be able to toggle between the normal and the triggered
capture mode in the program, some additional options are available in the Capture pro-
perties dialog. This dialog can be opened in the menu item Capture | Properties“,
”
cf. paragraph 6.2.2 on page 57 ff.
The mode for triggered captures can be switched on and off using Triggered cap-
”
ture“. The parameter Timeout“ indicates the period of time the program has to wait
”
for the next camera image after the capture has been requested.
The triggered mode being switched on, it will be used in all those program sections
which allow luminance and color captures. For example in the case of the SinglePic“-
”
captures:
• Captures released manually using the menu item Capture | SinglePic“ or using
”
the appertaining quick start field.
• In the manual capture series which is possible using the menu item Capture |
”
Meaurement series | manual“. Cf. paragraph 7.1.1 on page 79 ff.
• In SinglePic“-captures made in self-defined macros.
”
67
6. Capturing images
6.5. Camera set-up (orientation, focussing)
Clicking on the menu item Camera | Camera set-up dialog“ opens the camera
”
set-up dialog, which may in some cases help in the setting up of a measuring station.
The options in the dialog are:
• Creation of an image as template, which can later be either printed out or used as
a test image to upload to the display screen when a screen is to be subjected to
photometry.
• Determination of the position of the camera in relation to the template image if
the image is used instead of the subject to be analysed later.
• Correct focussing of the camera in that the camera image sharpness is judged
against the structures present in the template image.
For these three tasks there are three tabs in the dialog: Camera adjustment“, Ori-
” ”
entation“ and Focussing“.
”
6.5.1. Camera adjustment“ dialog page

”
On the page for the Camera adjustment“ tab, the parameters for the test image can
”
be set in the Template image“ group box:
”
68
• With the button Template parameter“ dialog Template image genera-

” ”
tor“ can be opened. With it, the parameters of the template image can be adjus-
ted. For a description of this dialog see the section 18.2 from the page 265. Main
parameters of the template image are already displayed in the section Template
”
image“ of the camera set-up dialog for information.
Besides the parameterization, it is in the Template image generator dialog also
possible to save the image to a file to print later or upload them to a display to be
measured.
After parameterization the dialog can be closed again.
• With the button Display template“, the template in the selected target image
”
or on the desired display appears.
• After pressing the button Hide template“, the template in the target image or
”
at the desired screen is deleted.
The used image as an example below is shown with the colours inverted. However, if the
measuring space has been darkened, the use of bright objects against a dark background
is to be preferred. The set-up can, however, be made with black objects against a white
background or with white objects against a black background.
69
6. Capturing images
The test image will be constructed in the same way whatever its actual dimensions:
• The five circles will be used to determine the orientation of the camera in relation
to the template.
• The horizontal and vertical striped figures will enable the camera to be correctly
focussed.
In the Camera image“ group box on the page for the Camera adjustment“ tab,
” ”
the details of the camera image can be added to. When the Default center“ button
”
has been pressed, the pixel coordinates for the center of the camera image will be entered
into the two Midpoint (pixels)“ fields. In the two fields Midpoint (coord.)“, a
” ”
zero will also be entered automatically. If this is the setting, the point of origin for the
camera coordinates system will be positioned at the center of the template image, i.e.
at the position of the central circle in the test image which has been captured.
When Save project“ is pressed, all entries on this page together with certain other
”
details required by the algorithms necessary to the capture of the template image will be
saved as a file. The structure of this file will be described fully at the end of this section.
6.5.2. Orientation“ dialog page

”
To align the subject of measurement and the camera, a data set containing the descrip-
tion of the geometric parameters must be loaded. It was possible to create this data set
on the Camera adjustment“ dialog page. To select a pre-existing file it is possible
”
to use the Load project“ button. The data set in current use will then be shown in
”
the line above the button. Please see subparagraph 6.5.4 at the end of this section for
details of the structure of this file.
Before the start of a measurement, it is necessary that the information about the para-
meters is stored. For this reason it is shown in the Status“ line wether the record has
”
already been saved or not. Measurement of the camera orientation and focus will start
70
when the Start measurement“ button is pressed. Images must be captured at the
”
same time by the camera in which the template image is visible. The easiest way is to
put the camera into live mode by using Camera | Live“.
”
The five circles on the template will be searched for in the camera image. If they have
been possible to find, they will appear framed by blue circles in the image. Their position
enables the relative rotation and offset between the camera and the object to be measured
in conjunction with the parameters from the initialization file, and then shown in the
dialog.
In addition, the values calculated will be compared with the ideal values which are
provided in the file and which may not be exceeded. If they do happen to be exceeded,
this will be shown in the dialog by yellow highlighting of the relevant fields.
The two fields Optical axis in x/y“ will display any displacement of the camera or of
”
the subject of measurement in the horizontal or the vertical direction. For this purpose
the position of the central circle in the image will be compared with what has been set
as Midpoint x“ and Midpoint y“ in the Camera adjustment“ dialog page.
” ” ”
To allow any rotation between camera and subject of measurement to be calculated,
the information from the four outer circles will be used. If there is rotation between the
two in the horizontal direction, this may mean that there is a different distance between
the camera and the left and the right sides of the subject of measurement. There will
in this case be a different vertical distance between the upper and lower circles on each
side. This difference permits the angle of rotation to be calculated if the magnification
is known.
A similar process applies to the rotation in the vertical direction. If there is rotation
along the axial direction, this will very easily be seen in the image because either the
horizontal or vertical edges of the subject will not appear as horizontal or vertical.
In the two fields Reproduction scale x“ and Reproduction scale y“ the relation
” ”
between the distances (in pixels) in the camera image and in the template image will be
calculated. There may be different scales of horizontal and of vertical magnification if a
template image with different resolution in the two directions is used (see Horizontal
”
71
6. Capturing images
DPI“ and Vertical DPI“ on the Camera adjustment“ dialog page). On the other
” ”
hand, the pixels of the camera will be almost perfectly square.
The red lines in the 12 rectangles with their horizontal or vertical stripes show the regions
in which the measurements to enable the camera to be focussed are carried out, see next
subparagraph.
6.5.3. Focussing“ dialog page

”
When the position of the camera in relation to the subject of measurement has been
corrected by using the Orientation“ page, and no fields are now marked in yellow,
”
the lens can be focussed with the help of another dialog page, Focussing“. In certain
”
situations it may be necessary to carry out defocussing.
The template image contains not only the five circles for the alignment, but also 12
rectangles with horizontal or vertical stripes to support measurement of the camera
focus. The distance between and breadth of the stripes increases by one pixel from left
to right. In each of the rectangles there is a region framed in red. These are named V1
to V6 in the top row and H1 to H6 in the bottom row. V“ stands for vertical, H“ for
” ”
horizontal and the numbers 1 to 6 stand for the distance between the stripes. The same
names are used for the regions in the dialog.
The depth of modulation, M, in a region is calculated thus:
M axR − M inR
M = 100%
M axI − M inI
In this equation, Min“ stands for minimum, Max“ for maximum, R“ for region and
” ” ”
I“ for image. The higher the value shown for M, the more accurately is the lens focussed.
”
Because of their very nature, the depth of modulation will drop first in the fine stripes.
72
It is possible to set a limiting value for the depth of modulation as for other items in the
initialization file, so that it will be checked by the program. Any values not complying
with the limit will be highlighted in yellow in the dialog.
Once the camera has been adjusted, the task can be concluded with Stop measure-
”
ment“.
If the Save result“ button is pressed, the measured values and the used parameters
”
to obtain them can be stored in a file. This results file can be used to provide the
parameters for a coordinate system by loading the file as a coordinate system file by
means of the Coordinate system | Load“ menu into any selected image, see the
”
section on Coordinate Systems from page 127 onward. This file is also required for the
creation of a BlackMura project, see section 18.3 from page 275 onward.
6.5.4. Structure of the initialization file

In the Image“ section, the parameters of the cur-
”
rent template image are to be seen. The Lines“ and
[Image] ”
Columns“ show the size of this picture in pixels and
Lines=600 ”
the Height“ and Width“ show it in millimeters.
Columns=800 ” ”
These details can be entered in the dialog on the Ca-
Height=96 ”
mera adjustment“ page in the Template image“
Width=128 ”
groupbox, before a template image of this size has be-
en saved.
[OpticalAxis]
MiddleXPixel=600 The details shown in the OpticalAxis“ section are
MiddleYPixel=500 ”
used to calculate the parameters on the Orientati-
MiddleXCoord=0 ”
on“ dialog page. The deviations of the central circle
MiddleYCoord=0 from the template captured in the camera image will
Distance=500 be measured in relation to MiddleXPixel“ and
”
MiddleYPixel“.
[Limits] ”
MiddleXPixel=5
The details shown in MiddleXCoord“ and Midd-
MiddleYPixel=5 ” ”
leYCoord“ provide the coordinates which should be
AngleHorizontal=1
allocated to this pixel in the image coordinates system.
AngleVertical=1
All the other necessary details for the coordinates sys-
AngleAxial=1
tem can be calculated by the program from the height
Modulation=0.9
and width of the template image, which it will find in
the Image“ section.
”
As the parameters for both sections can be entered in the Camera set-up“ dialog,
”
there is no need to edit this file actively.
The parameters in the Limits“ section will determine the values above which a yellow
”
marking will appear in the dialog. MiddleXPixel“ and MiddleYPixel“ provide the
” ”
maximum deviation of the position of the central circle from the settings in the Opti-
”
calAxis“ section. AngleHorizontal“, AngleVertical“ and AngleAxial“ are
” ” ”
the limiting values for measuring the angular deviation from the ideal. Modulation“
”
is the threshold for the measuring of the modulation (0.9 means 90%).
73
6. Capturing images
6.6. Image set-up dialog
In the preceding paragraph, the Camera set-up dialog“ has been presented. This
”
dialog allows the user both, to manually correct the geometrical position of the camera
and of the object to be measured, and to measure - by means of photometric methods -
the sharpness of image, and to correct it, if necessary. These corrections are, for example,
the prerequisite of the BlackMura“-additional package (18.3, page 275).
”
The figure below shows a typical image view displayed during camera set-up with the
template image. The program records the geometrical position of the five circles in the
image, by means of which the position of the ten rectangles in the image can be found.
Now, the sharpness of image can be assessed.
However, the Camera set-up dialog“ can also be useful in other application cases as
”
it allows the user to measure and also to save the position of the object to be measured
in the camera image and the imaging scale, i.e., the size of the object to be measured,
in the object system of coordinates. This information can then be used to correct -
through projective equalization - the twisting and tilting of the object to be measured
with regard to the camera, and to assign to the corrected result image a system of
coordinates containing the real dimensions of the object.
These two tasks can be solved by means of the Image set-up dialog“, which is opened
”
by using the menu item Evaluation | Image set-up dialog“.
”
74
The Image set-up dialog“ contains four sections. When starting work with the dialog,
”
the user has to select in the section Set-up result file“ a file which contains the
”
measurement results from the Camera set-up dialog“, cf. paragraph 6.5, page 68.
”
In the section Source and target image“, both the image to be corrected and
”
the result image of the correction are selected. The conversions can also be carried out
inplace, i.e., with the same image as source and target.
In the section Projective equalization with the data of the set-up file“ ,
”
the projective equalization can be parametrized and executed. Upon pressing the button
Calculate parameters“, the results of the set-up file are read. Before that, the
”
positions of the five measuring circles have been saved by the program. The outer four
measuring circles represent the corners of the polygon to be rectified in the target image.
If the option ”Display source polygonı̈s switched on, this polygon will be displayed in
the source image.
The aim of the equalization of this polygon is to obtain a rectangle in the target image.
If the option Display target rectangle“ is switched on, this rectangle will be
”
displayed in the target image. Its position can be changed by the user at will. Upon
pressing the button Calculate parameters“ once more, the desired changes will be
”
adopted by the program. Using the button Execute equalization“, the projective
”
equalization from the source image into the target image is carried out. The parameters
of the projective equalization can be saved in a file by pressing the button Save file“ in
”
this section. They can later be used separately in a projective equalization (cf. paragraph
14.7, page 205).
In the section Coordinate system“, a coordinate system containing the dimensions of
”
the object to be measured is assigned in the target image of the projective equalization.
The parameters calculated will be transferred into the target image by pressing the
button Set coordinate system“. A display of this action can be obtained by selecting
”
75
6. Capturing images
the option Display coordinate system“. The parameters of the coordinate system
”
can be saved by means of the button Save file“ and used later for separate purposes.
”
For working with the coordinate systems, see also Chapter 11, page127.
The figures below show typical source and target images displayed during set-up. In the
source image, the source polygon can be recognized just as the pixel coordinate system
used. In the target image, the projective equalization to a rectangular image region can
be recognized, with the dimensioning of the coordinate system being given in millimetres:
76
In the bottom part of the dialog, the buttons Save file“ and Load file“ are found
” ”
by means of which the data records calculated can be used at a later time. Using the
button Execute all“, both the projective equalization and the assignment of the
”
coordinate system can be effected.
All work carried out in this dialog can be recorded by means of the macrorecorder (cf.
paragraph 14.11, page 220), which offers the advantage that the users will then have
the conversion of a source image into a rectified target image with coordinate system at
their disposal in the form of a separate menu item.
Finally, a figure of a rectified image in the target coordinate system is shown below:
77
7. Measurement series
All options to capture several images one after the other and to process them are sum-
marized in the menu Capture | Measurement series“:
”
• A dialog is opened via Capture | Measurement series | Manual“ where a
”
new image is captured and added to a sequence of images either successively or
via pressing a key.
• Using Capture | Measurement series | Time-controlled“ allows image
”
sequences with strictly defined times and parameters to be generated.
• Using Capture | Measurement series | Mechanics-controlled“, there is
”
the option to generate sequences of images from captures taken at different places.
For this, the LMK camera must be connected to suitable hardware.
• After selecting the menu item Capture | Measurement series | Camera
”
image file converter“ a dialog is opened. In this dialog a series of stored
camera images can be subsequently converted with the SinglePic algorithm into
luminance images.
• Using Capture | Measurement series | File-controlled“ allows images
”
already captured and saved to be reloaded again and to be automatically evaluated.
• Using Capture | Measurement series | Composing images“ allows all
”
images of a measurement series captured before to be composed to one common
result image. In this image all evaluations can be commonly carried out.
• Using Capture | Measurement series | Image converter“ a dialog is ope-
”
ned where the following options are available:
– Reducing the image size of an image sequence by adapting the size of all
images to a desired amount.
– Multiplying all images of an image sequence by a constant factor.
– Converting all images to BMP or JPG files.
– Generating an AVI file based on all images of an image sequence.
• Using Capture | Measurement series | Image directory“ a dialog opens
”
where the directory for saving the captured images is defined or where images
already existing can be reloaded again.
• Using Capture | Measurement series | Time list“ allows the times and cap-
”
turing parameters which are used for time-controlled capture series to be modified.
• Using Capture | Measurement series | Position list“ allows the positions
”
and capturing parameters which are used for mechanics-controlled capture series
to be modified.
78
7.1. Capturing
7.1. Capturing a measurement series
7.1.1. Manual capture series
A dialog is opened via the menu item Capture | Measurement series | Manual“
”
where a new image is captured and added to an image sequence either successively or
by means of a key:
Section Capture parameter“

”
The capture parameters are set in the first section. One can opt for any of the specified
capture types. On the right hand side of the selection list the parameters for each method
are set.
Section Additional options“

”
By means of the option Autoscan“ a appropriate exposure time is determined before
”
each capture with the autoscan algorithm“. In the case of color captures this is
”
done for each color filter separately. If Autoscan“ is switched on, the number in the
”
field Exposure time“ is ignored.
”
By default, the option Automatic recalculation before each capture“ is tur-
”
ned on. Using this switch the exposure times of the recording method be automatically
enlarged or reduced, if the currently set camera time is increased or decreased. One can
for example in live mode of the camera set a time at which there is still no overdrive,
and then let the next shots to use a similarly adjusted exposure time.
79
If you switch off this option, then the following captures of luminance and color images
are made with the times, which have previously been fixed in the capture properties
dialog. Changes of the camera exposure time in live mode are then not included in
subsequent recordings.
In most cases, it is advisable to leave this option switched on.
The option Use smear correction“ is only available when the used camera is equip-
”
ped with this function. For more detailed information on this topic see section 6.2.2 on
page 57.
If there are data available for the Scattered light correction“, this option can be
”
switched on or off too.
If the option Consider modulation“ is switched on, then the frequency of the light
”
source in selecting the exposure times is considered.
For the possibility of external triggering of captures see the section section 6.4 on page 66.
Using Suppress overdrive message“ the message window can be made to fade out.
”
As a standard, this window displays a message indicating an overdrive occurring during
the capture of the images. It is advantageous to select this option if greater attention
is paid to darker parts of the image and overdriven image parts are not in the focus of
interest.
If you turn on the option Suppress progress dialog“, then the small information
”
window is not displayed, informing else while captures about their progress:
With the option Darkening during capture“ you can reduce the brightness of the
”
monitor dramatically during recording. If a darkening is desired, then you can with the
option Switch monitor off while darkening“ select their type and specify in the
”
field Wait time after darkening“ an additional waiting period between the time
”
of the darkening and the start of the recordings.
Caution: Switch monitor on again does not work correctly under Windows 8. In this
operating system it is better to obstain from turning off the monitor.
If the option Live mode after capture“ is set, the permanent capture mode is
”
turned on after every single capture. This makes sense if the automatic exposure control
is used or if the image is to be watched after each capture.
If the selection box Execute macro“ is set, the macro which had been selected after
”
pressing the button Name of macro“ is executed after each capture. This macro
”
can contain task-specific routines. Macros can be generated either by the TechnoTeam
company on request or by the user via the recording routines. See section 14.11 on
page 220.
80
7.1. Capturing
Section Images“
”
If the option Save images“ is set the images captured are saved in a directory. A dialog
”
is opened via the button Image directory“ where the directory and other parameters
”
of the save operation are defined. This dialog is described in section 7.2.1 on page 85.
Start and stop of captures
The capture of an image according to the parameters set is started via the button
Single capture“.
”
The continuous capture of images according to the parameters set is started via the
button Start“. This series can be stopped via the button Cancel“.
” ”
The dialog for the capture of manual series is closed by means of the button Close“.
”
81
7.1.2. Time-controlled capture series
Using Capture | Measurement series | Time-controlled“ allows image se-

”
quences to be created at certain times and with fixed capturing parameters.

”
In contrast to the manual series, in a time-controlled capture series the capturing para-
meters are defined in a list which can be edited, loaded and saved in a separate dialog.
This dialog will be opened by pressing the button Time list“. The dialog will be
”
described in section 7.2.2 on page 86.
Sections Additional options“ and Images“

” ”
The two parts of the dialog are equal to those described in the previous section on
manual capture series“.
”
82
7.1. Capturing
The capture series will be started by means of the button Start“. While the series is
”
running, the progress of the captures will be displayed in a separate part of the dialog
i.e. in Start time“, End time“, Current time“, Captured images“ and by
” ” ” ”
means of a progress bar.
By means of Cancel“ a running series will be stopped prior to its completion, via
”
Close“ the dialog will be closed.
”
7.1.3. Mechanics-controlled capture series
The option of generating mechanically controlled capture series is only available if a tra-
velling unit is connected to the computer and if the corresponding software components
have been loaded into the LMK software. Please initialize the traveling unit first, see
chapter 18.1 on page 262.
When selecting the menu item Capture | Measurement series | mechanics-
”
controlled“, the dialog Mechanics-controlled capture series“ is opened.
”
83

”
In contrast to the manual series, in a mechanics-controlled capture series the capturing
parameters are defined in a list which can be edited, loaded and saved in a separate
dialog. This dialog will be opened by pressing the button Position list“. The dialog
”
will be described in section 7.2.3 on page 89.
Sections Additional options“ and Images“

” ”
The two parts of the dialog are equal to those described in the previous section on
manual capture series“.
”
The capture series will be started by means of the button Start“. While the series is
”
running, the progress of the captures will be displayed in the lower part of the dialog .
By means of Cancel“ a running series will be stopped prior to its completion, via
”
Close“ the dialog will be closed.
”
7.1.4. File-controlled capture series
By means of Capture | Measurement series | File-controlled“ images already

”
captured and saved can be loaded again and automated evaluations can be performed
with them.
By pressing the button Image directory“ a dialog is opened where the place of the
”
images saved can be entered. This dialog is described in section 7.2.1 on page 85.
84
7.2. Parameter
Since in a directory on a hard disk images of different types can be saved, the user can
select in the section below the image type he wants to work with. Camera images are
loaded into the Camera image“, luminance images are loaded into the Luminance
” ”
image“ and color images when working with a program version which supports color
images are loaded into the Color image“.
”
If the selection box Execute macro“ is set, the macro is executed after each image is
”
loaded which had been selected before by pressing the button Name of macro“. It can
”
contain task-specific routines. On request, macros can be generated by TechnoTeam or
they can be generated by the user via recording routines. See section 14.11 on page 220.
When an image series, which had been generated by means of a manual or time-controlled
capture series, is processed, the images are loaded as fast as possible, during the calcula-
tions in the program, however, the time intervals between the different images are taken
into account. Therefore, it is possible to create a time statistics with these images later,
as described in chapter 13 beginning on page 135.
By means of Start“ the automatic loading of images is started. The loading of the
”
images can be stopped by means of Cancel“. Selecting the button Reset“ allows
” ”
the user to return to the first image of the list. The dialog can be exited by pressing the
button Close“.
”
7.2. Parameters of measurement series
7.2.1. Image directory
In the manual“, time-controlled“ and mechanics-controlled capture se-

” ” ”
ries“ the images created can be saved in a directory. In a file-controlled measurement
series the images of a directory can be reloaded and processed one after the other. In
all these methods a dialog is used to load and save images. Independently of the three
methods previously described the dialog for processing the image directories can be used
separately by means of the menu item Capture | Measurement series | Image
”
directory“.
85
On the top left-hand side the image types which can be managed in the dialog are
displayed. The options are dependent on the used program version. The user can define
which images are intended to be saved by clicking on the corresponding buttons.
Before starting a capture series the user has to set the correct image type. If the capture
method CamPic“ is used, camera images have to be selected. Having selected one of the
”
methods SinglePic“, MultiPic“ or HighDyn“ luminance images can be saved. If
” ” ”
ColorHighDyn“ is used, color images can be saved.
”
On request, it is possible to define in the selection box Save marked region only“
”
that the contents of one image region only is to be saved. A single rectangular region
has to be marked in the image in order to allow this option to be used. Tailoring can
also be done later by means of the image converter, see section 7.3.3 on page 94.
Using the button Directory“ the user can define the directory on the hard disk where
”
the images are expected to be saved and where they are loaded from. The directory is
displayed in the text line above the buttons. Having selected a new directory the list of
images standing beneath is updated in this directory.
With the option Include subdirectories“ you can decide whether all subdirectories
”
of the directory currently selected to be included in the list of images.
Clicking on a line of the list the corresponding image is loaded into the program. The
destination image is dependent on the type of the image:
• Camera images are loaded into Camera image“.

”
• Luminance images are loaded into Luminance image“.
”
• Color images (float) are loaded into Color image“.
”
When the button Delete image“ is pressed, the image marked is deleted from the list
”
without any further query, the program automatically loads the next image from the list
into the display.
When the button Delete all“ is pressed the program displays a safety query whether
”
all images existing are really to be deleted. The directory on the hard disk, however,
which contained the images will not be deleted at all.
When the Play“ button is pressed, the dialog loads all images saved, one after the other
”
into the program at an interval of 1 second. Loading starts with the image currently
marked in the list.
A dialog window is opened by pressing the button Comment“ where a comment can
”
be generated which is as HTML file in the directory concerned. The comment is auto-
matically safeguarded when the comment window is closed.
7.2.2. Time list
The dialog Time list“ can be opened in different ways:

”
• By selecting the menu item Capture | Measurement series | Time list“.
”
• Via the button Time list“ in the dialog Time-controlled capture series“.
” ”
86
7.2. Parameter
In the upper half of the dialog there is a list available containing the capture times and
parameters. The single columns refer to:
• Delay“: In this time, the program does not make any captures.
”
• Captures“: The number of images desired is captured.
”
• Distance“: The time interval indicated between the single shots is kept.
”
• Type“: The possible capture types from CamPic“ to ColorHighDyn“.
” ” ”
• Wished exposure time“: The time entered here is the time base for the shots.
”
Generally, this time is the same as for SinglePic or MultiPic recordings is used.
• Highdyn start ratio“: The program does not start its capturing with the
”
time specified in Wished exposure time“, but using the product of Wished
” ”
exposure time“ and Highdyn start ratio“. In the example, this would be
”
0.04 * 10 = 0.4s.
• Time ratio“: Are there at a certain exposure time overdriven pixels, the program
”
reduces the exposure time for the next camera image by this factor. In the example
the next exposure time after 0.4s would 0.4s / 3 = 0.133s.
• Number of shots“: This number of images is taken from the camera with the
”
same exposure time.
• Comment“: Each of the entries can have a single comment.
”
If a line in the list has been marked by a mouse click, the parameters concerned can be
edited in the text fields Delay“ up to Comment“standing below the list.
” ”
87
In the two fields Delay“ and Distance between two captures“, times can be
” ”
entered in the following formats:
• xxx“: The entry is interpreted as time in seconds.

”
• xx:xx“: The time is read as entry in minutes and seconds.
”
• xx:xx:xx“: The program accepts a time entry in the form of hours, minutes and
”
seconds.
A new entry is pasted in front of the currently marked line via the button Insert
”
line“. By means of the button Append line“ a new entry is attached to the end of
”
the list. When using the button Delete line“ the line currently marked is removed
”
from the list.
The two buttons Load“ and Save“, respectively allow an edited list to be saved and
” ”
used again later. The text file format (*.csv) used by the program is structured as follows
(the example corresponds to the contents of the dialog already shown):
#TechnoTeam TimeList for measurement series

TimeList; 2
7
#Delay;Captures;Distance;Type;Times;...
0; 1; 2; 3; 0.04; ; ; 10;
2; 2; 5; 0; 0.04; ; ; 10; Mein Kommentar
5; 4; 5; 1; 0.053; ; ; 10;
5; 6; 10; 2; 0.04; 10; 3; 1;
10; 8; 22; 4; 0.03; 10; 3; 10;
22; 10; 30; 5; 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07; ; ; 10;
30; 10; 45; 6; 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04; 10; 3; 10;
• In this CSV file, the comments are indicated by a leading ’#’ and ignored when
reading the file.
• Within the file, the columns are separated by semicolons in a row.
• The line TimeList;2“ specifies the file type and the file version.
”
• The line 7“ indicates the number of subsequent entries. There follow seven lines
”
with data.
• In the first column of each row of data, the start delay is in seconds.
• The second column contains the number of captures.
• The third column contains the time interval between two captures in seconds.
• The fourth column encodes the capture algorithm:
0 SinglePic
1 MultiPic
2 HighDyn
3 CamPic
88
7.2. Parameter
4 Color HighDyn simple

5 Color MultiPic
6 Color HighDyn
• The fifth column contains the used exposure times in seconds. For Color MultiPic“
”
and Color HighDyn“ here are four times, for all other remain is one time sufficient.
”
• The sixth and seventh column are only valid for the HighDyn capture algorithms.
They contain the Highdyn start ratio“ and the Time ratio“.
” ”
• In the eighth column gives the number of images per camera exposure time.
• In the ninth column, a comment can be stored.
It is possible to generate a time list within the program and to modify in a text editor
only the numbers which are in the file.
7.2.3. Position list
The dialog Position list“ can be opened in different ways:

”
• by selecting the menu item Capture | Measuring series | Position list“,
”
• in the dialog Mechanics-controlled series“ by pressing the button Posi-
” ”
tion list“.
In the upper half of the dialog, a list containing the capture positions and parameters
can be found. In the example the first three columns contain the capture positions.
89
The following columns with the capture parameter are already described in the previous
section.
Using the button Take over position“, the current position parameters of the motor
”
control are taken over into the data record. Using the button Move there“, the
”
control can be moved to that position the parameters of which are displayed in the
current data record. The button Stop“ can be pressed in order to stop the motors in
”
motion immediately.
Using the button Insert line“, a new entry is inserted before the line currently marked.
”
Using the button Append line“, a new entry is attached to the end of the list. When
”
pressing the button Delete line“, the line currently marked is deleted.
”
By means of the two buttons Load“ or also Save“, an edited list can be saved and
” ”
used again for later purposes. The text file format (*.csv) used by the program has
the following structure (the example corresponds to the contents of the dialog already
shown):
#TechnoTeam PositionList for measurement series

PositionList; 2
7; 3
#MotorPositions;Type;Times;StartRatio;TimeRatio;NumShots;Comment
0 10 0; 3; 0.04; ; ; 1;
1 20 10; 0; 0.04; ; ; 1; Mein Kommentar
2 30 30; 1; 0.053; ; ; 10;
0 40 50; 2; 0.04; 10; 3; 1;
1 50 70; 4; 0.03; 10; 3; 10;
2 60 90; 5; 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07; ; ; 10;
0 60 110; 6; 0.07 0.06 0.05 0.04; 10; 3; 10;
• In this CSV file, the comments are indicated by a leading ’#’ and ignored when
reading the file.
• Within the file, the columns are separated by semicolons in a row.
• The line PositionList;2“ specifies the file type and the file version.
”
• The line 7“ indicates the number of subsequent entries (7) and the number of
”
motors (3). There follow seven lines with data.
• The second column encodes the capture algorithm:
0 SinglePic
1 MultiPic
2 HighDyn
3 CamPic
4 Color HighDyn simple
5 Color MultiPic
6 Color HighDyn
90
7.3. Evaluation
• The third column contains the used exposure times in seconds. For Color Mul-
”
tiPic“ and Color HighDyn“ here are four times, for all other remain is one time
”
sufficient.
• The fourth and fifth column are only valid for the HighDyn capture algorithms.
They contain the Highdyn start ratio“ and the Time ratio“.
” ”
• In the sixt column gives the number of images per camera exposure time.
• In the seventh column, a comment can be stored.
The simplest solution for an external processing of the capture parameters is to draw up
a position list within the program and to modify, in the external text editor, only the
numbers contained in the text file.
7.3. Evaluating a measurement series
Saving the captured images during a manual or time-controlled capture series is optional,
since a lot of evaluation tasks can be solved directly after the capture of the image:
• If there are any measuring regions drawn in the image captured and if for these
regions statistical evaluation objects have been created (see chapter 13 beginning
on page 135), the results of these statistics are updated before the capture of a new
image is started. If, for example, the time behavior of statistical parameters is to
be protocoled, this can be done by means of a time statistic of the measurement
objects which can be saved as a graphic or a table as well.
• After the capture of each image a macro can be called by means of which user-
specific operations in the image captured can be carried out.
• If the images had been saved, both methods - the calculation of a time statistic
and the processing of the images by means of a macro - can be used even later by
means of a file-controlled capture series.
Options of evaluation, requiring the existence of a capture series in the form of a file, are
the calculation of luminance images from saved camera images, the composition of all
images to one single image and the conversion of the images captured into other formats.
See the sections below.
7.3.1. Calculation of luminance images from series of camera images
In some use cases is it necessary to capture images in too short intervals to calculate
luminance images after capturing. For these cases there is the option CamPic“ in
”
manual, time-controlled and mechanics-controlled series to capture and save only camera
images into files. Please notice that in the dialog Image directory“, see section 7.2.1
”
on page 85, the option Camera image 10/12 bit“ has to be choosen.
”
91
For the conversion of the saved camera images afterwards into luminance images there
is the dialog Camera image file converter“, which can be opened by choosing the
”
menu point Capture | Measurement series | Camera image file converter“.
”
Because the calibration data of camera and lens used in capturing are necessary for the
conversion, the usage of the dialog requires the selection of the appropriate camera-lens-
combination. Please choose the right one via menu point Camera | Change“.
”
The currently used camera-lens-combination is shown in the dialog. The program proofs
the rightness of these data. In the case of discrepances the conversion is stopped.
In the two lines Src camera images“ and Dst luminance images“ the user can
” ”
choose the directories for the existing camera images and the calculated luminance
images.
With the option Save luminance images to directory“ can be decided to save
”
the calculated images or not. (In some cases it is sufficient to have the images into the
program alone.) By choosing the option Suppress overdrive message“ the warning
”
advice in the case of overdriven camera images can be suppressed.
By pressing the button Start“ the conversion of all camera images begins. The progress
”
can be observed in the line Progress“. Pressing the button Cancel“ stops the
” ”
calculations.
With the button Reset“ the user can return to the begin of the image series. With the
”
button Next image“ only one camera image is converted into the luminance image.
”
These two buttons are mainly of interest only for test purposes.
Pressing the button Close“ closes the dialog.
”
7.3.2. Composing images
A dialog can be called via the menu item Capture | Measurement series | Com-
”
posing images“ where several images can be composed to one image.
First, the directory has to be selected via the button Image directory“ where the
”
images saved have to be read from. An image directory can contain images of different
92
7.3. Evaluation
types. Hence, the user has to define the image type to be used. For this image type,
the number of images found will be displayed in the box. Furthermore, the program will
check the size of the images found (box Equal size?“) and show the size of the source
”
image and the possible destination image.
When composing images the storage capacity needed of the memory and the hard disk
will have to be taken into account. In the example shown the target image will have 4156
lines and 2784 columns i.e. more than 46 MByte. Options to reduce the storage capacity
will be listed below:
• While capturing and saving the source images only a small region of the total image
is saved. For this option see section 7.2.1 on page 85, the part Save marked
”
region only“.
• By means of an image converter described in the next section a small region of the
images of a sequence will be cut out later and saved as a new image sequence.
In the lower part of the dialog you can define the composition of the result image. If
the image is expected to be composed of a pre-defined number of lines or columns these
values can be edited. The other size will be calculated by the program. If all images are
expected to be arranged in one line and one column, respectively, no further input will
be needed.
Loading the images of an image sequence is done depending on the image type via
Camera image“, Luminance image“ or Color image“. Therefore, the composed
” ” ”
destination image cannot be any of these images. In the selection box Dest. image“
”
the image desired can be entered, its size will automatically be adapted.
After pressing the button Execute“ the calculation of the target image will be started.
”
The dialog is closed via the button Close“.
”
93
7.3.3. Image converter
A dialog can be called up via the menu item Capture | Measurement series |
”
Image converter“ having several conversion options of image sequences into different
formats:
• Converting the images into a rectangular region and saving the images reduced in
size as a new image sequence.
• Multiplying all the images by a constant factor.
• Calculating bitmap files.
• Creating a video in AVI format.
Having selected a source directory and defined the image type to be used on the left-hand
side of the dialog the user can select one of the four conversion options.
While tailoring the images and multiplying them by a constant factor new image se-
quences of the same type as the source images are generated.
While creating bitmap files or an AVI video the images are sent to the corresponding
output files as they are represented in the image display. Thus, it is possible to set the
94
7.3. Evaluation
scaling, the type of color palette and the visibility of the palette, of measuring regions
and image sections as desired before the conversion is carried out.
Tailoring, multiplying by a factor and creating bitmap files results in several files which
need a target directory. When, however, converting into an AVI file just the name of a
target file has to be given. The AVI file is not compressed and can be processed later, if
necessary, with third-party programs.
The conversion is started via the button Start“. The dialog can be left via the button
”
Close“.
”
95
8. Protocols
8.1. Read and write
In protocols the complete processing state at a certain time can be saved. Contents of
the protocol:
• All images used in the program are saved: Camera image“, Luminance ima-
” ”
ge“, Color image“ and all user-generated evaluation images.
”
• Measuring regions“: The regions drawn in the different images and the assi-
”
gnment of the region lists to the images. It is possible to use the same region list
in several images, see section 10.7 on page 125.
• Statistics“: The protocol contains the statistical evaluations incl. the results of
”
the time statistics.
• Display parameters“: Scalings and color palettes of the images, formattings of
”
the tables, graphics and diagrams.
• Comment“: By means of the menu item Protocol | Comment on measu-
” ”
rement“ a dialog is opened where user-specific notes can be generated. This text
is saved in the protocol in HTML format.
• Last capture“: Information on the last camera, luminance or color capture

”
is also saved and reconstructed in the table Last capture“ when loading the
”
protocol.
Saving a measurement protocol is performed via the menu command Protocol |

”
Save as“ and via the quick start button, respectively. Loading a protocol is done via
Protocol | Load“.
”
Reading in protocol files in HDF5 format as used in the Lmk2000 software is possible.
The menu item Protocol | Import HDF5 protocol“ is used for this purpose.
”
96
8.2. Update protocol
8.2. Update protocol
In some cases, it is useful to execute either the same statistical evaluations with dif-
ferent images or different evaluations with the same images. For this, the menu item
Protocol | Update“ is available. A dialog will be opened after selecting this item.
”
After pressing the button Load file“, a file selection dialog is opened where the file
”
out of which the information of interest shall be read can be selected. By pressing the
button Close dialog“, the dialog is quited without changing the current program
”
state. Before a protocol is loaded, however, the loading process can be influenced using
the specifications given in the dialog:
• By selecting the option Images“, the contents of the images of a protocol will be
”
loaded from the hard disk into the program. Here, the following selection possibi-
lities are additionally available:
– Quantity and unit“: The physical quantities and units of the images saved
”
overwrite the specifications given in the program.
– Coordinate system“: The coordinate systems saved in the file replace the
”
specifications given in the program.
– Color space“: For color images, the specifications made in the program
”
will thus be replaced by the specifications made in the protocol file.
– Delete unnecessary images“: By selecting this option, those images
”
which are available in the program but not in the file will be deleted.
– Generate needed images“: If necessary, images which are available in the
”
file will also be laid in the program in order to enable the user to read them
from the file.
• When selecting the option Statistics“, the lists of regions and the statistical
”
evaluations connected with them will be taken over from the protocol file into the
program. Any evaluations which have already been available there will be deleted.
• The option Comment“ allows the comment on the measurement (laid in using
”
the menu item Protocol | Comment on measurement“) to be overwritten
”
with the text from the protocol file.
97
8. Protocols
8.3. Several program instances
It is often the case that images or measuring regions saved in a particular measuring
record shall be used also for another evaluation. However, when loading a new protocol
which contains the data of interest, the data already existing in the program will be
overwritten. Now, a second instance of the program can simply be opened to load a
second protocol there. When starting another instance of the software, first a security
query will have to be answered:
In the second program which is opened, the second protocol can be opened. Now, data
can be exchanged between both programs via the clipboard. This option can be used,
for example, for images, measuring regions and coordinate systems using the menu items
Copy“ and Paste“ available in the respective menus.
” ”
98
9. Images
9.1. Input and output
9.1.1. Loading and saving
By means of the menu commands Image | Save as“ and Image | Open“ images
” ”
can be saved and loaded again later. There are different file formats available for the
different image types:
1. 8Bit camera image“ when working with an 8Bit camera:

”
Picture-Unsigned-Char images (*.puc), text format images (*.txt), 8Bit tiff images
(*.tif)
2. 10/12Bit camera image“ when using a 10 or 12 Bit camera:
”
Picture-Unsigned-Short images (*.pus), text format images (*.txt), Unsigned short
tix images (*.tix), Unsigned short tiff images (*.tif), PCO images (*.b16)
3. Luminance image“ and monochromatic evaluation images:
”
Picture-Float images (*.pf), text format images (*.txt), Float-Tix images (*.tix)
4. Color image“ and color evaluation images:
”
Picture-Color-Float images (*.pcf), text format images (*.txt), color space text
format images (*.cos)
To save and load quickly within the program we recommend the use of the TechnoTeam
formats *.puc, *.pus, *.pf and *.pcf.
Text format images *.txt are suitable for a data exchange with other programs if the
corresponding program is capable of reading and writing text files, respectively. Possibly,
only a few modifications of the file header are necessary to allow a data exchange.
When reading and writing tiff files (*.tif, *.tix) it should be taken into account that the
tiff standard includes more options than implemented in the program.
For a description of all file formats see section A.1 on page 298.
9.1.2. Capture parameters
By means of the menu command Image | Capture parameters...“ the capturing

”
parameters of an image can be shown. These informations are saved in the image and
protocol files together with the image content and the associated coordinate system.
After reloading the image files into the program these informations can be shown again.
Via duplicating an image or copying and pasting via the clipboard the capturing para-
meters are copied to the destination images too.
99
9. Images
9.1.3. Copying and pasting
The current image is copied in different formats into the clipboard via the menu item
Image | Copy“:
”
• The current image detail is saved as bitmap. The bitmap can be pasted into other
programs (graphics programs, word processing programs), which are capable of
reading images from the clipboard. (e.g. in Microsoft Word via Edit | Paste“.)
”
• The whole image is saved in binary format in the clipboard, thus allowing image
contents to be exchanged between the luminance image and the evaluation images.
When pasting into an image of a different size or of a different type the user will
be informed about that:
Change image type Change image size
• In order to allow the image to be copied into the clipboard even in text format this
option has to be activated before via the menu item Image | Options while
”
copying | Text“. As a standard, it is not activated because it requires a lot of
computing time and storage capacity.
Image contents that had been pasted into the clipboard before can be taken over into
the current image by means of the menu item Image | Paste“.
”
Using the menu item Image | Copy bitmap with palette“ a bitmap of the current
”
image detail together with the color palette standing next to the right-hand side of the
image contents will be copied into the clipboard. From there it can be pasted into a
different program as bitmap. This option is not available for color images because for
them a color palette is not displayed.
For copying and pasting the contents of image regions into other images see section 10.5
on page 122.
100
9.2. Enlarging the display
9.1.4. Printing
The current image can be output by a printer via the menu item Image | Print“.
”
The view will correspond to the current one in the program i.e. the image details shown
there, the measuring regions, the coordinate system and the color palette will be output.
These options can be modified before printing via the menu items of the menu Image
”
view“.
For more detailed options concerning the configuration of print reports see chapter 16
beginning on page 234.
9.2. Enlarging the display
The scroll wheel of the mouse is a convenient tool to enlarge or reduce the size of the
image display. If possible, the area around the mouse pointer is enlarged or reduced. The
visible region within the image can be moved by means of the scrollbars at the edges at
the bottom and the right-hand side of the image.
If required, the enlargement and visible areas can be adjusted via a dialog. The dialog
can be opened using the menu item Image view | Enlargement“.
”
Image and window size are fixed when the dialog is opened, whereas the visible area and
the enlargement factor can be selected. In some applications the options in the lower
part of the dialog may be of some interest:
• Using the option Always show whole image“ the image size is automatically
”
adapted while the image is enlarged or reduced.
• The two options No mouse wheel“ and No scrollbars“ are used to prevent
” ”
the user from modifying the display.
101
9. Images
9.3. Scaling the display
By means of the menu Image view | Scaling“ and the corresponding quick button,
”
respectively the user can toggle between different scalings: Linear“, from Logarith-
” ”
mic2“ to Logarithmic7“ and In dialog“. In the first options, a linear and a loga-
” ”
rithmic scaling, respectively of the pixel values of the whole image based on a predefined
scale takes place. Using the menu item Image view | Scaling | Via dialog“ a dialog
”
with further options is opened:
In this dialog, the threshold values (minimum, maximum)“ can be set where the linear
”
scaling is carried out. For the logarithmic scaling only the upper threshold (maximum)“
”
is used. In color images, the absolute minimum or maximum from the three color channels
red, green and blue is displayed.
The dialog consists of three parts:
• In the upper part of the dialog Current image“ the image size and the minimum
”
and maximum luminance values in the image are displayed.
• If a rectangular region was marked before opening the dialog, the middle part of
the dialog Marked region“ contains the size and the measurement values of
”
this image region.
• In the lower part of the dialog Scaling of display“ the current image sca-
”
ling values are shown first. Depending on the settings in the option Automatic
”
scaling“ user-defined modifications can be made:
– The region limits, minimum and maximum, displayed there can be taken over
in the section Scaling of display by means of the buttons Take over“ in
”
the sections Current image“ and Marked region“.
” ”
– If Automatic scaling“ is turned on, then, in Scaling of display“,
” ”
the part of the image (top, bottom, left, right)“ can be defined where
”
the highest and the smallest values are to be measured and used as scaling
threshold values for the whole image.
102
9.4. Color palettes for black-and-white images
– If Automatic Scaling“ is not activated, the geometric area is not of any

”
importance, the two limits Minimum“ or Maximum“ can firmly be selected.
” ”
Monochromatic images can be pseudocolored often resulting in an easier interpretation

of the measuring results. The color palettes for the current image are assigned in the
menu Image view | Palette“ or by the corresponding button.
”
Apart from the predefined color palettes Gray“, Overflow“, Color“, Lmk1“
” ” ” ”
and Lmk2“ there are two further options to create color palettes:
”
• By means of a user-defined palette you can create your own continuous color palette
transitions.
• Equal colors can be assigned to different brightness ranges by means of isocolor
palettes.
These options are documented in the two paragraphs below.
9.4.1. User-defined palette
Using the menu item Image view | Palette | User-defined“ or also by means of
”
the corresponding button the user can switch over to the display of a color palette which
can be modified by the user himself. The dialog User-defined palette will be opened.
103
9. Images
In the dialog, the last user-defined palette known to the program for the current image
will be displayed. The color transitions for the three colors Red, Green and Blue con-
stituting this palette will be represented in three curves. When opening the dialog the
image display is switched over to this color palette at the same time.
The predefined palettes ( Gray“, ..., Lmk2“) can be set by means of the buttons. A
” ”
newly created or modified color palette can be saved in a file via the button Save as“.
”
The button Open“ causes a palette created and saved before to be loaded and used
”
again. With the button Ok“ the edited palette is accepted and the dialog is closed.
”
With Cancel“ The custom palette is retained, which was set when the dialog was
”
opened.
When modifying a color palette the following operations should be taken into account:
1. Fixing the point where the palette is modified.
For that, one of the vertical splitters has to be grabbed by means of the mouse and
dragged to the point desired, with the left mouse button being pressed.
Before After
2. Fixing the color values for these points.

For that, in one of the three color curves one of the controllers is to be grabbed by the
mouse and dragged to the top or bottom.
104
Before After
By means of the button Help“ a help text is opened giving some information on the
”
existence of two context menus. The first context menu is opened after pressing the
right-hand mouse button if the mouse is in the color palette. The second context menu
is opened if the mouse is over one of the square controllers pressing the right-hand mouse
button.
Context menu 1 Context menu 2
All the other operations will be performed by means of these two context menus:
3. Deleting an existing splitter.
Before deleting After deleting
4. Pasting a new splitter
Before pasting After pasting
5. Selecting color via dialog

In the context menu 2 there is the menu item Select color“. Using this menu item
”
the color for a splitter can be selected via a standard color dialog:
105
9. Images
6. Centering the position, 7. Centering the gradient

The two menu items in the context menu 2 which have not been documented so far,
Center position“ and Center gradient“, normalize either the position or the
” ”
color of a splitter with respect to its two neighboring splitters:
Before modification Centering position Centering gradient
9.4.2. Isocolor palette
By means of an isocolor representation luminance ranges can be marked in terms of

color.
106
The dialog for the assignment of luminance ranges to colors can be opened via the menu
item Image view | Palette | Isocolors“ or via the corresponding button.
”
In the box Number of colors“ the number of colors between 2 and 10 can be set.
”
In each line of the dialog, after pressing the button Color“, a standard color dialog is
”
opened to select a predefined color or to enter your own color. On the right-hand side of
the isocolor dialog the corresponding threshold value can be set, where the change from
one color to the other is expected to be carried out.
After pressing the button Standard“ the predefined settings of the program are used:
”
• Working with 6 colors and 5 threshold values.
• The threshold values are in equal distance between the minimum and the maximum
in the image.
• The 6 colors are white, yellow, red, green, blue and black.
Using the buttons Open“ and Save as“ the threshold values and colors defined can
” ”
be saved in a file or loaded from there.
The isoline representation which can be called via the menu item Evaluation | Iso-
”
lines“ is another option to separate luminance ranges from each other, see section 14.9
on page 209.
107
9. Images
9.5. Color spaces for color images
Depending on the application of the color images captured, the results have to be repre-
sented in different color spaces. An overview of the spaces implemented in the program
and the relations among them is shown in chapter B beginning on page 309 Color
”
metric“.
Using the menu item Image | Color space“ the dialog Color space“ is opened.
” ”
In this dialog, the color space desired can be selected from a list. If a reference color
( white point“), is necessary for the color space selected, it can also be entered in the
”
dialog. For entering a reference color the middle part of the dialog is faded in.
The reference color can only be entered in a color space which does not need a reference
color itself. To facilitate the input the buttons From standard illuminant“, From
” ”
last input“ and From marked rectangle“ are available.
”
By means of the button From last input“ an input of color coordinates previously
”
used in another image can be used again.
The button From marked rectangle“ is only available if an exactly rectangular
”
region had been marked in the image. In this case, the mean value of this region is used
as reference color.
Pressing the button From standard illuminant“ another dialog is opened offering
”
some options to select from different standard illuminant types.
108
9.5. Color spaces for color images
After pressing the button Take over for existing images“ this color space will be
”
used in all images, which are currently exists in the program.
With the button Use as future standard“ the color space is automatically assigned
”
to all color images, created at a later time. This behaviour holds true even meanwhile
later program sessions.
The color space User-RGB“ is a special feature. For this color space, the users can
”
enter coefficients of their own and load and save them as a parameter set under a certain
name. Therefore, it is also possible to switch between several different user RGB color
spaces.
The dialog User-RGB coefficients“ is opened via the button Coefficients“. In
” ”
the default settings, the dialog contains the coefficient matrices for converting between
the XYZ- and the CIE-RGB color space, i.e. the default values for the User-RGB coef-
ficients are the CIE-RGB coefficients.
The user only has to enter one of the two coefficient matrices XYZ = f(RGB) or RGB
= f(XYZ) and can then have the inverse transformation generated via one of the two
buttons Calculate inverse“. The automatic generation is better than the use of
”
coefficients from technical documentations because there they are often given with only
a low number of digits after the point.
The coefficients of known RGB color spaces are loaded into the dialog by means of the
buttons CIE-RGB“, sRGB“ and EBU-RGB“. The buttons Open“ and Save
” ” ” ” ”
as“ are used to file the coefficients entered and calculated. The work with the dialog is
finished by means of the button Close“.
”
109
9. Images
After switching over to the new color space of the image all further displays in the status
line, in the special cursors (line, rectangle, circle), in the statistical tables and graphics
are carried out in the color space selected.
9.6. Further options
9.6.1. Duplicating and filling
A new evaluation image which has the same contents as the current image can be gene-
rated by means of the menu item Image | Duplicate“. The properties of the current
”
image are also taken over into the new image. Using the menu item Image | Fill“ the
”
complete image can be assigned a constant value. This option is often necessary if the
image is to be used during image processing operations for arithmetic operations, see
chapter 14 beginning on page 194.
9.6.2. Image properties
Using the menu item Image | Properties“ a dialog is opened where some image
”
properties can be looked at or modified.
110
9.6. Further options
The type of the image is displayed in the middle part of the dialog. It is defined when
the image is generated and cannot be modified later. See section 14.1 on page 196 for
the creation of evaluation images.
The name of the images, their physical quantity and unit are displayed in the upper part
of the dialog. They can also be modified there. These quantities are used in some displays
in the program e.g. when the measuring results obtained in the image are displayed.
In the lower part of the dialog the image size can be modified. In a lot of image processing
operations it is required for the images used to have the same size, as all pixels of the
source image and the target image are to be connected to each other. Therefore, new
evaluation images are created with the same size as the images already existing. If an
image with a different size is required, it can be modified later via the image properties
dialog.
9.6.3. Exporting an image to text file
For simply saving an image in text format, the menu item Image | Save as“ and the
”
file type *.txt“ can be selected, see section 9.1.1 on page 99. For further export options
”
the menu item Image | Export to text file“ can be used.
”
In the dialog Export image to text file“ the options below are available:
”
• An output grid can be selected (not each pixel is used).
• The output is performed in the used coordinate system in the image.
• Two different output formats are available (one-dimensional data list, two-dimen-
sional data field).
• The appertaining image coordinates and the units can be output together with
data.
In the boxes Height“ and Width“ the size of the image range to be output and the
” ”
distance between the output points or their number can be entered. To facilitate the
input of the image range there are the two switches Complete image“ and Marked
” ”
rectangle“ in the lower part of the dialog. Using the button Complete image“ the
”
size of the image selected can be entered in the input boxes Top“, Bottom“, Left“
” ” ”
111
9. Images
and Right“. If a rectangular region had been marked before opening the dialog, then
”
the switch Rectangle marked“ is available. By means of this switch the size of the
”
marked rectangle can be taken over into the corresponding input boxes.
In the two boxes Height“ and Width“ either the distance or the number of the points
” ”
of support in the image section to be output can be selected. As the number of the points
of support is determined by the distance between them, and vice versa, it is possible to
enter only one of the parameters, the other one will be calculated automatically.
In the lower part of the dialog, there is the selection box Use of the image coor-
”
dinate system“. If this option is engaged, all entries in the boxes Top“, Bottom“,
” ”
Left“, Right“ and Distance“ are made in the units of the coordinate system se-
” ” ”
lected. For color images, the output is carried out in the color space set for this image.
(The color space of each color image can be set and parameterized via the menu item
Image | Color space“.)
”
By means of the two alternatives Output as list“ and Output as array“ and the
” ”
selection boxes Header with name and unit“ and Output of coordinates“ the
” ”
format of the text file generated is influenced.
If different parameter records are needed because data with different settings has to be
exported, the parameter records can be saved in a parameter file (file ending *.ini) after
pressing the button Save parameters“ and, on request, be used again by means of
”
the button Load parameters“.
”
After using the button Execute“ the file name of the export file to be generated is
”
asked for and the data export is started. The dialog is closed by means of the button
Close dialog“.
”
Text file examples generated in this way can be seen in section A.1.4 on page 302.
112
10. Measuring regions
It is necessary for most statistical evaluations to select not only the image where the
evaluation is expected to be performed but also a region of the image. The types of regions
available are: rectangle, circle, polygon, line, polyline and circular ring. A measuring
region can be generated by drawing it in the image concerned or by entering it via a
dialog. These two options will be described in the sections below.
10.1. Processing measuring regions via mouse
10.1.1. Generating a region
To generate a region by means of a mouse the cursor in the current image has to be
switched over to a suitable mode. The switching options can be found in the menu items
Regions | New“, Image view | Cursor“, in a quick start button and in the context
” ”
menu of the image.
Menus, quick start button Context menu
• Having switched over to the cursor mode New rectangle“ the first point of a
”
rectangular region can be defined by pressing the left-hand mouse button. After
that, the rectangle is drawn by shifting the mouse keeping the mouse button pressed
and then the opposite corner of the rectangle is defined by releasing the mouse
button.
113
• In the cursor mode New line“, the beginning of a line is defined by pressing the
”
left-hand mouse button, whereas releasing it means its end.
• In the cursor mode New circle“, circles can be drawn. The central point of the
”
circle is defined by pressing the mouse button, whereas releasing the button results
in a point on the circumference of the circle.
• A circular ring“ is drawn in the same way as a circle. After its creation the
”
inner and outer ring can be edited separately.
• Also an ellipse“ is drawn like a circle. The two axis can changed separately
”
afterwards.
• Polygons are generated by more than two points. Therefore, each drawing and kee-
ping the mouse button pressed leads to a new side of the polygon. The generation
of a polygon is finished when the point which had been drawn in last is clicked on
a second time without shifting the mouse or if the cursor mode New polygon“
”
is left.
• A Polyline“ is drawn like a polygon into the image.
”
10.1.2. Marking regions
To mark, modify or delete existing regions you have to be in the standard cursor mode.
This is effected via the menu item Standard cursor“.
”
The marking of regions can be modified by:
• Mouse click: The region below the cursor will be marked. All regions previously
marked will no longer remain marked.
• Shift mouse click: The marking state of the region below the cursor will be modified,
i.e. a region marked previously will be demarcated, a region which had not been
marked before will be marked. All regions marked previously will remain marked.
• Drawing a circumscribing rectangle around the regions to be marked, i.e. pressing
the left-hand mouse button, drawing a rectangle, releasing the mouse button.
– If the circumscribed rectangle is drawn from top left to bottom right, all
regions completely contained in the drawn rectangle will be marked.
– If the circumscribed rectangle is drawn from bottom right to top left, all
regions touched by the drawn rectangle will be marked.
To change a region it must be marked (exception: Undoing a change). Possible changes

of measuring regions are:
• Shifting, duplicating or deleting regions

• Shifting, pasting or deleting corners of a region
114
10.1. Processing measuring regions via mouse
10.1.3. Shifting regions
If the cursor is over a marked region and if the shift-cursor“ is displayed, the marked
”
regions can be shifted. For this, the marked regions are drawn to the position desired,
with the left-hand mouse button being pressed.
10.1.4. Duplicating regions
To duplicate marked regions proceed as in case of shifting. At the same time, the
Ctrl.“-key must be kept pressed. (If this key is kept pressed, the changed mode can
”
be recognized by the copy“-cursor.)
”
10.1.5. Deleting regions
Marked regions are deleted by:
• Clicking the right-hand mouse button and selecting the menu item Delete“ in
”
the context menu or
• Pressing the key combination Ctrl+Del“ on the keyboard.
”
10.1.6. Shifting a contour point
If the cursor is over a corner of a marked region, the shift-point“ cursor is displayed.
”
Now, the point can be shifted to another place. It is drawn to its new position by keeping
the left-hand mouse button pressed.
115
10.1.7. Inserting a contour point
This operation is allowed for polygons only. If the mouse pointer is over an edge of
a marked polygon, the paste-point“ cursor is displayed. At this position, another
”
contour point can be inserted:
• Use the right-hand mouse button and select the menu item Paste“ in the context
”
menu or
• Press the key combination Ctrl+Ins“ on the keyboard.
”
10.1.8. Deleting a contour point
This operation is allowed for polygons only. If the mouse pointer is over a contour point
of a marked polygon, and if the polygon still has more than three corners, and if the
shift-point“ cursor is displayed, the corresponding point can be deleted. It can be
”
deleted by:
• Clicking the right-hand mouse button and selecting the menu item Delete
”
point“ in the context menu or
• Pressing the key combination Alt+Del“ on the keyboard.
”
10.1.9. Undoing changes
Using the menu item Regions | Undo“ any changes in the regions can gradually be
”
undone.
Using the menu item Regions | Redo“ the undoing operation itself can be undone
”
again.
116
10.2. Putting regions together to form a group
10.2. Putting regions together to form a group
If several regions are marked, the context menu offers the menu items Group (OR)“,
”
Group (AND)“ an Group (XOR)“. After selecting one of the three menu items, all
” ”
objects marked will be put together to form one group. After grouping, for example, all
objects of a group will be marked simultaneously by one mouse click; shifting as well as
deleting actions will always concern the whole group.
For statistical luminance analyses, regions whose image parts are either not joined to-
gether or are very complicated in shape can be defined geometrically on the basis of
groupings. The three types of groups differ from one another in the way the pixels of the
regions belonging to the group are included in the evaluation.
Group (OR)
In the first example, the OR group is made up of a rectangle and a circle. The statistical
analyses will be carried out for all those pixels which belong to at least one of the two
regions involved. Pixels contained in both regions will be registered only once.
Group (AND) Group (XOR)
In the second example (AND group) the statistical analyses will be carried out for all
those pixels which are contained in both the rectangle and the circle. In the third example
(XOR group) the statistical analyses will be carried out for all those pixels which are
contained in the rectangle but not in the circle.
At work with grouped regions is to care about:
1. After making a group, the single regions of the group cannot be edited. To do so,
you have to disconnect the regions with menu point Disconnect group“ before.
”
2. If regions form a group, their associated statistic objects are deleted before.
117
10.3. Editing measuring regions via dialog
10.3.1. Create and change
In the previous paragraphs, options of editing measuring regions by means of cursor

functions were described. However, measuring regions can be created, modified or deleted
by means of a dialog as well. Using the menu item Regions | Properties“ the dialog
”
Region list“ is opened. If there is no region marked in the image, new regions can be
”
created by means of the dialog:
A new region of the type desired is created, drawn in the image and marked by pressing
the button Create region“. As on the right-hand side of the dialog the properties
”
of marked regions are displayed, the modification of their properties can be started
immediately:
With buttons Up“ und Down“ the order of the seleceted regions can be changed.
” ”
118
The data on the property page of a region is dependent on the type of the region:
In the upper part of the dialog, the name of each region and its position can be defined.
In the lower part, the corner points of the regions can be changed. For polygons it is
possible to insert corner points or to delete them. Modifications of the names or of the
coordinates by dialog are first transferred to the region list and become visible in the
image when they have been taken over by pressing the button Change“.
”
All data of position in the dialog is shown in the unit of the used coordinate system in
the image, see chapter 11 beginning on page 127.
119
10.3.2. Shift and duplicate
Another option available in the dialog is to shift, to rotate, to change in size or to

duplicate one or more marked regions.
In these operations, too the actions desired are carried out in the region list and in the
image when the buttons Shift“, Rotate“, Scale“ or Duplicate“ are pressed
” ” ” ”
after having entered the values.
Rotating and scaling are influenced by the option Every region separately“ on the
”
page Shift“. If the option is not turned on, the regions are commonly rotated around
”
their central point or they are scaled with respect to their common central point. If
the option is turned on, each region is rotated around its own central point and scaled,
respectively.
All data on position in the dialog are in the unit of the used coordinate system in the
image, see chapter 11 beginning on page 127.
120
10.3.3. Changing display attributes
The page Attributes“ offers different possibilities for changing display features and
”
processing options of the regions in the display.
In the upper part of the dialog, flags which concern the processing options of the regions
in the image by means of the mouse can be set:
• The features Don’t select“, Don’t move“, Don’t duplicate“ and Don’t
” ” ” ”
delete“ concern the regions as a whole.
• The features Don’t move points“, Don’t insert points“ and Don’t de-
” ” ”
lete points“ concern the contour points of the regions. Of course, the flags for
inserting and deleting contour points are only effective for regions with variable
number of points such as polygons and polylines.
• By means of the options Points invisible“, Lines invisible“ and Text
” ” ”
invisible“, the display of these parts of the regions is switched off.
In the two lower parts of the dialog, Line features“ and Text and point fea-
” ”
tures“, the graphical representation of the regions in the images can be influenced.
Here, attention has to be drawn to the fact that some of the settings become effective
only when the marking of the regions in the image is undone as marked regions are
represented in different colors.
Using the button Default“ the Default settings are entered in the dialog. Using the
”
button Set“ the settings made are transferred to the regions.
”
Please note that the change made to the display settings is valid only for the currently
selected regions. If the user wants the default settings to be changed for all regions used
in the program, the dialog Region view properties“ can be used. This dialog can
”
be opened via the menu item Program view | Region view properties“ (cf. 200).
”
121
10.4. Loading and saving
A region list can be saved in a file by means of the menu item Regions | Save“. Later,
”
this list can be read in the program again. While reading in you can decide whether to
overwrite the regions existing (menu item Regions | Load | Replace“ or to add the
”
new regions to the ones already existing (menu item Regions | Load | Append“).
”
10.5. Copying and pasting
Main menu Context menu
In these operations data is transferred via the clipboard. Please note:
• Using the menu items of the main menu Regions“ ( Regions | Copy“, Regi-
” ” ”
ons | Paste“ actions with the complete region list are performed.
• Using the menu items in the context menu of the image ( Copy“, Paste and
” ”
Replace“, Paste and append“, Paste image content“) the marking of the
” ”
regions in the current image is additionally taken into account. Therefore, some
more cases have to be looked at:
– No region is marked.
– Exactly one rectangle is marked.
– Several regions are marked or the only region marked is not a rectangle.
10.5.1. Copying and pasting the whole region list
Using the menu command Regions | Copy“ the whole region list of an image will
”
be saved in the clipboard. If another image will be used afterwards, the regions from
the clipboard can be taken over via the commands Regions | Paste | Append“ or
”
Regions | Paste | Replace“. Depending on the option selected, the regions existing
”
in this image will stay there or they will be replaced by new ones.
122
10.5. Copying and pasting
As the regions of the source image have been copied to the target image, later modifi-
cations of the regions in one of the two images do not influence the regions in the other
one. If a common region list is desired to be used in several images, another option is
available - the menu item Program view | Assignment of region lists“ can be
”
selected, see section 10.7 on page 125.
10.5.2. Copying and pasting several marked regions
If one or more image regions had been marked, the menu item Copy“ is available in the
”
context menu of the image. By means of this item, the marked regions can be copied into
the clipboard as a separate region list. They can be taken over into the region list of a
different image via the main menu items Regions | Paste | Append“ and Regions
” ”
| Paste | Replace“ in the same way as if the whole region list of an image were in the
clipboard.
10.5.3. Copying and pasting a marked rectangle
If only one rectangular region is marked in the image, the menu items in the context
menu of an image for copying and pasting get an additional meaning. Now, not only the
regions but also the content of the image can be copied from a rectangular region of an
image and pasted into a rectangular region of the same or a different image.
When copying exactly one marked rectangular region the information below will be saved
in the clipboard:
• A region list containing the position and the size of the rectangular region.
• The image content of this rectangular region.
• Optionally, a bitmap of the image content of this region. For that, the option
Options while copying | bitmap“ in the context menu has to be engaged.
”
• Optionally, the image content as a text array. For that, the option Options while
”
copying | text“ in the context menu has to be engaged.
The last two options can be used for data export to other programs (word processing,
table calculation).
The first two options can be used for copying and pasting image contents into other
images or a different range of the same image. For that, the following operations are
necessary:
1. Marking a rectangular region in an image.

2. Selecting the menu item Copy“ in the context menu.
”
123
Marking Copying
3. Switching over to a different image.

4. Selecting the menu item Regions | Paste | Append“ in the main menu or
”
Paste and replace“ or Paste and append“ in the context menu. Thus, a
” ”
marked region which is, however, still empty will be pasted into another image.
5. Placing the new marked tectangular region to the position desired.
6. Selecting the menu item Paste image content“ in the context menu. Thus,
”
the image content will be pasted into the region.
Pasting a region Pasting an image content
7. Shifting the marked region to the position desired.

8. Deselecting the region. Only now the image content will permanently be copied
into the target image.
Shifting Deselecting
The steps mentioned above can be repeated, i.e. shifting the newly marked region to
another position, selecting the menu item Paste image content“ in the context
”
menu and demarking the region.
124
10.6. Filling regions
After repeating
10.6. Filling regions
The marked regions can be filled with a constant value by means of the menu item
Fill“ in the context menu. The dialog for entering a fill value in color images allows
”
the value to be entered in different color spaces.
Monochrome images Color images
10.7. Equal region lists in different images
To define measuring regions a new region list is automatically assigned to each newly
generated evaluation image. Therefore, measuring regions can be generated, modified or
deleted in the single images without other images being modified.
In some applications, however, it is quite useful to use the same measuring regions in
different images. Such a comparison of measuring data can, for example, be performed
between the desired image and the current image, with the same measuring regions being
defined in both images.
Using the menu item Program view | Assignment of region lists“ the dialog
”
Assignment of region lists“ can be opened and the user can ger information on
”
the current assignment there and can modify it.
125
In the Camera image, the Luminance image and in the Color image a common list is used.
In the dialog, this list is called Standard list“. The assignment of the standard list
”
to the images always existing cannot be changed by the user. For the images generated
by the user himself the assignment can freely be selected.
In the example shown, the standard list is used in the image Evaluation[1]“, too.
”
On the left-hand side of the dialog the region list is selected. On the right-hand side its
assignment to images is displayed and can be modified. In each image only one region
list can be used.
By means of the button Default“ the user-defined assignments will be undone.
”
126
11. Coordinate systems
Geometrical information in an image is always displayed in the units of a coordinate

system. If there is no special coordinate system defined, it is displayed in pixel, without
a unit being explicitly indicated. The origin of the coordinates is on the top left-hand
side. The x-values increase to the right, whereas the y-values increase to the bottom.
Using the menu items Coordinate system | Save“ or Coordinate system |
” ”
Load“ the current data can be saved in a file or loaded from such a file.
The menu items Coordinate system | Copy“ and Coordinate system | Paste“
” ”
can be used to transfer the parameters of an image coordinate system to another image.
Using the menu item Ïmage view | Coordinate system“ the coordinate system
”
currently used in the image can be displayed.
By means of the menu item Coordinate system | Properties“ the settings of the
”
coordinate system used can be modified. It is possible to define another Cartesian or
a polar coordinate system. The positions, the heights, widths, lengths and areas are
displayed in the quantities and units of the used coordinate system.
In the upper part of the dialog, names and units of the axes of the coordinate system
defined can be entered.
127
11. Coordinate systems
11.1. Cartesian coordinate system
If the option Cartesian“ is selected in the coordinate system dialog, the properties of
”
this system can be edited on the corresponding page.
In the four input boxes on the left-hand side, four coordinate values in the image can be
entered in pixel coordinates. In the four boxes on the right-hand side, four coordinate
values in the coordinate system desired are assigned to these four values. Based on this
data the program calculates the conversion between the pixel values to those of the
coordinate system.
The four buttons below the input boxes are used to facilitate the parameter determina-
tion of the coordinate transformation:
• Standard (Pixel)“: Using this button the coordinate system will be reset to
”
pixel coordinates.
• From image size“: The size of the image will be entered into the four input
”
boxes.
• Current values“: The eight input boxes will be reset to the state before the
”
dialog was opened (Undo-function).
• From region marked“: If exactly one rectangle is marked in the image, the
”
coordinates of the marked rectangle will be entered into these four input boxes on
the left-hand side.
128
11.2. Polar coordinate system
11.2. Polar coordinate system
If the option Polar“ is selected in the coordinate system dialog, the properties of the
”
coordinate system can be edited on the corresponding page.
On the left-hand side of the dialog, the coordinates of two points can be defined. The
zero-point of the polar coordinate system is defined by the first of the two points. The
values for the second point in the coordinate system can be entered on the right-hand
side.
The option Inverse orientation allows the direction of rotation of the angle to be in-
verted. The parameters of the conversion from pixel to polar coordinates are distinctly
determined by this data.
The three buttons below the input boxes are used to facilitate the parameter determi-
nation of the coordinate transformation:
• From image size“: The size of the image will be entered into the four input
”
boxes on the right-hand side.
• Current values“: The input boxes will be reset to the state before the dialog
”
was opened (Undo-function).
• From region marked“: If exactly one circle is marked in the image, the para-
”
meters of the central point and of a second point which is on the right-hand side
on the circumference will be entered.
129
12. Cursors
If the mouse pointer is moved across the image, information on the image content or on
the regions under the mouse pointer will be displayed in the status line. The data in the
status line differ in the different mouse modes, several operations with the mouse and
in some dialogs which are additionally opened can be carried out. Changing the mouse
mode is effected either in the menu Image view | Cursor“ or via the corresponding
”
button.
Menu Button
12.1. Cursor types
The cursor types New rectangle“until New ellipse“ are used to generate new
” ”
measuring regions and have already been described in detail in section 10.1 on page 113.
12.1.1. Standard cursor
If the Standard cursor“ is turned on, the image value at the position of the mouse
”
pointer is displayed in the status line. When working with color images it is displayed in
the color space set, when black-and-white images are used it is shown in the unit valid in
this image. If a coordinate system had been agreed upon for the image, the geometrical
parameters in the coordinate system are displayed.
130
12.1. Cursor types
Monochrome image Color image
Clicking with the left-hand mouse button on a region or drawing an enclosing rectangle
around the regions they can be marked, see section 10.1.2 on page 114. The marking is
needed for some operations with measuring regions such as shifting, duplicating, chan-
ging, deleting, generating and changing a statistical evaluation.
If the mouse pointer is over a marked region, information about this region is displayed
in the status line. The display changes depending on whether the pointer is within the
region, on its contour or on one of its corners.
Area Contour Corner
12.1.2. Focus cursor
Using the focus cursor the edge sharpness in luminance and color images can be assessed
retrospectively. After switching this cursor type on the dialog Focus cursor“ is ope-
”
ned. This cursor determines the edge sharpness, contrast and saturation in a rectangular
region around the current mouse position.
The size of the measurement region around the cursor can be changed by pressing the
left mouse button and rear a rectangle as far as the cursor should be. When you release
the mouse button you can continue to work with the new cursor size.
An explanation of the way of work has already been given in the section 6.1.3 “Focusing
and saturation“ on page 52. In the line Focus“ the width of the edges between light
”
and dark areas in the cursor range is visualized qualitatively. In the line Contrast“,
”
the brightness contrast between the light and dark areas is displayed.
The user can decide with the two buttons below the saturation indicator Saturation
”
in whole image“ and in marked region“ if the brightness of the whole image or in
”
the image region is used. As in luminance and color images in general a variable scaling
(see section 9.3 on page 102) is being used, the utilization of the option saturation
”
in whole image“ makes little sense, since it is always 100% there.
131
12. Cursors
12.1.3. Enlargement cursor
The Enlargement cursor“ permits an image region to be enlarged. To select a

”
special range of enlargement, move the cursor to the top left-hand corner of the region,
keep the left-hand mouse button pressed and draw a rectangle to the bottom right-
hand corner. The indicated range will then be displayed in an enlarged format when the
left-hand mouse button is released again. To return to the full image, press again the
left-hand mouse button and draw a rectangle of any shape from the bottom right to the
top left.
Enlarge Reduce
12.1.4. Line cursor
If the Line cursor“ is turned on, a luminance or a color sectional view is displayed in
”
a window below the current image.
Display in a monochrome image
Display 1 in a color image Display 2 in a color image
132
12.2. Cursor parameterization
Since the output of the measuring values for a color image was selected in the color
space Luv“, the cursor display is also in this color space. The curves for L and for x,y,
”
respectively are on two different pages of the graphics display since the value ranges for
the luminance L and the color u,v are very different.
12.1.5. Rectangle and circle cursor
A histogram can be displayed in a window below the current image by means of a

rectangle“ or a circle“ cursor. As it can be seen from the name of the cursor, a
” ”
rectangular and a circular cursor region respectively are used.
Display in a monochrome image Display in a color image
12.2. Cursor parameterization
When switching over to one of the special cursors - Line cursor“, Rectangle
” ”
cursor“, Circle cursor“ or Ring cursor“ - a dialog will automatically be opened
” ”
where the cursor parameters are displayed and where they can be modified. The displays
and the values of this dialog are in the units of the current coordinate system.
Line cursor Rectangle cursor
133
12. Cursors
Circle cursor Ring cursor
To modify the size of a cursor two different options are available:
• Pressing the left-hand mouse button it is possible - depending on the cursor type
set - to draw a line, a rectangle or a circle. If the mouse button is released, the
drawing is finished and the new cursor size is defined. The parameters modified
are displayed in the dialog.
• Entering the cursor size into the dialog.
The parameter Thickness“ in the parameter dialog for a line cursor results in a smoo-
”
thing of the sectional view displayed. The luminance and the color values, respectively
in the neighborhood of the sectional line are averaged.
If the dialog is left via the button Close“, it is opened again when the size of the cursor
”
is intended to be modified by the mouse again in order to display the new cursor size.
This behavior can be changed by means of the option Only show dialog on cursor
”
type change“. Then, the dialog will only be opened if, for example, it is switched over
from a rectangle to a line cursor.
134
13. Statistic evaluations
After the capture and calculation of a luminance and a color image, respectively by
means of a capture method implemented in the software result images are available
showing a luminance or chromaticity value for each pixel. Very often, however, it is not
the measuring values of single pixels that are in the focus of interest but statements
on the objects captured by the camera. For more complex tasks, some algorithms are
available to compose the measuring values of several pixels in one region of the image
to joint resulting values. Some quantities can be found by means of the cursor functions
presented in chapter 12 beginning on page 130. All cursors supply photometric and
colorimetric statements on mean value, variance, minimum and maximum in the cursor
area. The luminance and the chromaticity profile along a line can be determined by
means of a line cursor. The use of plane cursors such as rectangle cursors results in
histogram statistics of luminance and chromaticity in the cursor area. The cursor results
are, however, momentary“ because they are dependent on the movement of the mouse
”
pointer.
The methods presented in this chapter can calculate measuring results from regions
defined in the image by the user. The measuring values remain unchanged as long as
a new image is captured or the measuring regions or the parameters of the evaluation
method are changed. The values calculated can be saved, printed or exported in different
formats to other programs. As already described in chapter 10 beginning on page 113,
lines, rectangles, circles and polygons are available as geometric measuring regions. Some
of the evaluation methods described below (luminance, integral and symbol objects)
allow not only a geometric object definition based on the contour of the measuring region
but also a photometric determination of a measuring object. An object can, for example,
be separated from the background by fixing a luminance threshold, if it is brighter or
darker than its surroundings. Thus, even elaborately shaped measuring objects can be
defined.
There are photometric and colorimetric as well as geometric values available as measuring
results:
• Photometric“, colorimetric“: mean value, variance, minimum, maximum,

” ”
number of pixels, photometric center of area.
• Geometric“: geometric center of area, area, position of minimums and maxi-
”
mums.
• User-defined“: Furthermore, it is possible to calculate user-defined values from
”
the measuring results available. The user can, for example, make a contrast de-
finition suitable for his special problem which is based on the mean value, the
minimum and the maximum.
A statistic object is characterized by five properties listed below:
135
• Image“: A black-and-white or a color image provides the pixel values.

”
• Measuring region“: The region defined in the image determines the pixels
”
where the evaluation is to be performed.
• Type“: The type of calculation to be carried out. These are the types imple-
”
mented in the program: Standard statistics“, Sectional view“, Histo-
” ” ”
gram“, Projection“, Luminance object“, Integral object“, Symbol
” ” ” ”
object“, 3d-view diagram“, Color symbol object“, Chromaticity li-
” ” ”
ne diagram“, Chromaticity area diagram“, Arc object“.
” ”
• Calculation parameters“: Depending on the type, different parameters are
”
required to perform the calculations.
• Views“: The presentation of the measuring results can be effected in different
”
formats.
To generate a statistic evaluation first measuring regions have to be drawn in the image
for the evaluations desired and they have to be marked. After that, either the menu item
Statistics“ in the context menu or the menu item Evaluation | Statistics“ in the
” ”
main menu of the program have to be selected. See the paragraphs below. Please note:
• When a measuring region has been generated, a statistic for this region is not
calculated automatically.
• Furthermore, for each measuring region only one statistic can be calculated and
displayed.
The statistic results are represented as tables or graphics. These different views are do-
cumented in section 13.5 on page 179. In the default settings, not all the views existing
for a statistic are displayed. When, for example, sectional views or histograms are used,
the table containing the standard statistic (mean value, variance, minimum, maximum)
is not displayed but only the measured function behavior in a graphic. The visibility
settings can be modified for each statistic type either by means of the menu item Pro-
”
gram view | Visibility of tables and diagrams“ or directly in the context menu
of tables and graphics.
In each of the views there is a context menu which can be opened by pressing the
right-hand mouse button. The menu items are equal to those of the main menu of the
program in the pop-up menus Table“, Diagram“ and Graphic“. For more details
” ” ”
13.1. Generating and parameterizing a statistic
13.1.1. Standard statistics
In a standard statistic, the mean value, the variance, minimum and maximum are calcu-
lated for all pixels of a region. Additionally, the geometric and the photometric center of
the region and the positions of minimum or maximum can be calculated. It is possible to
generate a time statistic based on all these values, i.e. for example to record the modified
statistic measuring values after capturing an image.
To generate a standard statistic the desired measuring region in the image has to be
marked and to be selected in the dialog Statistic type“ - depending on the image type
”
136
- either Standard grey statistic“ or Standard color statistic“. This dialog

” ”
can be opened either in the context menu of the image via the menu item Statistics“
”
or in the main menu via Evaluation | Statistics“.
”
Statistic type Statistic parameters
In the dialog Statistic type“, the dialog Statistic parameters“ can be opened by
” ”
pressing the button Edit properties“ where calculation parameters can be modified.
”
The enlarged parameter Smoothing“ results in a noise reduction probably existing in
”
the images. The measured minimum is enlarged, whereas maximum and variance are
reduced. All the other options of both dialogs are described in detail in section 13.2 on
page 163.
Standard statistic in a luminance image
Standard statistic in a color image
For all the other statistic object types, the results of the standard statistic (mean value,
variance, minimum, maximum) are also calculated. In most cases, however, the table
with the standard results is not displayed in the default settings. If the indication of
137
the results is additionally needed, it can be turned on via the dialog Visibility of
”
tables and diagrams“. This dialog is opened by the menu item Program view |
”
Visibility of tables and diagrams“.
13.1.2. Sectional views
The brightness profile along a line can be represented by sectional views. In general, a line
measuring region will be used to assess the profile along this line. The plane measuring
regions rectangle, circle and polygon can be used as well. The sectional view is effected
along the contour line.
To generate a sectional view the desired measuring region in the image has to be marked
and, depending on the image type, the options Grey sectional view“ or Color
” ”
sectional view“ in the dialog Statistic type“ have to be selected. This dialog can
”
be opened either in the context menu via the menu item Statistics“ or in the main
”
menu by means of Evaluation | Statistics“.
”
Using the button Edit properties“ in the dialog Statistic type“ the dialog Sta-
” ” ”
tistic parameters“”can be opened where calculation parameters can be modified.
Both dialogs are described in detail in section 13.2 on page 163.
• The enlarged parameter Smoothing“ results in a noise reduction probably exis-

”
ting in the images. Hence, the curve in the graphical representation will be smoo-
thed. The minimum measured is enlarged, whereas maximum and variance are
reduced.
138
• All other options of both dialogs are described in detailed form in section 13.2 on
page 163.
Sectional view in a luminance image
Sectional view in a color image
If the measuring values along the line are needed, the corresponding result view Data“
”
in the dialog Visibility of tables and diagrams“ has to be turned on:
”
Turning on visibility Data view
13.1.3. Histograms
Histograms represent the frequency distribution of luminance or chromaticity in a mea-

suring region. In general, plane measuring regions such as rectangles, circles or polygons
are worked with. As a default setting, only the graphical display is active.
To generate a histogram the desired measuring region in the image has to be marked and
depending on the image type, the options Grey histogram“ or Color histogram“
” ”
in the dialog Statistic type“ have to be selected. This dialog can be opened either
”
in the context menu of the image via the menu item Statistics“ or in the main menu
”
by means of Evaluation | Statistics“.
”
139
Using the button Edit properties“ in the dialog Statistic type the dialog Statistic
” ”
parameters“ can be opened where calculation parameters can be modified.
• The parameter Number“ determines the number of intervals the area between
”
the minimum and the maximum is to be divided in.
• Minimum“ and maximum“ are influenced by the Histogram type“:
” ” ”
– Auto. region“: The minimum and the maximum are determined by lumi-
”
nance or chromaticity, respectively within the measuring regions. Therefore,
the input boxes for minimum and maximum are disabled as a default setting.
– Auto. image“: The minimum and the maximum are determined by lumi-
”
nance or chromaticity, respectively within the image. Therefore, the input
boxes for minimum and maximum are disabled.
– Manual“: The user can enter fixed threshold values into the input boxes
”
for minimum and maximum.
• Min“, Max“: If Manual“ had been selected as histogram type, the fixed thres-
” ” ”
hold values desired can be entered into the input boxes.
• If color images are used, the parameters Number“, Min“ and Max“ for each
” ” ”
of the three colors can be entered.
140
Parameters of a color histogram
If the parameter Smoothing“ is enlarged, the noise probably existing in the images will
”
be reduced. The curve in the graphical representation will be smoothed. The minimum
measured will be enlarged, maximum and variance will be reduced. All the other dialog
options are described in detail in section 13.2 on page 163.
Histogram in a luminance image
Histogram in a color image
If the measuring values of the histogram are needed, the corresponding result view
Data“ in the dialog Visibility of tables and diagrams“ has to be turned on:
” ”
141
Turning on visibility Data view
13.1.4. Projections
It is the purpose of a projection to project the profile of the pixel values within a region of
a black-and-white or a color image on a line. The line and the maximum distance of the
pixels to be projected from the line are defined by the user. The line and the maximum
distance result in a rectangular area drawn in the image for information purposes.
Measuring region of the projection
To create a projection the measuring line desired in the image has to be marked and
depending on the image type either Grey image projection“ or Color image
” ”
projection“ have to be selected in the dialog Statistic type“. This dialog can be
”
opened either in the context menu of the image via the menu item Statistics“ or in
”
the main menu by means of Evaluation | Statistics“.
”
142
” ” ”
tistic parameters“ can be opened where calculation parameters can be modified.
Curve of results of a projection
If the measuring values of the projection are needed, the corresponding result view
Data“ in the dialog Visibility of tables and diagrams“ has to be turned on as
” ”
already described for sectional views and histograms in the sections concerned.
143
13.1.5. Luminance objects
A statistic of the type Luminance object“ is characterized by two luminance thres-

”
holds. By means of these threshold values, all pixels of the measuring region can be
assigned to one of the three luminance areas having developed:
• Dark area: smaller than the lower luminance threshold

• Intermediate area: greater than the lower but smaller than the upper luminance
threshold
• Bright area: greater than the upper luminance threshold.
The determination of the statistic parameters such as mean value and variance is se-
parately performed for each of the three luminance areas. In the image, the luminance
areas are indicated in terms of color if the measuring region is marked:
• Dark area: Red

• Intermediate area: Green
• Bright area: Blue
Marked region Not marked
In the table, the lines with the measuring results of the three areas are also indicated in
terms of color (blue, green or red) in the column Class“.
”
Table with measurement results
To create a luminance object the desired measuring region in the image is to be mar-
ked and in the dialog Statistic type“ Luminance object“ has to be selected.
” ”
This dialog can be opened either in the context menu of the image via the menu item
Statistics“ or in the main menu by means of Evaluation | Statistics“.
” ”
144
” ” ”
tistic parameters“ can be opened where calculation parameters can be modified.
As the pixel classes have been defined by luminance thresholds the statistic results cal-
culated are dependent on these threshold values. A bright region, for example, has been
separated from the background by a luminance threshold. All pixels above the threshold
value belong to the foreground region. If the luminance threshold is lowered, the calcu-
lated statistic parameters are automatically modified: The number of pixels is enlarged,
the mean value is reduced. The variance can become greater or smaller.
145
13.1.6. Integral objects
The measurement of objects by means of a luminance object (previous chapter) provides

steady and sufficiently correct results for the mean luminance of bright objects if these
are big enough (sufficient number of pixels). If small bright objects are used, it should
be taken into account that blurred light-dark edges could develop owing to the image
formation by the lens. That means, light from the object is scattered areas beyond the
object. Therefore, the integral object has been implemented and it is based on the main
ideas below:
1. Using a low luminance threshold all light coming from the object is collected (in-
tegrated).
2. Using a second luminance threshold, the pixels which belong to the object are
determined. This threshold is adaptively matched to the actual luminance distri-
bution within the object. For this, the maximum luminance is determined for each
pixel in its neighborhood (height * width). The decision whether the pixel belongs
to the object or not is taken by comparing its luminance with the product of a fac-
tor and the maximum luminance in its surroundings. Thus, the second luminance
threshold is given as a factor.
3. The measuring value for the mean luminance of the object results from the quotient
of the light collected according to (1) and the object size estimated according to
(2).
Object to be measured Integral object
In the image section, the object to be measured can be seen. The structure width is only
a few pixels so that a larger portion of the light of the object has been scattered to the
boundary area. By means of the integral object the light and the surface of the object
are separately determined. The size of the measuring object is defined by the blue pixels.
The blue and the green pixels contribute to the luminance of the object.
To generate an integral object the desired measuring region in the image has to marked
and then the type Integral object“ has to be selected in the dialog Statistic
” ”
type“. This dialog can be opened either in the context menu of the image via the menu
item Statistics“ or in the main menu by Evaluation | Statistics“.
” ”
146
• All pixels having a lower luminance than the Background threshold“ are
”
assigned to the background (pixel class Dark“).
”
For a reasonable choice of background threshold, see the notes at the end of this
section.
• Foreground range“: A factor is determined by means of which a pixel is
”
compared with the maximum luminance of its neighborhood. The value 0.5 (default
value) for example determines that the pixel belongs to the object if its luminance is
at least 50% of the maximum luminance of the brightest pixel in its neighborhood.
All pixels brighter than 50% of the maximum luminance in their neighborhood are
assigned to the pixel class Bright“. All the other pixels which belong neither to
”
Bright“ nor to Dark“ automatically belong to Intermediate“.
” ” ”
• Neighborhood“: Determines the search area around the pixel. In this area, the
”
maximum luminance used for the pixel is determined.
• Since the algorithm for the integral object has especially been developed to measure
bright symbols, only the measuring results of the bright pixels are displayed in the
default settings.
Measuring results
This default settings can be modified in the section Classes of the dialog Statistic
”
parameters“.
147
• An enlarged parameter Smoothing“ reduces the noise probably existing in the

”
images. The minimum measured is enlarged whereas the maximum and the va-
riance are reduced.
Based on the experience of TechnoTeam, the two parameters Neighborhood“ and

”
Foreground range“ should not be modified by the user. The default values have been
”
optimized during a large number of measurements. Just the parameter Background
”
threshold“ has to be adapted to the current measuring scenario. It is recommended
first to measure the luminance in the background beyond the object and then to use a
slightly greater luminance as background threshold.
When first creating an integral object the background threshold is calculated automatical-
ly: It is a value of 10% of the maximum value in that used region. This value is then no
longer be adjusted. If you always want to have an automatic adjustment of this value,
then you can enter a value of 0“ as the Background threshold“.
” ”
13.1.7. Symbol objects in luminance images
When characterizing symbols with background light not only the mean luminance but
often the minimum and the maximum as well and their positions are in the focus of
interest. To record these measuring values the symbol object has been implemented.
The symbol object is based on the integral object. The algorithms for the determination
of the object and the mean luminance are equal in both cases.
The minimum and the maximum in the bright object are additionally searched for.
Similar to the use of a luminance meter working point by point the object is scanned by
a circular spot. The pixels within the circle are put together to a local mean value. The
minimum and the maximum of all local mean values, together with their positions, are
available as additional measuring values. The size of the spot can be adjusted.
To generate a symbol object the measuring region desired is to be marked in the image
and the type Symbol object“ is to be selected in the dialog Statistic type“. This
” ”
dialog can be opened either in the context menu via the item Statistics“ or in the
”
main menu by means of Evaluation | Statistics“.
”
The parameter dialog values Background threshold“, Foreground range“,
” ”
Neighborhood“ and Smoothing“ have the same meaning as for the integral object
” ”
the symbol object has been derived from. New parameters are:
• Filter size“: Here, the size of the point sensor“ can be set. Depending on the
” ”
size selected the data on the minimum and the maximum change in the measuring
value table and in displaying minimum and maximum in the image.
148
• Border width“: Using this parameter an additional distance of the point sensor
”
to the border of the symbol object can be generated. And again, the position
and the size of the minimum and the maximum are changed. If, for example, the
structure width of the symbol to be measured is too small for the border width,
the minimum and the maximum for this position cannot be determined.
In addition to the measuring results of the bright region, the positions and the values of
minimum and maximum are displayed in the table of results.
13.1.8. Symbol objects in color images
In contrast to the symbol object for luminance images, symbols with background light
can be analyzed by color symbol objects in color images. To divide the pixels in a
color image into the three classes Bright“, Intermediate“ and Dark“ the pixel
” ” ”
luminance is used. According to the classification of the pixels, the statistic values are
calculated separately for each color. The output of the measuring values is effected in
the color space selected for the corresponding image.
To generate a color symbol object the measuring region desired has to be marked in the
image and the Color symbol object“ has to be selected in the dialog Statistic
” ”
type“. This dialog can be opened either in the context menu of the image via the menu
item Statistics“ or in the main menu by means of Evaluation — Statistics“.
” ”
149
• The effect of the parameters Background threshold“, Foreground ran-

” ”
ge“, Neighborhood“and Smoothing“ has already been documented for the
” ”
integral object for luminance images, see section 13.1.6 on page 146. As described
in the introduction to the color symbol object, a minimum luminance value is in-
dicated by the background threshold which has to be met by the pixels in order to
be accepted as part of the symbol to be measured.
• In the section Options“, the option Chromaticity diagram“ can be selected.
” ”
If so, a corresponding diagram Symbol object chromaticity“ is calculated
”
showing the xy-chromaticity values for bright pixels belonging to the symbol.
• If a chromaticity diagram is displayed, the item Max. point number“ on the
”
right- hand side of the dialog in the part Parameters“ is of some importance.
”
Smaller values result in an accelerated calculation of the chromaticity diagram on
slow computers.
13.1.9. Evaluation in the case of negative contrast
The evaluations described so far using integral objects and symbol objects in luminance
or also color images can be employed for bright objects in the image on a dark back-
ground. For the statistical evaluation of dark objects on a bright background, however,
these approaches are not suitable. For such a case, the three methods described so far
have been modified. Thus, three new types of evaluation methods are available:
• For luminance images:
– Integral object (negative contrast)
150
– Symbol object (negative contrast)

• For color images:
– Color symbol object (negative contrast)
in luminance image in color image
For the user, the only visible difference is that the evaluation for the dark object is carried
out in the area of the measuring region. The parameters of the algorithms in the respec-
tive parameter dialogs have remained unchanged compared with those for bright objects
on a dark background. Therefore, no further explanation concerning parametrization
will be given.
13.1.10. Three-dimensional views
A three-dimensional luminance representation in a rectangular region can be calculated

and displayed by this statistic type.
151
To generate a 3D-view the rectangular measuring region desired is to be marked and the
item 3D-view diagram“ in the dialog Statistic type“ is to be selected. This dialog
” ”
”
”
• A reduction of the property Maximum number of points“ in the dialog Sta-

” ”
tistic parameters“ is only required if slow computers are used to allow the
calculation and drawing of the object to be accelerated.
• The enlargement of the parameter Smoothing“ results in a noise reduction pro-
”
bably existing in the images and, if requested, in a slightly smoothed graphical
representation.
The representation in the diagram is influenced by the settings of the display. Depen-
ding on the scaling selected in the image (linear or logarithmic) the appearance of the
mountains changes. The used colors in the diagram correspond to the pixels in the image.
152
Further changes of displaying the object can be performed by means of the mouse. To
enable the scroll wheel to be used the object has to be clicked on by the mouse before
thus activating the diagram. After that, the options below are available:
• The object can be enlarged or reduced by means of the scroll wheel of the mouse.
• The object can be turned by moving the mouse holding the left-hand mouse button
pressed.
• If the Shift-key is pressed and the mouse is moved simultaneously with the left-
hand mouse button being pressed, the object is not turned but it can be moved.
Other display properties such as the height of the mountains and the color of the back-
ground can be changed via the dialog which can be opened by the menu item Diagram
”
| Options“. To enable the menu item to be used the 3D-object has to be clicked on by
the mouse before thus activating the diagram.
13.1.11. Chromaticity diagrams
The chromaticity rate of an image can be graphically represented by a chromaticity

diagram. Two different diagram types are implemented:
• The chromaticity behavior along a line or the contour of a plane region can be
graphically represented by a chromaticity line diagram.
• A two-dimensional histogram of the chromaticity rate of all image pixels within a
plane region (rectangle, circle, polygon) is displayed in a chromaticity area diagram.
Chromaticity line diagram Chromaticity area diagram
To generate a chromaticity diagram the measuring region desired is to be marked in

the image and either the option Chromaticity line diagram“ or Chromaticity
” ”
area diagram“ have to be selected in the dialog Statistic type“. This dialog can
”
be opened either in the context menu of the image via the menu item Statistics“ or
”
in the main menu by means of Evaluation | Statistics“”.
”
153
The parameter dialogs of both diagram types are equal.
• A reduction of the property Maximum number of points“ in the dialog Sta-

” ”
tistic parameters“ is only required if slow computers are used to allow the
calculation and drawing of the object to be accelerated.
• The enlargement of the parameter Smoothing“ results in a noise reduction pro-
”
bably existing in the images and, if requested, in a slightly smoothed graphical
representation.
13.1.12. Arc objects
The arc object can be used for evaluating arcs according to ECE 99 in order to establish
some certain measured values of the arc.
154
The user places a measurement line (reference line) in the arc. Then, the calculation of
an arc object for this line is requested.
The user can decide whether the following evaluations shall be carried out according
to the Projection method“ or to the Section view method“. In the case of
” ”
the Projection method“, the mean luminance is determined in the direction of the
”
reference line for various lines which are shifted parallel to the reference line.
In the case of the Section method“, the luminance is determined along a line which
”
is in the middle of the reference line and perpendicular to it. In both cases, the first
result obtained is a one-dimensional function behaviour along the section or also the
projection.
The, the maximum of this function is calculated, and the distance between this maximum
and the measurement line drawn in is determined. This distance is indicated in the table
of measured values as Deflection“.
”
In a larger search rectangle, the luminance maximum is searched for. In doing so, the
image is smoothed in order to reduce the influence of any measurement uncertainties due
to noise. This parameter is fixed in the parameter dialog as SSmoothing”. The maximum
calculated is indicated in the table of measured values as Abs. Max“.
”
In the parameter dialog for the arc object, three threshold values can be indicated
in addition to the calculation method (Section or Projection) and to the smoothing
parameter. These threshold values determine the height of measurement regions in which
the mean luminance is calculated in each case. The width of the regions corresponds to
the length of the measurement line. In the dialog below, a value of 0.2 = 20% of the
maximum has been fixed for Threshold 0“ , and in paragraph Classes“, the class
” ”
name 20%“ has been chosen for this first threshold value.
”
155
After setting up the arc object in the image, in addition to the measurement line also
the position of the section line, the rectangle for searching for the maximum luminance
Abs. Max“ as well as the rectangle for calculating the mean luminance for the class
”
20%“ are indicated.
”
View of the arc object in the image
156
13.1.13. Filament objects
The filament object can be used for evaluating spiral-wound filaments. The user has to
draw a rectangle around the spiral filament which surrounds the filament completely.
Then, the calculation of a filament object for this rectangle can be requested.
The user can decide whether the subsequent evaluations shall be carried out according
to the Projection method“ or to the Sectional view method“. In the case
” ”
of the Projection method“, the progression of the mean luminance is determined
”
in the direction of the longer side of the rectangle. In the case of the Sectional
”
view method“, the luminance is determined along the centre line of the rectangle. In
both cases, the first result obtained is the graphical representation of a one-dimensional
function behaviour along the section or also the projection.
157
The parameters of the standard statistics can be calculated in a maximum of three

measurement rectangles. These three rectangles are placed by the program in the inside
of the measurement rectangle drawn in.
In the parameter dialog for the filament object, it is possible to indicate not only the
calculation method (Section or Projection) and the smoothing parameter for reducing
the influence of the noise, but also the sizes of the three measurement rectangles, their
names and their visibility both in the image and in the table of results. Here, the sizes
are indicated relative to the measurement rectangle drawn in. For example, 0.8“ means
”
80% of the size of the rectangle.
The table of measured values in the lower part of the program displays the measured
values for the three measurement rectangles:
158
13.1.14. Contrast objects
Contrast objects allow the user to evaluate differences in the luminance occurring bet-
ween different regions. In contrast to the statistical objects considered so far, in the case
of which the evaluations are made within one measuring region, it is now necessary to
use two measuring regions.
However, wanting to set up a contrast object, the user has to mark only one region
in the image. Depending on the settings made in the statistics parameter dialog, the
corresponding region will be selected automatically by the program. Under the item
Contrast to“, the following options are available:
”
• Preceding region“: The preceding region is used as comparison region. In the
”
image shown above as an example, the contrast object shall be set up for region “3“.
The preceding region is region “2“.
159
• First region“: In this case, the region with the smallest index is used in the
”
current image. In the above image, this would be region “1“.
• Image“: In this case, the complete image is used as comparison region.
”
In the region dialog, the order of the regions in the list can be changed (for the description
of this dialog, see page 118). If regions are shifted subsequently by means of this dialog,
the following hints should be taken into account:
• If a region is shifted in the list of regions for which a contrast object has already
been set up, then a contrast object will be calculated for this region even after
shifting.
• However, because of this shifting, the reference region changes as another region
now has the next smaller index.
• If a contrast object has been set up for the region with the smallest region index
(this is, in general, region 1), the reference region is always the complete image.
The result of the calculations made in these two regions is given in the table Contrast
”
object“. For each object, the table contains - in two successive rows - the standard
statistical parameters of both the region and the comparison region.
In addition, three common contrast measures are calculated from the mean values of the
two regions and made available to the user as first evaluation possibilities in the default
setting. If these measures are not needed or also if other measures shall be used, this can
be changed using the line formula dialog (cf. page 170).
160
13.1.15. Quantile objects
From the german Wikipedia:

A quantile is a measure of location in the statistics. Illustratively a quantile is a thres-
hold: A certain percentage of values is smaller than the quantile, the rest is larger. The
25% - quantile for example is the value for which 25% of all values are less than this
value. Quantile allow very practical statements: 25% of women are less than 1.62 m “
”
- with 1,62 m the 25% - quantile.
Using a Quantile object the quantiles of the luminance within a region can be calculated.
To generate such an object the desired measuring region is to be marked and the item
Quantile object“ in the dialog Statistic type“ has to be selected. This dialog
” ”
”
”
After pressing the button Properties (dialog)“ in the Statistic type“ dialog the
” ”
Statistic parameter“ dialog opens. There one can see and edit the parameters of a
”
quantile object. In a quantile object three quantiles can be calculated. In the parameter
dialog their values should be expressed in percentage terms. By default, 5%, 50% and
95% are selected:
• The 5%-quantile is always greater than the minimum luminance in the related
region, because 5% of the pixels have a smaller value.
• The 50%-quantile is the median value of all pixels in the area, that is, 50% have a
smaller, 50% have a greater luminance. For a very homogeneous region the mean
and the median value are close together. In inhomogeneous regions there may be
greater differences.
161
• The 95%-quantile is always less than the maximum luminance in the region con-
cerned, because 5% of the pixels have a larger value.
• The parameter Smoothing“ is only of secondary importance. In other statistics
”
object types it can be used to reduce the influence of noise. But a quantile statistic
is less noise-dependent than other types.
The result of the calculation is displayed in the table Quantile objects“. In addition
”
to the calculated 3 quantiles the results of a standard statistics (minimum, maximum,
mean value and dispersion) there are given.
162
13.2. The dialog Statistic type“
”

”
If the option Separate parameter sets“ is on, every statistic object is created with
”
its own parameter set (for example with separate luminance thresholds). In the default
case this option is switched off and every object of the same type is created with the
same parameter set.
Simple mode
In the previous sections where the creation and the parameterization of statistic objects
were handled, the use of the dialog Statistic type“ has also been described. The
”
radio buttons in this dialog show the existence of statistic objects in the current image
and allow those objects to be generated, modified or deleted for the marked regions.
Two marked regions One marked region
In the example on the left-hand side, two regions in the image are marked which two
different statistic evaluations had been created for. Therefore, two radio buttons are
marked in the dialog. The button Edit properties“ is not active because the two
”
objects are of different types and have, therefore, different parameters.
By clicking on the radio button Standard grey statistic“ ... No statistic“ an
” ”
evaluation of the same type for both regions can be generated. Due to this operation,
the two existing evaluations of the types Integral object“ or Symbol object“
” ”
will be deleted because for each region only one evaluation is permitted.
In the example on the right-hand side, only one region is marked. Using the button
Edit properties“ the parameters for this object can be modified.
”
163
Advanced mode
In all examples described so far the statistic type dialog in the simple mode“ has been
”
used. This mode is sufficient if the same parameters are used for all statistic objects of
one type. It is, for example, possible to create several symbol objects for different regions
in different images. If the calculation parameters in the statistic parameter dialog, which
can be opened via the button Edit properties“, are changed, all the other symbol
”
objects in all the other images are influenced by them.
If it is required to calculate symbol objects with different parameters, the statistic type
dialog has to be switched over by selecting the option Advanced mode“.
”
The left-hand side of this dialog largely corresponds to the simple mode. The function of
this side of the dialog does not change in the advanced mode: By changing the displayed
and marked radio buttons when the current image is changed or when changing the
marking of regions the user is informed about the existence of the statistic evaluations
for these regions and which of them had been selected. New evaluations for measuring
regions can be created or existing evaluations can be deleted by pressing the radio
buttons.
Down left, there is the option switch Advanced mode“, which can be used if the
”
advanced options are not needed. If this option is switched off, the simplified dialog
version is displayed again.
164
”
On the right-hand side of the dialog, there are the additional options of the advanced
mode. Top right, a list is displayed containing all the parameter sets existing in the
program. Selected data records are marked yellow. This marking can be changed as
follows:
• The user can mark regions in the image and create statistic evaluations for them
using the radio buttons on the left. In this case, the corresponding parameter set
is marked in the list on the right.
• Using the mouse the user can select one or more of these data records from the
list of parameter sets on the right. Exactly one of the data records is selected by a
simple mouse click. Holding the Shift-key pressed a mouse click leads to a change
of the marking state of a line and allows the selection of no, one ore more data
records at the same time. Some of the operations described below require one or
more parameter sets to be marked.
The line below the list offers some information on the use of the current parameter set:
In the example shown, the same parameter set is used by two statistic objects. Both
objects have been created in the image displayed in the current program. One of the two
measuring regions used is marked in the image.
The buttons below this display are used to create new parameter sets, to edit their
properties and to delete parameter sets which are no longer needed. The activation and
deactivation of the buttons is dependent upon what image regions or what parameter
sets are marked:
• Edit properties“: This button can be used when exactly one item in the list of
”
parameter sets is marked. The statistic parameter dialog which has already been
described in the sections on creating statistic objects and which will be described
in detail in section 13.3 on page 168 is opened by pressing this button.
• Delete objects“: When this button is pressed all statistic objects using the
”
parameter sets marked in the list will be deleted. The parameter sets and the
measuring regions marked in the images remain unchanged.
• Delete all objects“: All statistic objects in the program are deleted by this
”
button independently of the marking state of the regions in the image and the
parameter sets in the list. The parameter sets and the measuring regions marked
in the images remain unchanged.
• Delete parameter set“: This button can only be used if there are no statistic
”
objects using the parameter sets currently marked in the list. The parameter sets
marked are removed from the list by this operation.
• Delete unused parameter sets“: Especially with option Separate para-
” ”
meter sets“ the amount of unused parameter sets increases when statistical ob-
165
jects are created and deleted repeatedly. After pressing of this button these unused
parameter sets are deleted.
• Delete all parameter sets“: All parameter sets in the list are deleted by
”
means of this button independently of their marking state in the list. As statistic
evaluations are not possible without any parameters, all statistic evaluations are
removed from the program during this operation. The measuring regions drawn in
the image are not influenced by this operation.
• New parameter set“: This button can be used when the number of the marked
”
objects using a parameter set is smaller than the total number of objects using this
parameter set:
A new parameter set for the regions marked is created by pressing the button:
The properties of the new parameter set are like a copy of the one used before.
The new set having been created, other parameters can be assigned by means of
the statistic parameter dialog. This dialog can be selected via the button Edit
properties.
• Other parameter set“: If there are more data records available for a statistic
”
type, the objects of one type can be assigned a different data record. Using this
button a dialog with a list containing all the other parameter sets is displayed
which can be changed to with the objects marked:
• Merge parameter sets“: If there are more data records of the same statistic
”
type marked in the list, the objects can be assigned a joint parameter set. The
desired one can be selected in a selection list:
166
”
• Save parameter sets“: Using this button the existing parameter sets can be
”
saved in a file. The target can be defined via a file selection dialog.
• Load parameter sets“: Parameter sets saved before can be read into the pro-
”
gram again by means of this operation. While reading the program ensures names
of parameter sets not to be used twice. The parameter sets and the statistic objects
already existing remain unchanged while loading.
• Set class colors“: Opens a dialog, in which the color marking of the pixels
”
can be changed. Afterwards both the color marking in the images and in the
result tables is changed. If Use for all new parameter sets“ is checked, this
”
colorization is used for all parameter sets created later.
• The sequence of the items in the statistic tables can be modified by the two items
For all images“ and By parameter set“ in the section Sort statistics“.
” ” ”
167
13.3. Statistic parameter dialog
Using the button Edit properties“ the dialog Statistic parameters“ in the dialog
” ”
Statistic type“ described in the previous section can be opened where the parameters
”
of a parameter set can be adjusted.
Name
In the section Name“ the parameter set can be given a significant designation. Having
”
created a parameter set each data record is automatically given a name which is derived
from the English designation of the corresponding statistic type. In the example, Sym
”
Gr[1]“ has been formed since it is the first parameter set for a Symbol object“ in a
”
Grey image“.
”
Parameters
The input boxes in this section of the dialog are dependent on the statistic type. These
type-specific inputs have already been described in section 13.1 on page 136 in connec-
tion with the creation of statistic objects of different types. In the example above, the
parameters of a symbol object in a luminance image are shown.
168
Options
In this section, different options can be turned on or off. For all statistic types, a standard
statistic is always calculated as well. In many applications, however, the corresponding
display of these results is faded out. The result table with mean value, variance, minimum
and maximum can be turned on in the dialog Visibility of tables and diagrams“.
”
This dialog is opened when selecting the menu item Program view | Visibility of
”
tables and diagrams“.
As shown in the example, the table for the Standard statistics“ is turned on in the
”
default settings whereas Sectional views“ and Histograms“ are turned off.
” ”
If the option Time statistics“ is turned on, it can be additionally selected for which of
”
the results the mean value, variance, minimum and maximum a time statistic is expected
to be calculated.
The number of result values of the time statistics can be restricted in the field Max.
”
time count“. The default value of 1000“ means that the program discards the oldest
”
values when more than 1000 values were recorded.
169
In the default settings, the time statistic is only shown as as a graphical representation.
A table with the measuring values of a time statistic can be turned on via the dialog
Visibility of tables and diagrams“.
”
Classes
Standard statistic Luminance object Symbol object
Depending on the statistic type, the display in the section Classes“ differs. In case of a
”
standard statistic, a sectional view or a histogram there are not any further subdivisions
of the pixels of a region. In case of types with a photometric assignment of the pixels
the designation and the visibility of the pixel classes calculated can be defined there.
As a default setting, all three pixel classes are displayed for the luminance object which
can be formed by subdividing by means of two luminance thresholds. There are three
items for each measuring object in the corresponding result tables as well:
In this example, the measuring results for one object are shown for the dark, the inter-
mediate and the bright regions.
The calculation algorithm for integral and symbol objects, however, was specially aimed
at the bright pixels within a measuring region. Therefore, in the default settings only the
measuring values of the pixels classified as bright“ are displayed in the corresponding
”
table of measuring values:
In the example, only the results of the bright region for three measuring objects have
been displayed. As it is a symbol object, not only the statistic parameters of the bright
region are shown in the default settings but also the minimums, the maximums and their
positions in the image.
Line equation
In section 16.4 on page 240, it has been shown how to export measuring value tables
to Microsoft Excel. There, quite a lot of complex calculations with the data measured
170
can be done. For simple evaluations, it is possible to perform arithmetic calculations

within the program joining several data columns. A contrast definition is a characteristic
example. The dialog to input one or more line equations is opened via the button Line
”
equation“:
In the example shown, two different contrast definitions have been created which are
displayed in two additional columns of the result table:
The variables available for the calculation are dependent on the type of the statistic, the
options set there and the visibility of the measuring results of the statistic:
In case of a luminance object for a monochrome image or for a standard statistic in a

color image, three lines with measuring results of an object are displayed in the table
as a default setting. For the luminance object they are the results of the bright, inter-
171
mediate and the dark pixels, in the color image they are the three components in the
corresponding color space. In these cases, in a line equation not only class-dependent
results can be accessed to (A, B, C, D, E) but the results of single classes can be used
directly (A1, ..., E3).
In this example, the contrast has been calculated as the quotient of the mean value of
the bright and the dark regions and it is to be displayed in the line with the intermediate
pixel class. The result is in the table of the measuring results:
Using the button Save file“ in the line equation dialog it is possible to save the
”
used equations in a file. By means of Load file“ equations saved in this way can be
”
loaded and used again. The availability of the variables used in the equations of the
corresponding statistic has to be taken into account.
172
13.4. Statistical parameter table
Upon pressing the button Properties (table)“ in the statistics type dialog (cf. Pa-
”
ragraph 13.2 on page 163), the Statistical parameter table“ is opened. In this
”
table, all statistical parameters of all statistical objects can be processed in common.
Using the button Hide buttons“, it is possible to fade out the lower part of the dialog.
”
All functions which can be implemented by pressing the buttons are also available as
menu items of the context menu of the table.
173
Rows
In each row of the table, a statistical evaluation object available in the program is
represented. Here, all those objects which belong to the same evaluation type are found
in successive rows. By clicking with the mouse in a row of the table, an object can be
selected. In doing so, the colouring of the rows changes:
• The row clicked with the mouse is blue-coloured, thus marking the object selected.
• All objects which are of the same statistics type and which use the same set of
parameters are marked in white.
• All objects which are of the same statistics type but use a different set of parameters
are marked in yellow.
• All objects of other statistics types are marked in grey.
This differentiation is important as some operations offered in the dialog only concern the
object marked, others, in turn, may concern objects which use the same set of parameters
or which are of the same type, and others which may concern all objects.
Columns
The information contained in the first columns of the table is independent of the type
of the evaluation object concerned. Therefore, these columns are always there:
• type of the statistical object

• set of used parameters for its calculation
• name of the image and of the region in which the evaluation was carried out
• state of marking in the image
As there are a big number of parameters for the single statistics types, the table would
quickly become confusing if all options were displayed at one and the same moment.
Therefore, the dialog offers the possibility of modifying the display of the columns. For
this, either the section Visibility of columns“ in the lower part of the dialog or the
”
pop-up menu having the same name in the context menu of the table can be used. The
following options are offered there:
• Display flags“ activates the columns Geo“, Photo“, MinMax“, Time“

” ” ” ” ”
and Chromaticity“. The values appearing in these columns are decisive for the
”
fact whether the geometrical centre of area, the photometric centre, the position
of the minimums and maximums, a time statistics or also a tristimulus values
174
diagram will be calculated for the corresponding object if this should be possible
for the corresponding statistics type.
• Display classes“ activates the display of the columns Bright“, Medium“
” ” ”
and Dark“. In these columns, it is possible to change not only the designations
”
but also the visibility of the corresponding entries for the class statistics.
• By means of the other selection options, the user may decide on how the numerical
parameters of the single statistics types are displayed:
– No statistical parameters“: In this case, no further columns containing

”
parameters are displayed.
– For marked objects only“: In this case, the display and the designation
”
of the columns change if another statistical object presenting another statistics
type is selected in the table. Only those columns will be displayed which
contain parameters for this type.
– For available objects“: In this case, all those columns are displayed
”
which contain parameters for which there are currently statistical objects.
Here, the display of the column only changes if objects of a new statistics
type are entered or if all objects of the same type have been deleted.
– For all possible types“: n this case, all columns are displayed with all
”
parameters of all statistics types. At present, there are more than 50 different
parameters available.
Editing in the table
From and including the column Marked“, all cells of the table can directly be modified
”
by clicking in the respective cell and entering the new desired value there. Depending on
the type of the column, the following actions will be initiated:
• Marked“: A value of 1“ in this cell means that the corresponding region in the
” ”
image is marked. A value of 0“ means that the cell is not marked.
”
• Geo“, Photo“, MinMax“: Values of 1“ in these columns mean that geome-
” ” ” ”
trical or photometric centres are calculated or also the positions and values of the
minimum and the maximum in the respective region.
• Time“: Values ranging from 0“ to 15“ can be entered in a cell of this column.
” ” ”
Here, they mean:
– 0“: No time statistics is calculated.

”
– 1“: A time statistics of the mean is calculated.
”
– 2“: A time statistics of the standard deviation is calculated.
”
– 4“: A time statistics of the minimum is calculated.
”
– 8“: A time statistics of the maximum is calculated.
”
– A sum of 1“, 2“, 4“ and 8“: According to the sum, several time statistics
” ” ” ”
are calculated simultaneously.
175
• MaxTimeCount“: Maximum number of time statistic values. If the actual num-

”
ber exceed this value, the oldest entries are deleted.
• Chromaticity“: A chromaticity diagram is calculated (if this is possible for this
”
statistics type).
• Bright“, Medium“, Dark“: In the cells of these columns, the designations
” ” ”
for the three classes of the class statistics are fixed. If the sign -“ precedes the
”
designation, then this class is not displayed in its result table nor is it coloured in
the image.
• All other columns contain parameters which are specific of the respective stati-
stics type. Their designations and meanings are explained in Paragraph 13.1 on
page 136.
With the exception of the entries made in the column Marked“ which only have
”
an influence on the display in the corresponding region in the image, changes in any
parameter in the table mean that these changes are also related to all other objects
which use the same set of parameters.
All entries in the table are immediately accepted. The effect of the parameter changes can
be seen in the measured values table and diagrams, and also by means of the colouring
of the pixels for the class statistics.
Set of parameters
For objects of one statistics type, you can work with various sets of parameters if it
turns out to be necessary to use different parameter values (for example, for luminance
threshold values). The names of these sets of parameters are shown in the column Set
”
of parameters“. In the paragraph Set of parameters“ of the dialog or also in the
”
pop-up menu with the same name of the context menu of the table, the set of parameters
of the currently marked statistical object can be influenced. The following options are
available:
• New“: By pressing this button or by selecting the corresponding menu item in

”
the context menu, a new set of parameters is created and then assigned to the
object marked. The name of this set of parameters is generated automatically. It
adopts all parameters of the set of parameters which had previously been assigned
to the object marked.
• Rename“: By means of this button or also menu item, the name of the data
”
record shown in the table can be changed.
• Delete“: A dialog is opened in which the name of one or several sets of parame-
”
ters which shall be deleted from the program can be specified. To the statistical
objects which have used these sets of parameters up to this moment another set
of parameters is assigned automatically.
• Assign to object“: A dialog is opened in which another set of parameters which
”
shall be used in future for any calculations made on this object can be selected.
• Assign to data set“: Unlike in the previous paragraph, in which the set of
”
parameters can only be changed for a single object, it is now possible to assign
176
another set of parameters to all those objects which have used this data record so
far.
• Assign to type“: After selecting a set of parameters, all objects of the statistics
”
type concerned use in future one and the same parameter record.
Class colors
For class statistics, the standard default setting of the program is the blue marking of
the bright class in the images as well as in the tables, the green marking of the medium
class, and the red marking of the dark class. Using the buttons described in paragraph
Class colors“, this assignment can be changed, or the user can return to the standard
”
default setting after making a change.
By analogy with the procedure described in the previous paragraph, this assignment can
be changed either for the current set of parameters or for all objects of the current type
or also for all class statistics. Upon clicking on one of the three buttons in the dialog or
selecting a menu item in the context menu, a dialog for entering the colour is opened for
making one’s choice.
Line equations
For each statistical object, one or even more equations can be set up by means of which
further results can be calculated from the already existing statistical measured values.
The dialog which allows these line equations to be processes has already been documented
in Paragraph 13.3 from page 170 on.
As described in the preceding paragraphs, the line equations entered can either be ad-
opted only for the current set of parameters or for all objects of the same statistics type
depending on which of the two available buttons or menu items is used for editing the
line equations.
Undoing changes
All options, which have been described in the preceding paragraphs, for changing para-
meters (editing values in the table, setting up, deleting and assigning sets of parameters,
changing class colors and line equations) can be undone either by pressing the button
Undo“ , or they can be undone step by step by using the corresponding menu item. Af-
”
ter undoing, the undo action itself can be undone by pressing the corresponding button
or also via the menu item Redo“.
”
Deleting objects
In the paragraph Delete objects“ or via the corresponding menu items of the context
”
menu, either the object marked or all objects of the set of parameters or all objects of
the same statistics type or all currently available objects can be deleted. Attention: This
operation cannot be undone any more by pressing the Undo“ button.
”
177
Loading and saving sets of parameters
In the paragraph ”File in/outör also via the corresponding menu items of the context
menu of the table, sets of parameters can be saved and loaded again at a later time. The
used file format is described in Paragraph A.4 from page 306 on.
When saving a parameter file, there is an option of saving only those parameter data
records for which statistical objects in the program have really been set up ( Save only
”
used sets“).
The second option ( Overwrite existing“) is effective both when saving and loading
”
the file. In both cases, the user can decide whether already existing data records shall
be overwritten or not.
178
13.5. Result views of a statistic
The measuring results of statistic evaluations can be displayed in different formats:
• Standard tables“: These tables contain the standard statistic values mean
”
value, variance, minimum and maximum. If the calculation of the geometric or
photometric center or the indication of the positions of minimums and maximums
has been selected in the options of the statistic, these results can also be found in
these tables.
If the time statistic is turned on, the time mean values of the recorded values are
also displayed in the tables. In the default settings, the tables are displayed for the
standard statistic, the luminance, the integral and the symbol objects. For all the
other statistic types these tables are usually not visible and they have to be turned
on via the menu item Program view | Visibility of tables and diagrams“.
”
This switching option of visibility is true for all the other tables, diagrams and
graphics that will be described below.
• All color statistics“: All statistical results will be displayed in the result
”
tables in each case only in the color space that is currently set in the used color
image. To overcome this limitation, there is an additional table All color sta-
”
tistics“. Here the mean values from all the color statistics are displayed in all
color spaces available in the program.
• Value tables of the curve behavior of sectional views, histograms
”
and projections and of time statistics as well“: In the tables for sectio-
nal views and projections, the measurement values are numerically represented as
functions of position. In histograms the function behavior can be found depending
on the luminance or the color. The tables of the time statistics contain a list with
the values measured over time.
In the default settings, all value tables are turned off.
• Graphics of the standard statistic“: These graphics can be displayed for
”
standard grey and standard color statistics. Mean values, variance, minimums and
maximums are graphically represented. In the default settings, these graphics are
not visible.
• Graphics of the curve behaviors of sectional views, histograms and
”
projections“: In these graphics, the behaviors of the corresponding functions are
graphically represented. They are the default settings for sectional views, histo-
grams and projections in monochrome and color images.
• Graphics of time statistics“: In these graphics, the time behaviors of the
”
measurement values to be recorded are displayed as curves. In the default settings,
the graphics are visible.
• Chromaticity diagrams“: Chromaticity diagrams are displayed for the statistic
”
types chromaticity area diagram, chromaticity line diagram and as a special option
for the color symbol object. If these statistics are calculated, the corresponding
diagrams are always displayed as well.
179
• 3D views“: The 3D view diagram is the output for the statistic object of the same
”
name. It can also not be turned off when the corresponding statistic is calculated.
13.5.1. Standard tables
A table is available for each statistic type containing the values of the standard statistic
and, if the options are active, geometric and photometric centers, mean values of the
time statistics and possibly the results of the user-defined line equations. Depending on
the statistic type and the classes set, the measurement values of an object occupy one
to three lines of the table. Some examples of tables of this type are shown below:
Standard statistic in a luminance image
Standard statistic in a color image
Integral object in a luminance image
The tables can have the columns below:
• Stat.No.“: Consecutive numbering of the measurement values of this statistic.

”
• Parameters“: Name of the used parameter set for the calculation of this stati-
”
stic.
• Image“: Name of the image where the measuring object is arranged. All results
”
of one statistic type are displayed in a table, even if the measuring objects are
arranged in different images.
• Region“: Name or number of the region in the image concerned.
”
• Class“: For statistic types where the pixels of a region can be divided into several
”
pixel classes the name of the corresponding class is shown here.
• Color“: For statistics of color images the name of the color component is dis-
”
played here.
180
• Area, min, max, mean value, variance“: Results of the standard statistic.
”
The area is displayed in the units of the coordinate system used in the image. This
is also true for all the other geometric data. In color images, the variance is only
indicated if the RGB color space is used in the image concerned.
• GeoX, GeoY“: If the calculation of the geometric center of a region is turned
”
on, it will be displayed here.
• PhotoX, PhotoY“: If the calculation of the photometric center of a region is
”
turned on, it will be displayed here.
• MinX, MinY, MinVal, MaxX, MaxY, MaxVal“: If the calculation of the
”
geometric position of minimum and maximum is turned on, it will be displayed
here.
• Time number“: If a time statistic for the measuring object is turned on, the
”
number of the values will be displayed in this column independently of the desired
measuring results of the time statistic.
• min(MW), max(MW), mean value(MW), variance(MW), min(Strg), max(Strg),
”
mean value(Strg), variance(Strg), min(Min), max(Min), mean value(Min),
variance(Min), min(Max), max(Max), mean value(Max), variance(Max)“:
For the calculation of the time statistic the values of minimum, maximum, mean
value and variance can be recorded independently from each other. In the corre-
sponding standard table only the standard statistic of the list of time values will
be displayed. If, for example, the mean value is time-recorded, the standard table
will contain a summary of this value list:
– min(MW)“: The minimum of the items in the mean value list.

”
– max(MW)“: The maximum of the items in the mean value list.
”
– Mean value(MW)“: The mean value of the items in the mean value list.
”
– Variance(MW)“: The variance of the items in the mean value list.
”
The same is true if the variance, the minimum and the maximum are recorded.
The list of the actual values as a function of time can be found in a separate value
table, see the section below.
• User-defined columns“ if user-defined line equations are used: As described
”
on page 126, the user can define equations of his own whose results are displayed
in these columns.
If a standard table is displayed in the lower tab window, a context menu can be opened
in the table by pressing the right-hand mouse button. The menu can also be opened via
the main menu bar by means of the menu item Table“. The following menu items are
”
available:
• Save as“: Allows the measuring results of the table to be filed in a text file.
”
Reading in those files into the program again is not planned because all data used
here is automatically calculated.
• Copy“: The table is copied into the clipboard. It can be pasted into other pro-
”
grams from there.
181
• Print“: The table is immediately output by a printer. If requested, the table is

”
turned or the columns are wrapped, respectively. For further options of copying and
printing according to Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel see chapter 16 beginning
on page 234.
• Visibility of columns“: In some applications, not all the colums of the table
”
have to be output. If so, some of them can be faded out. If this menu item has
been selected, the dialog ”Visibility of columns”will be displayed. In the dialog,
all the columns currently available in the table are displayed. Their visibility can
individually be turned on or off.
Although the standard tables exist for all statistic types, for some of them they are
not displayed in the default settings. For sectional views, histograms, projections,
chromaticity diagrams and 3D views the focus is on the graphical representati-
on of the measuring values. Invisible tables can be displayed via the menu item
Program view | Visibility of tables and diagrams“.
”
Objects in the tables can be marked by clicking them on with the mouse. The
marking can be changed by a click, with the Shift-key being pressed. Therefore, it
is also possible to mark several objects at the same time. The regions belonging to
the objects in the table are also marked or demarcated in their images.
182
13.5.2. Table All color statistics“

”
All statistical results will be displayed in the result tables in each case only in the color
space that is currently set in the used color image. To overcome this limitation, there is
an additional table All color statistics“. Here the mean values from all the color
”
statistics are displayed in all color spaces available in the program:
By default, this table is automatically displayed when the user applies any color statistics.
The visibility of the table can turned on and off in the dialog Visibility of tables
”
and diagrams“. This dialog can be opened using the menu item Program view |
”
Visibility of tables and diagrams“:
The table has a context menu, where in addition to the possibilities of storing, copying
and printing in all tables, a sorting of the entries can be made:
The All color Addon“, available until LabSoft“ version 14.2.28 is no longer
” ”
needed. It is completely replaced by the new table.
183
13.5.3. Value tables
Value tables are other tables used in the program. They are used as follows:
• for the numerical representation of the measuring values in sectional views, histo-
grams and projections,
• as a list of the measuring values of a time statistic.
In contrast to the standard tables where information on a measuring object consists

of one or more lines, in the value tables one or more columns belong to each object.
If, for example, sectional views are of different lengths, or if the time statistic contains
a different number of times, the table will have a different number of lines for each
measuring object. See the examples below:
Time statistic Sectional view
In the time statistic table on the left-hand side, the mean values of the standard statistic
of two regions have been recorded. In the table on the right-hand side, the values of a
sectional view together with the position coordinates of each value can be seen.
The context menu available in the value tables and the menu items available in the main
menu under Table“ can be compared to those of the standard tables. For a detailed
”
description see the previous section.
In the default settings, all value tables are invisible. They can be turned on via the menu
item Program view | Visibility of tables and diagrams“. For sectional views,
”
histograms and projections the option in the column Data“ is to be used and for time
”
statistics the option in the column Time table“.
”
13.5.4. Graphics of a standard statistic
For the standard statistics in grey and color images a special graphical representation
of the measuring values mean value, variance, minimum and maximum is available.
184
In these graphics, •“ stands for the mean value, ∨“ for the maximum and ∧“ for the
” ” ”
minimum. Between +“ and −“ there is the 3σ-area around the mean value.
” ”
All options of working with graphics (distributing values to several graphic sheets, en-
larging, context menu) will be described below since there is no difference between them
and the graphics of the curve progressions presented there.
13.5.5. Graphics of the curve progressions
Next to the right-hand side of the graphical representation, there is a legend of the
curves represented. The names of the image and of the region are displayed there. A
small rectangle in front of the name is in the color of the curve belonging to it.
If the corresponding region is marked, the name will change from standard to bold
type. In this case, even the curve will be highlighted. The marking of the region can be
effected either in the image or in the graphical representation by clicking on the name
concerned. When clicking and holding the Shift-key pressed, an existing marking state
can be modified, thus allowing several curves to be marked at the same time.
The curves can also be distributed to several sheets. On the one hand, this is performed
automatically by the program if the number of curves is too large for a good repre-
sentation on one single sheet. On the other hand, the user can manually change this
distribution. For that, a curve identifier has to be clicked on and drawn onto another
tab window marker with the left-hand mouse button being pressed:
185
While moving After moving
In this example the curve Luminance image - 2“ was drawn on the tab window marker
”
New“. Therefore, the program produced a new sheet 2“ containing the moved curve
” ”
only.
The graphic can be zoomed in or out by means of the scroll wheel. If the representation
is enlarged, the section can be moved by means of the pressed left-hand mouse button.
If a graphic is shown in the lower tab window, a context menu can be opened by pressing
the right-hand mouse button in the graphic. The same menu can be opened by means
of the main menu bar via the menu item Graphic“. The menu items available are as
”
follows:
• Save as“: If this item is selected, the file dialog where a file name can be selected
”
the current graphic is expected to be filed under will be opened. The formats
available are BMP and JPG. The graphic will be saved as currently represented
on the screen. Thus, for example, enlarging or reducing the display window results
in a corresponding enlargement or reduction of the bitmap file.
• Copy“: The graphic can be copied as bitmap into the clipboard by means of this
”
item. The copy will be influenced by the current display.
• Print“ and Print all graphics“: If the first item is used, only the current
” ”
graphic will be output to the printer, the second item causes all graphics of the
corresponding statistic to be output on one or more sheets. And again, the output
can be influenced by the size of the indication window.
• Options“ and Options for all graphics“: In both cases, the dialog Gra-
” ” ”
phic options“ will be opened. If the first command is used, settings performed
there will apply for the current graphic, if the second is used, the settings will
apply for all the graphics of this statistic type.
• Curves per sheet“: After this menu point the dialog number of curves“ is
” ”
opened. In this dialog the user can choose the number of curves per page.
186
Graphic option dialog
In the section Graphic“ on the left-hand side of the dialog, the following options are
”
available:
• Headline“: A name entered here will be shown in the graphic above the curves.
”
• Line type“: The points of the measuring values are connected by lines. The choi-
”
ces available are solid line“, dotted line“, dashed line“ and no line“.
” ” ” ”
The default setting is a solid line.
• Point type“: Points represent the positions of the measuring values. The opti-
”
ons available are as follows No points“, rectangular“, circle“, cross“,
” ” ” ”
horizontal line“, arrow up“ and arrow down“. The default setting is
” ” ”
no points“.
”
• no x-grid lines“: The vertical auxiliary lines in the graphic are not displayed.
”
• no y-grid lines“: The horizontal auxiliary lines in the graphic are not displayed.
”
• no border“: No rectangular border around the graphic.
”
• Indication of cursor position“: If this option is active, the coordinates of
”
the mouse pointer in the graphic will be faded in next to the pointer.
• Point tracing“: This option is preferably used for the graphical representation
”
of sectional views. If it is turned on, a vertical line will be drawn into the graphic.
At the same time, a small point will be drawn in at the position of the region for all
marked objects of this statistic on this graphic sheet in the corresponding image,
with the point containing the value of the graphic at the position of the mouse.
• No zoom in/out“: If this option is on, it will be impossible to enlarge or re-
”
duce the graphic by means of the scroll wheel or via drawing a rectangle. The
enlargement set before the opening of the dialog will remain unchanged.
187
• No visible legend“: The legend located as default setting on the right-hand

”
side next to the graphic and assigning the names to the colors of the curves will
be faded out.
• No curve marking“: The objects in the legend cannot be marked or demarcated
”
by a mouse click. Thus, moving to other sheets is also not permitted. The marking
of the corresponding objects by marking the regions in the image, however, is
possible.
There are further formatting options in the sections x-axis“ and y-axis“ on the right-
” ”
hand side of the dialog:
• Invisible axis“: By means of this option the corresponding axis in the graphic
”
can be faded out.
• Name of the axis“: Here, the name of the axis can be changed.
”
• Scaling options:
– Automatically linear“: The curve for the axis concerned will be linearly
”
scaled between the greatest and the smallest value.
– Automatically logarithmic“: The scaling will be between zero and the
”
maximum of the curve.
– Fixed linear“: The limitation of the value span can be entered into the
”
input boxes minimum and maximum.
– Maximum = 1“: The curve will be linearly scaled so that the maximum is
”
one.
– Mean value = 1“: The values will be adapted so that the mean value is
”
one.
By means of the buttons Save“ or Load“ a parameter set can be copied into a file or
” ”
taken over from there for later use.
Using the button Ok“ the modified settings will become effective in the graphic. Using
”
Cancel“ the current state of the graphic will remain unchanged.
”
13.5.6. Chromaticity diagrams
A chromaticity diagram is calculated and displayed for the statistic types Chromati-
”
city line diagram“ and Chromaticity area diagram“ and if the option Chro-
” ”
maticity diagram“ is turned on for the Color symbol object“ as well. In contrast
”
to the graphics documented in the previous chapters, the chromaticity diagrams are dis-
played in the same tab window as the images, i.e. in the upper part of the main window
of the application. Thus, a simultaneous representation of the image and the results as
well is not possible in the One-window view“ and therefore we recommend to switch
”
over to the Two-window view“. See section 14.3 on page 197. There it is possible,
”
for example, to show the image with the measuring region on the left-hand side and the
calculated chromaticity diagram on the right-hand side.
188
Total view Enlarged segment
In the diagram, the color values of the measuring objects are displayed in two color
coordinates. In case of a chromaticity line diagram as a line of the color values along
the measuring line. In case of a chromaticity area diagram or a color symbol object as
a scatter plot of the measuring points within the region or the pixel class. In horizontal
direction the first color component will be shown, in vertical direction the second one.
The inscription at the edge of the diagram shows the wavelengths in nanometer. Below
the diagram there is a steadily changing display x=... y=...“. These are the color
”
coordinates at the current position of the mouse.
The diagram can be zoomed by means of the scroll wheel of the mouse. Keeping the
left-hand mouse button pressed the visible segment can be moved. In the context menu,
there are the menu items Adapt zoom“ and Zoom reset“ which are also used to
” ”
enlarge or reduce the representation.
The main menu of the program contains the submenu Diagram“. (If it is deactivated,
”
please click once into the chromaticity diagram in order to make the menu active.) The
options of this menu are as follows:
• Save as“: Using this menu item a file dialog will be opened where a file name can
”
be selected under which the current diagram is to be filed. The formats available
are BMP and JPG. The diagram is saved in the same form as currently represen-
ted on the screen. Hence, enlarging or reducing the display window results in a
corresponding enlargement or reduction of the bitmap file.
• Copy“: Using this menu item the diagram can be copied as bitmap into the
”
clipboard. And again, the current display will influence the appearance of the
copy.
• Print“: The current diagram will be output to the printer. And again, the size
”
of the display window can influence the output.
• Options“ and Options for all graphics“: In both cases, the dialog Opti-
” ” ”
ons of chromaticity diagrams“ will be opened. When the first menu command
189
is used the settings done there are only effective for the current graphic, in the se-
cond case, however, for all diagrams of this statistic type.
• Curves per sheet“: After this menu point the dialog number of curves“ is
” ”
opened. In this dialog the user can choose the number of curves per page.
Dialog for chromaticity diagram options
In the section Color definition“, the properties of the color space are defined where
”
the indications are expected to be done.
• Color space“: The color spaces xy, uv, u’v’, u*v*, a*b* and rg are available.
”
Depending on the color space selected here the graphical representation of the
diagram is changed since the limiting spectral color value in these color spaces has
always a different profile.
• Observer“: Here, a change between a 2◦“ and a 10◦“ observer is possible.
” ” ”
• Reference color“: The standard illuminants E“, A“, C“, D55“, D65“,
” ” ” ” ” ”
D75“, 1900K“, 2300K“ and User-defined“ are available. Using the button
” ” ” ”
User-defined color“ the reference color desired can be entered.
”
190
In the section Graphic view“ the colors in the diagram can be modified. The legend in
”
most cases speaks for itself. The alpha values show the transparency of the corresponding
colors. The value range is between 0 (transparent) and 255 (opaque).
In the section Visible elements“ different display options can be modified:
”
• Black body“: If the option is turned on, a curve is faded into the diagram
”
showing the chromaticity values of black bodies at different temperatures.
• Grid“: If the option is turned off, the coordinate axes and the grid will be faded
”
out.
• Status line“: If the option is turned off, the chromaticity values at the cursor
”
position will disappear.
• Dominant wavelength“: The dominant wavelength of the current cursor po-
”
sition will be displayed in the diagram.
• Color temperature“: If this option is turned on, then the color temperature
”
can be displayed in the status line if the mouse is placed over the chart where color
temperatures are available.
• Reference color“: When you activate this option, the reference color is dis-
”
played as a small square in the diagram. The value of the reference color is determi-
ned from the image, in which the corresponding statistical object was calculated.
The reference color can there be set using the menu item Image | Color space“,
”
see the section 9.5 on page 108. The input of reference colors is of course possible
only for color spaces that need a reference color. If several statistical objects are
shown in the same diagram, only the reference color of one object is displayed. If
working with different reference colors in different images, then it is advisable to
divide the objects from different images on different charts.
• Legend“: If the option is turned off, the names of the measuring objects standing
”
next to the right-hand side of the diagram will be removed by means of which a
connection to the colors used for the representation in the diagram could be made.
In the section Curve view“, the indication of the curves can be influenced by the user:
”
• Point type“: The shape of the points shown in the diagram can be modified
”
here. This option is of some importance for chromaticity area diagrams and color
symbol objects only.
• Fill points“: Here, it can be defined whether the points displayed are expected
”
to be filled or not.
• Point size“: Here, the size of the points displayed can be modified.
”
• Show ellipse“: An ellipse can be displayed by using this option showing with its
”
position and size the mean value and the variance of the chromaticity coordinates.
The option is of some importance for chromaticity area diagrams and color symbol
objects only.
• Sigma“: If the option Display ellipse“ is turned on, the size of the ellipse can
” ”
be defined in units of variance Sigma“.
”
191
• Show only mean value“: If this option is selected, then only the average is
”
shown as a single point instead of the point cloud with the individual color values
of the pixels.
13.5.7. 3D views
Chromaticity diagrams are displayed in the same tab window as the images. The same
applies to 3D view diagrams, which is located in the upper part of the main window of
the application. Therefore, it is not possible to simultaneously represent the image and
the result display in the one-window view“ and thus we recommend to change over
”
to the two-window mode“. See section 14.3 on page 197. There, the image with the
”
measuring region can be displayed, for example, on the left-hand side and the calculated
3D view on the right-hand side.
Measuring region in the image 3D view
The color representation in a diagram is in accordance with the representation of the

corresponding pixels in the image, i.e. if the color palette and the scaling of the image
are changed, the indication in the diagram will be changed as well.
Using the scroll wheel of the mouse the representation can be enlarged or reduced.
Keeping the left-hand mouse button pressed the 3D mountains can be turned. If the
Shift-key is pressed at the same time, the object will not be turned but moved.
The main menu of the program contains the submenu Diagram“.(If it is not active,
”
click once into the diagram in order to activate it.) The options below are available in
this menu:
• Save as“: A file dialog will be opened via this menu item where a file name
”
the current diagram is expected to be filed under can be selected. The formats
BMP and JPG are available. The diagram will be filed as currently represented on
the screen. Thus, if the indication window is, for example, enlarged or reduced, a
corresponding enlargement or reduction of the Bitmap file will be the result.
• Copy“: By means of this menu item the diagram can be copied into the clipboard
”
as Bitmap. And again, the appearance of the copy will be influenced by the current
display.
• Print“: The current diagram will be output to the printer. And again, the output
”
can be influenced by the size of the indication window.
192
• Options“ and Options for all graphics“: In both cases, the dialog Op-
” ” ”
tions of 3D views“ will be opened. Using the first menu command the settings
adjusted there apply for the current graphic only. If the second one is used, they
apply for all diagrams of this statistic type.
Option dialog for 3D views
Using the button Color“ the background color in the diagram can be selected. In the
”
input box Height“ or by means of the scroll bar located next to it, an enlargement
”
factor for the height of the representation in comparison to its width or depth can be
selected.
Using Default“ the standard settings for 3D diagrams are restored. By means of the
”
buttons Save“ and Load“ selected settings can be saved and reconstructed, respec-
” ”
tively.
If the dialog is left via Ok“, the settings will permanently be taken over. If the dialog is
”
finished via Cancel“, the settings before the opening of the dialog will be reconstruc-
”
ted.
193
14. Image processing and evaluation images
Having started the program the camera image and the luminance image are available.
If a color camera is used, the color image will be displayed additionally. Captures with
the camera will be saved in these images:
• The captures with the menu commands Camera | Live“, Camera | Grab“
” ”
and Capture | Autoscan“ are written into the camera image.
”
• Luminance images are captured by means of the menu commands Capture |
”
SinglePic“, Capture | MultiPic“ and Capture | HighDyn“. For these
” ”
algorithms the capture of camera images is necessary thus changing the content of
the camera image as well.
• If a color camera is used, a color image can be captured via Capture | Color-
”
HighDyn“. The results of this capture are a new color image and a new luminance
image.
For many applications, however, these three images are not sufficient. Additional images
are needed, for example, to compare image contents to each other, to perform arithmetic
calculations with images or to use other image processing algorithms. The menu items
available for working with evaluation images are as follows:
• New evaluation images can be created by means of the menu items Image | New“
”
and Image | Duplicate“. An evaluation image which is no longer needed can be
”
deleted via the menu item Image | Delete“. These operations will be described
”
in the section below.
• Display options of an image can be transferred to another image by means of
Image | Copy options“. See section 14.2 on page 197.
”
• In the default settings, the program will show one image only - One-window
”
view“”. If two images have to be visually compared to each other, the Two-
”
window view“ can be selected. This and other options of changing the distribu-
tion of windows can be found in the menu Programm view“”. See section 14.3
”
on page 197.
• In some applications, there are similar image contents in different evaluation images
and similar evaluations are to be carried out with these images. Thus, it can be
quite helpful to use the same region list in different images thus allowing the
measuring regions in the images to be situated at the same positions. The menu
item Program view | Assignment of region lists“ allows the same region
”
list to be assigned to several images. See section 14.4 on page 198.
• The main application of a projective rectification is to correct a perspective distor-
tion in an image. The geometrical connection between the pixels of the source and
the destination images is automatically determined by the program from one mar-
194
ked region in the source image and one in the destination image. These measuring
regions can be placed at the right positions by the user.
The rectification task can be solved via the menu item Evaluation | Projective
”
rectification“. There is a detailed description of this dialog and the algorithm
in section 14.7 on page 205.
• As with the projective rectification, a new destination image will be calculated from
a source image by means of a coordinate transformation. In contrast to the projec-
tive rectification the program needs two pre-calculated index images. If requested,
these two index images can be created by the company TechnoTeam. Typical ap-
plications, for instance, are the correction of lens distortions or the representation
of a light intensity distribution (LID) in a theta-phi coordinate system.
The menu item to start the corresponding dialog can be found under Evaluati-
”
on | Coordinate transformation“. See section 14.8 on page 208 for a more
detailed description.
• By means of a color look-up table transformation color values of a source image can
be converted into corrected color values. Such a correction is needed for example
in the case of a CFA camera capturing narrowband light sources (LED or so). The
transformation needs three previously calculated images with correction data.
The menu item to start the corresponding dialog can be found under Evaluation
”
| color look-up table transformation transformation“. See section 15.4
on page 233 for a more detailed description.
• To separate areas of different brightness from each other either by colorized areas
or by lines the isocolor/isoline method is available. Having selected the menu item
Evaluation | Isolines and Isocolors“ a dialog is opened, where the parame-
”
ters desired can be entered and where the desired representation can be calculated.
See section 14.9 on page 209.
• There is a great number of additional image processing options available in the
dialog Image processing“ which can be opened by means of the menu command
”
Evaluation | Image processing“. All operations of this dialog can be recorded
”
for later use as a macro under a user-defined menu item. Amongst others, the
algorithms below are available in this dialog:
– Loading and saving images.

– Projective rectification, coordinate transformation and isoline calculation ba-
sed on parameter sets which have been created via the parameterization dia-
logs presented above.
– Arithmetic connections of images to other images or constants, such as addi-
tion ..., inversion.
– Operations such as mirroring, rotating, enlarging or reducing images.
– Image filters such as box, erosion and dilatation.
– Especially for the recording of user-defined macros it is possible to display
message boxes between the operations.
195
• If user-defined macros are recorded, the creation and the deletion of evaluation
images, the capture of camera, luminance and color images, the data export to
Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel and the selection of already existing macros
can be integrated. For the administration of the user-defined macros there is a
special dialog which can be opened by means of the menu item Macros | Macro
”
recorder“. See section 14.11 on page 220 for details.
The evaluation options of color images will be described in chapter 15 beginning on

page 227.
14.1. Using evaluation images
A new evaluation image can be created via the menu item Image | New“. The dialog
”
Image properties“ will be opened:
”
In this dialog, the parameters of the new image can be set: name, physical quantity and
unit, image size. If a program version is used which supports color images, this image
type can also be selected here. Later, the image type cannot be changed.
A copy of an already existing image can be created by means of the menu item Image
”
| Duplicate“. It is not only the image content that will be taken over to the new image
but the physical quantity and unit, the image scaling and the color palette as well.
While duplicating, the image name is automatically created. If requested, modifications
can later be performed by means of the menu item Image | Properties“.
”
An evaluation image which is no longer needed can be removed via the menu item
Image | Delete“. The images Camera image“, Luminance image“ and possibly
” ” ”
Color image“ which always exist cannot be deleted by the user.
”
196
14.2. Copying display options to other images
14.2. Copying display options to other images
For the visual comparison of several images it could make sense to use the same display
settings in several images. A dialog can be opened via the menu item Image | Copy
”
options“ by means of which the settings of an image can be copied to one or more
images.
Without image size With image size Destination images
Using Take over“ it can be defined which image properties are to be copied to other
”
images. In addition to the properties such as physical quantity and unit, image scaling
and color palette, the image content itself, the regions drawn in and the used coordinate
system can be copied as well. For the take-over of these properties it is, of course, required
to match the size of the destination images.
The option Window decorations“ can be set to take over the display of the regions,
”
the status line, the coordinate system and the color palette to the destination images.
(These options will be turned on or off for one image by means of the menu items Image
”
view | Palette“ to Image view | Regions“.)
”
On the second page of the dialog, the images the options are to be copied to can be
selected. It is, of course, not possible to transfer options to the source image and images of
a different image type. The buttons Check all“ and Uncheck all“ are to facilitate
” ”
the inputs. The copy operation will be started by Ok“, the dialog will be left without
”
action via Cancel“.
”
14.3. One- and two-window views
In addition to the one-window view which is set as a standard there is the two-window
view making possible a better overview, a comparison between the images or an obser-
vation of an image and a diagram. There, the assignment of the images or diagrams to
the right or to the left can be freely selected. To switch over the menu items Program
”
view | One-window representation“ and Program view | Two-window re-
”
presentation“ can be used. (Furthermore, the menu Program view“ contains some
”
other menu items to influence the division of the window: The default setting can be
197
restored by means of Arrange vertically“ or Arrange horizontally“. With

” ”
Display images only“ or Display tables only“ the other elements will be faded
” ”
out.)
Two-window view, image on the left active
If the Two-window view is worked with and two images are considered at the same
time, it should be taken into account that it is possible to simultaneously consider two
images but in the header of the program the menus Image“, Regions“, Coordinate
” ” ”
system“ and Image view“ exist only once. These menus will automatically be assigned
”
to that image which is active. An image can be activated by clicking once on it by means
of the mouse. The state of activation can be seen by the border around the window
concerned.
Two-window view, image on the right active
14.4. Assigning region lists
Measuring regions can be drawn, modified and deleted in each image. The region types
available are Rectangle, Circle, Line and Polygon. All measuring regions of an image are
contained in exactly one list which is assigned to this image. The measuring regions are
used, for example, for statistic evaluations, see chapter 13 beginning on page 135. The
default settings of the program for the work with the measuring regions are as follows:
• The measuring regions in the evaluation images do not depend on each other, if
regions in one image are modified, the regions in other images will not be influenced.
• A joint region list is used in the camera image, the luminance image and in the
color image. If one or more measuring regions in one of these images is modified,
198
14.4. Assigning region lists
the modifications will be effective in the other images as well. The joint list in the
three images is called Standard list“.
”
In some applications, there are similar image contents in different evaluation images and
similar evaluations are to be performed with these images. So, it could make sense to
use the same region list in different images thus allowing the measuring regions to be at
the same positions in the images. The menu item Program view | Assignment of
”
region lists“ is one way of assigning the same region list to different images. In this
dialog, the assignment of region lists to images can be modified:
Standard list List[1]
The default setting is displayed in the figures above: The Standard list“ is used in
”
the camera, luminance and color images. The region list List[1]“ is used in the image
”
Evaluation[1]“. The assignment of the corresponding list to images can be shown by
”
clicking on an item on the left. Another image can be assigned to the list by clicking on
the right-hand side.
The two figures below show the result of assigning the Standard list“ to the images
”
Evaluation[1]“ and Evaluation[2]“. The List[1]“ used previously in Evalua-
” ” ” ”
tion[1]“ is no longer used.
A modification of the assignment of region lists to images on the right-hand side of the
dialog will immediately be carried out. It should be taken into consideration that statistic
evaluations in the corresponding image which are an assignment of such an evaluation
to an image and a region will automatically be deleted.
Standard list List[1]
199
Using Default“ the original assignment of the region lists can be restored.
”
14.5. Region view properties
In some application cases it might be necessary to change the representation of the lists
of regions. For doing this, the dialog Region view properties“ can be used which is
”
opened via the menu item Program view | Region view properties“.
”
The figure shows the default settings, which can also be selected by pressing the but-
ton Default“ in the dialog and then choose by pressing the button Apply“ in the
” ”
program. These default settings are:
• Line features“: The contour of regions is represented by a black and white

”
dashed line.
• Text and point features“: The name of the region is displayed at the top on
”
the right.
• Selected regions“: Selected regions are represented by a red and white dashed
”
line.
• Group regions“: Group regions (OR, AND, XOR) are represented by a green
”
and white dashed line.
Any changes made to this mode of representation in the dialog are valid - from this
moment on - for all regions in all images. If the display features are to be changed only
200
14.6. Searching for regions and using them automatically
for some single regions, the dialog Region list“ can be used. This dialog is opened
”
via the menu item Regions | Features“ (cf paragraph 10.3.3 on page 121).
”
Using the menu item Evaluation | Searching for regions and using them au-
”
tomatically“, a dialog is opened which allows the user to find regions automatically
in a luminance or color image through their brightness.
Searching for regions
In the paragraph Searching for regions“, an image is fixed in which the regions
”
are to be found. The parameter Luminance threshold“ is used to determine the
”
minimum luminance (which is also possible in color images) which pixels must have in
order to be assigned to a region. Using the parameter Smooth image“ the influence of
”
the image noise can be reduced. By means of these parameters, image areas are identified
which will later serve as potential candidates for image regions.
Changing regions
In the paragraph Change regions“, those values which are unsuitable can be removed
”
from these raw values, and those which are left over are corrected. The two parameters
201
Minimum size“ and Maximum size“ are used to sort out all those candidates whose
” ”
length or width is unsuitable. The other parameters modify the shape of the regions.
Smoothing contour
Value = 1 Vakue = 5
Enlarging regions
Value = 0 Value = 7 Value = -7

Convex envelope
switched off switched on
Using rectangles
switched off switched on
202
Using regions
In the paragraph Use regions“, the user can decide what to do with the regions found.
”
By setting Overwrite existing“, the already existing regions in the image are deleted
”
and replaced by the new ones. Using the item Maintain existing“, the new regions
”
are attached to the end of the list of the already existing ones. Selecting one of these
options enables the user to set up new statistics for the newly attached regions.
Furthermore, in the paragraph Generate statistics“, a statistical evaluation for
”
the regions found can automatically be generated by means of the four radio buttons
No statistics“, Standard statistics“, Luminance objects“ and Symbol ob-
” ” ” ”
jects“. In doing so, the flag Separate parameter sets“ defines whether the same
”
parameter set shall be used for all regions or whether a new set is to be used for each of
them.
Using already existing regions
If in the paragraph Use regions“ the option Use existing“ is set, the program will
” ”
use the already existing regions in this image and rearrange them. Thus, the statistical
evaluations assigned to these regions are maintained, only the measured values will be
updated after the rearrangement of the regions.
In order to be able to find the assignment of the already existing regions to the newly
found ones, the program uses an algorithm which calculates a distance dimension between
the existing and the new regions. In these calculations, the following region characteristics
are taken into account:
• the distance between the old and the new position

• the differences in the surface areas of the existing and the new region
• the difference in the contour length of the existing and the new region
• the difference in the contour shape of the existing and the new region
• the rotation of the existing region towards the new one
original slightly shifted newly positioned
In most application cases, the differences in the position of the regions are of minor
importance so that the default parameterization of the search algorithm does not need to
be modified. However, if this should be necessary somehow, the search parameters can be
modified by pressing the button Parameters“ in the paragraph Use regions“. The
” ”
dialog Region search parameters“ is opened allowing the user to change settings.
”
203
The paragraph below gives a description of the dialog and of the distance dimension
used for searching for regions.
By pressing the button Execute“, the search process for finding regions is started.
”
The buttons Save parameters“ and Load parameters“ enable the user to carry
” ”
out the respective actions. When the dialog is closed, the parameters set are saved and
will be restored when it is opened again.
The actions carried out in this dialog can be recorded in a macro and used later either
individually or in connection with other actions as an independent menu item.
Modifying the search parameters
By pressing the button Parameters“ in the dialog Search for and use regions
” ”
automatically“, the dialog Region search parameters“ is opened. Here, the
”
parameters of the region assignment can be modified, if necessary.
The two options provided in the dialog fix the way of handling the missing assignments:
• Delete existing regions if not found: If this option is selected, then all regions
for which no assignment could be made are deleted.
• Create missing regions if not found: If in the existing list of regions there
are no regions which can be assigned, new regions are created when selecting this
option.
All other entries exert an influence on the algorithm of assigning regions. In the previous
paragraph, all those region characteristics which are used in the Distance calculation“
”
have already been mentioned : geometrical distance, surface area, contour length, shape
of region, rotation. From this, the distance dimension R is calculated as follows:
R = WD ∗ D + WA ∗ A + WU ∗ U + WF ∗ F ∗ WW ∗ W
In this equation, WD , WA , WU , WF and WW are the weights of the geometrical distance,

the surface area, the circumference, the shape of the region, and the rotation, respectively,
which can be assigned to the corresponding region characteristics in the dialog. In the
default setting, all of these weights are set to 1.
204
14.7. Projective rectification
In order to allow a reasonable calculation of a common distance dimension of the various

characteristics, the raw values of the characteristics must be normalized. The calculation
rules are relatively complex, however, the following estimations can be used as a general
guideline:
• D = distance of the regions to be compared: Two equally large regions

having the same centre of gravity have a distance of D = 0. Two touching regions
have approximately a distance of D = 0.6.
• A = surface area of the regions: Two regions of the same surface area have
their surface area difference parameter A = 0. If one of the regions is twice as large
in size, and, thus, is four times as large in area, then A = 0.5.
• U = circumference of the regions: Two regions having the same contour length
have U = 0. A region whose contour length is twice as long has approximately U
= 0.5.
• F = shape of the regions: Regions of the same shape have F = 0. A region
whose width is twice as much as that of another region, with the heights being the
same, has approximately F = 0.64.
• W = angle between the regions: Whether the rotation of two regions towards
each other is taken into account depends on the deviation of the region shape from
a sphere. For regions which are much wider than high, W amounts to a maximum
of 1.0 at an angle of rotation of 90◦ . The smaller the angle of rotation is, and the
less the region shape deviates from the spherical shape, the smaller this value will
be.
When searching for the best possible assignment, each existing region is compared with
each newly found region in order to discover the best matching. To make sure that no
complete misallocations can occur, a value for an unconditional rejection can be entered
in the field Maximum deviation“ in the dialog. If the distance calculated exceeds this
”
threshold value even for the best possible matching of two regions, no assignment of an
old to a new region will be effected.
There are measuring tasks where the camera is directed at an angle to the measuring
scene, but where the evaluation requires an orthogonal view since the measuring points
are to be positioned in a fixed grid in the measuring scene. Captures in streets are a
typical application. The camera’s direction of view is directed towards the street. Street
sections which are farther away will appear perspectively shortened in the image. In such
cases the captured images can be perspectively rectified.
205
The dialog for the parameterization of a projective rectification is opened via the menu
command Evaluation | Projective rectification“.
”
In this dialog, first the source image and the destination image of the projective rectifi-
cation have to be defined. In the example, they are the images Luminance image“ and
”
Evaluation[2]“. In order to instruct the rectification algorithm four points are needed
”
in each image where the rectification parameters are calculated from. To facilitate the
input of the point coordinates in both images marked regions can be used. The use of
rectangles and polygons with four corners is quite convenient.
In the standard task Rectification of captures in streets“ a polygon will be
”
used in the source image, whereas in the destination image a rectangle will be used.
As a rectangle is distinctly defined due to two points, in this case only the coordinates
of two points (top left and bottom right) have to be defined. In the dialog, there is
the option to take over the coordinates of the regions of the image by using the button
Read points from region marked“. The opposite case is possible as well: Using the
”
button Write points to region marked“ data entered via dialog are transferred
”
to the marked region in the image.
206
With the option Apply projective rectification only in target region“ the
”
usage of the algorithm is restricted to the two regions in the source and target image. This
possibility is usefull if the results of several rectifications from different source images
are stored within one target image (composing of images).
During the rectification the point of the source image is mapped to the point of the
destination image, point2 to point2 etc. When drawing rectangles the corners are always
in a specified order: From top left clockwise. If polygons are drawn, the order of the points
is determined by the order they are drawn in the image by the mouse. It is recommended
to start with the top left point and then to draw the other points clockwise, see also
the figure. The fine positioning of the polygon points can be done after finishing the
drawing.
Having finished the definition of the source and the destination regions the rectification
can be started via the button Execute“. In the example of rectifying the street scene
”
it is possible to simultaneously use the marked rectangle in the destination image for
the definition of a coordinate system, see section 11.1 on page 128. The figure below
shows the result of a rectification, with the coordinate system defined by means of the
rectangle being shown as well.
A data record with rectification patameters can be saved in a file for later use by means
of the button Save parameters“. Later, this data record can be retrieved via the
”
button Load parameters“. Saving a data record is also necessary if the projective
”
rectification is to be used in a self-created macro as a menu item. See page 215.
207
14.8. Coordinate transformation
As with the projective rectification a new destination image is calculated from a source
image by means of a coordinate transformation. In contrast to the projective rectification,
the program needs two precalculated index images here. If desired, the index images can
be created by the company TechnoTeam. Typical applications, for example, are the
correction of lens distortions or the representation of the luminous intensity distribution
(LID) in a Theta-Phi coordinate system. The figure below shows a capture with a half-
space lens. A polar coordinate system is faded into the image display. In this polar
coordinate system the radius increases outwardly beginning from the center. The angle
Phi increases clockwise from 0 to 360◦ .
Source image
The dialog Coordinate transformation“ can be opened by means of the menu

”
item Evaluation | Coordinate transformation“.
”
In this dialog the source image and the destination image of the transformation can be
selected first. After that, the two index images are to be loaded. The names of the index
images will be displayed and then the image size will be checked. The image size of
the destination image is determined by this image size and it is displayed in the dialog.
208
14.9. Isoline and isocolor representation
These checks having been successful, the coordinate transformation can be started by
means of the button Execute“.
”
In the destination image (see figure below) the coordinate system has been drawn in.
Here, the angle Phi increases from the left to the right from 0 to 360◦ . The radius
increases from top to bottom.
A data record with transformation parameters can be saved for later use in a file by
means of the button Save parameters“. Later, this data record can be retrieved via
”
the button Load parameters“. It is also necessary to save the data record if the
”
coordinate transformation in a self-created macro is to be used as an independent menu
item. See also page 215.
Destination image
In order to separate areas of different brightness from each other by lines the isoline
method can be used. Having selected the menu item Evaluation | Isolines“ a dialog is
”
opened where the parameters needed can be entered and where the isoline representation
desired can be calculated.
Additionally there is the possibility within the dialog to mark areas of different brightness
by different colors. For this the isocolor palette is used, see section 9.4.2 on page 106. The
dialog allows to use the given luminance thresholds in the isocolor palette representation.
This possibility is described at the end of this section.
209
14.9.1. Isoline representation
Having selected the image which the isoline representsation is to be calculated for the
lowest and the highest luminance values in this image are displayed. These can serve
as an orientation for the luminance thresholds which can be entered on the left-hand
side. The up-down button on top left is used to determine the number of threshold
values. Having pressed the button Default“ the threshold values are entered into the
”
corresponding input boxes at an equal distance between minimum and maximum.
On the right-hand side, some options can be modified which can influence either the
calculation or the display of the isolines:
• Turning on the option Relative (%)“ causes the values in the input boxes to
”
be interpreted as relative.
• In the selection box Color“ the colors of the markings in the image can be
”
changed.
• In the selection box Threshold values“ the places in the image can be defined
”
where the threshold values are to be displayed at the lines concerned.
• If the parameter Smoothing“ is higher, the curves will be more strongly smoo-
”
thed. Thus, the shape of the curve will be less influenced by noise.
The calculation of the isolines is started via the button Execute“. Lines visible in the
”
image are removed by means of the button Delete lines“.
”
Using the button Save parameters“ a data record containing calculation parameters
”
can be saved in a file for later use. Later, this record can be retrieved again via the
button Load parameters“. Saving a data record is also necessary if the calculation
”
of isolines in a self-created macro is to be used as an independent menu item. See also
page 215.
In the figure below, the result of an isoline calculation with the parameters set in the
dialog above is shown:
210
14.9.2. Isocolor representation
The entered threshold values can be copied to the isocolor palette representation, see
section 9.4.2 on page 106. This isolocor palette representation is independently of the
indication of the isoline representation.
If the checkbox Use isocolor palette“ is switched on, then the isocolor palette is
”
used in the image with the thresholds, currently entered in the dialog. Changes of the
number of thresholds or their values are taken over into the image immediately. All other
parameters in the dialog have no meanings for the isocolor representation.
By pressing the button edit isocolor palette“ the isocolor palette dialog is opened.
”
In this dialog the current thresholds are shown. By request the user can change here the
colors of the different luminance ranges. The following illustrations show an example of
such an isocolor representation with and without isolines drawn.
211
14.10. Image processing
Using the menu item Evaluation | Image processing“ a dialog with the options
”
below will be opened:
• Arithmetic, logic and filter operations with images can be performed.

• Images needed can be loaded, images calculated can be saved.
• Several successive operations can be recorded in a macro in order to carry them
out later several times using a self-defined menu item.
• The operations below can be integrated into the self-defined activities:
– The menu items New“ and Delete“ in the menu Image“ for creating or
” ” ”
deleting evaluation images.
– The menu items in the menu Capture“ for capturing luminance or color
”
images.
– The menu items for processing color images Decompose into color ex-
”
tracts“ to Color difference to a color“ in the menu Evaluation“
” ”
can also be integrated into macros.
• Existing parameter sets for the projective rectification, the coordinate transforma-
tion and for the calculation of isolines can also be used in order to perform these
operations in the dialog or during the creation of macros.
212
On the left-hand side of the dialog the function desired can be selected by clicking on the
corresponding radio button. After that, the parameters needed for this function can be
entered on the right-hand side. The data having been completed, the function selected
can be started via the button Execute“.
”
Using the button Macro recorder“ another dialog can be opened where the recor-
”
ding of the data can be switched on or off in a user-defined macro, see section secti-
on 14.11 on page 220.
In the three sections below the operations implemented in the dialog and their parameters
will be described.
14.10.1. Register card Common“

”
If the register card Common“ on the left-hand side of the dialog is clicked on, one of
”
the operations below can be selected by means of the radio buttons. They have become
part of the dialog in order to use them in the macros to be captured.
Load image (fixed name)

In this operation, an image with a fixed file name be loaded into the program. The
file name can be entered on the right-hand side in the section Source“. This
”
name can either be written directly into the input box or it can be defined via the
button File name“ in a file selection dialog.
”
In the section Destination“ the destination image for the loading operation can
”
be defined. Having pressed the button Execute“ the file desired will be loaded
”
into the destination image.
Load image (file dialog)
Also in this operation, a file will be loaded into the image. In contrast to the
operation above, the selection of the file name is not effected before pressing the
button Execute“ but later. Therefore, the section Source“ in the dialog is
” ”
disabled. This difference is of some importance for a use within a macro. In the
213
first option, the image will always be loaded from the same file when the macro is
executed. In the second option, a file selection dialog is opened when the macro is
executed thus always allowing a different file to be selected.
Save image (to directory)
An image can be filed in this operation. The image to be saved is displayed in the
section Source“. In the section Destination“ the directory where the image
” ”
is to be filed has to be entered. The file name is automatically derived from the
date, the time and the image type.
Save image (file dialog)
In this operation, an image can be saved in a file, too. In contrast to the previous
option, the file name will not automatically be defined but only after having pressed
the button Execute“. The difference is of some importance for a use within
”
a macro. In the first option, the image is always saved under a different name
in the same directory when the macro is executed. In the second option, a file
selection dialog is opened when the macro is executed thus allowing a file name to
be interactively selected.
Copy image
Using this operation the content of an image can be copied to another image. Both
images have to be of the same type. The size of the destination image is matched
to the size of the source image. The parameters are the names of the source and
the destination images.
Convert image
By means of this operation the image content can be copied to another image. Both
images can be of different types. The size of the destination image is matched to
the size of the source image. The parameters are the names of the source and the
destination images. If color images are converted to monochrome images, the des-
tination image will contain the luminance of the color image after the conversion.
If monochrome images are converted to color images, the color image will have the
same luminance as the source image. The color coordinates are x=y=0.3333.
Set image size (other image)
The parameters of this operation are a source image and a destination image.
While executing the size of the destination image will be set on the size of the
source image.
Set image size (coordinates)
By means of this operation the image size can be set to the entered values.
Move image origin
The coordinates of the upper left corner of the image are changed by means of this
operation. The image size and the image content remain unchanged.
Set image (fixed value)
In this operation, an image can be set on a fixed value. This fixed value can either
be written directly into the input box or it can be entered via a dialog after having
pressed the button Value“ in the section Source. If color images are used, the
”
data can be input in the dialog in any color space. The entered color value is
214
displayed in the input box in the color space RGB by three digits separated by
blanks.
Set image (from marked region)
The value to set in the target image is calculated from the mean value of a rectan-
gular region marked in the source image.
Set image (Input dialog)
Also in this operation, a fixed value can be assigned to an image. In contrast to the
previous operation, the value desired is queried only after the button Execute“
”
has been pressed. The difference is of some importance for a use within a macro. In
the first option, the same predefined value is used for the image when the macro is
executed. In the second option, an input dialog is opened thus allowing a different
value to be used each time.
Projective rectification
The projective rectification has been described in section 14.7 on page 205. It has
also been mentioned that it is possible to save the parameters of the operation in
a file. By means of this parameter file a projective rectification can be used in the
image processing dialog and integrated into a macro. In the section Source“ the
”
source image to be rectified is defined. In Source 2“ the name of the parameter
”
file can be selected. In the section Destination“ the destination image of the
”
rectification is defined.
Coordinate transformation
The coordinate transformation operation has been described in section 14.8 on pa-
ge 208. There, it has also been mentioned that it is possible to save the parameters
of the operation in a file. By means of this parameter file a coordinate transforma-
tion can be used in the image processing dialog and integrated into the macro. In
the section Source“ the source image to be transformed is defined. In Source
” ”
2“ the name of the parameter file can be selected. In the section Destination“
”
the destination image of the transformation is defined.
Color look-up table transformation
The color look-up table transformation has been described in section 15.4 on pa-
ge 233. There, it has also been mentioned that it is possible to file the parameters
of the operation. By means of this parameter file a color look-up table transforma-
tion can be used in the image processing dialog and integrated into the macro. In
the section Source“ the source image to be transformed is defined. In Source
” ”
2“ the name of the parameter file can be selected. In the section Destination“
”
the destination image of the transformation is defined.
Isolines
The representation of isolines has been described in section 14.9 on page 209.
There, it has also been mentioned that it is possible to file the parameters of the
operation. Using this parameter file an isoline representation in the image proces-
sing dialog can be used and integrated into a macro. As the isoline representation
is calculated and drawn in the same image, the image to be used has only to be
defined in the section Destination“.
”
215
14.10.2. Register card Arithmetic“

”
In addition to some arithmetic and logic operations with images there are some options
for rotating, mirroring and image filtering available in the section Arithmetic“.
”
If color images are processed, it should be taken into consideration that all arithmetic
and logic operations will be carried out component-by-component in the color space
RGB“. That means that the three color components red, green and blue are processed
”
independently from each other as if they were independent monochrome images. If other
operations in other color spaces are necessary, their implementation can be realized as
follows:
1. Decomposing the color images in color extracts. See section 15.1 on page 228.
2. Doing the calculations in the monochrome color extracts.
3. Composing the monochrome color extracts to the resulting color image. See secti-
on 15.2 on page 229.
All images used must be of the same type. The size of the target image will be matched
automatically. If the two source images have different sizes, the operations will be carried
out only in those image regions which are available in both of them. For nearly all
operations, the same image can be used both as source and also as target image, which
makes the use of any additional auxiliary images and the copying the image contents
unnecessary.
Addition
In this operation, either two images or one image and one constant can be added
and the result can be saved in a destination image. The decision whether a second
source image or a constant is added to source image 1 is taken via a radio button
in the section Source 2“. Depending on the decision either the second image is
”
to be selected there or the constant has to be indicated.
If the second source parameter is a constant, it can either directly be written in
the input box or the dialog can be used which will be opened after having pressed
the button Value“. If color images are used, the color value can come from any
”
color space. In the input box this constant will always be represented in the color
space RGB“.
”
Subtraction
The meaning of these parameters can be compared to the addition parameters.
Multiplication
Division
The meaning of these parameters can be compared to the addition parameters. A
division by zero is resolved within the program. The corresponding pixel or the
color component is set to zero in the destination image.
Minimum
After the operation, the destination image contains the smallest of the source
216
image values and the second operand which can be either a constant or a second
source image.
Maximum
After the operation, the destination image contains the larger of the values of the
source image and the second operand which can either be a constant or a second
source image.
Greater than
Two images or one image and a constant can be compared to each other. The result
will be a new image containing the result of the comparison in terms of pixels with
the values 0“ or 1“.
” ”
Smaller than
Two images or one image and a constant can be compared to each other. The result
will be a new image containing the result of the comparison in terms of pixels with
the values 0“ or 1“.
” ”
Negation
In this operation, all pixels in the source image which are not zero will be set to
zero. All pixels which are zero will be set to one.
Inversion
In this operation, all pixels of the source image will be set to their reciprocals in
the destination image. Zero values in the source image will remain unchanged.
Power
In this operation, the values of an image can be potentiated. If there is a power of
2.0, the values of the source image will be squared. If there is a power of 0.5, the
square root can be found.
Exponent
In this operation, the exponential function of each pixel of the source image will
be calculated.
Logarithm
In this operation, the natural logarithm of a pixel will be calculated. For pixels of
zero the resulting value will be set to zero. The calculation of the exponent and of
the logarithm are inverse operations to each other. The logarithm of values which
are smaller than or equal to zero will be set to zero.
Sine
The sine value of every pixel in the source image is copied to the target image.
Cosine
The cosine value of every pixel in the source image is copied to the target image.
Tangent
The tangent value of every pixel in the source image is copied to the target image.
Binarisation
In this operation, the pixels of the source image will be compared to a predefined
threshold. All values greater than or equal to the threshold will be set to one in
the destination image. All values below the threshold will be set to zero.
217
Mirror
In this operation, the source image will be mirrored either at the vertical or the
horizontal center line of the image. The direction of mirroring is defined by the
second source parameter. If it is zero, it will be mirrored at the vertical center line
of the image in horizontal direction. If the parameter is one, it will be mirrored in
vertical direction at the horizontal center line.
Rotate
In this operation, the whole image will be rotated. The angle of rotation is defined
by the second source parameter. The image content is rotated in a mathematically
positive direction. The center point of the image served as the rotation center.
Move hoizontally
The image content is moved horizontally by the given number of pixels.
Move vertically
The image content is moved vertically by the given number of pixels.
Scaling
In this operation, an image can be enlarged or reduced. The amount of the enlar-
gement or reduction is determined by the second source parameter which has to be
a rational number greater than zero. Values smaller than one result in a reduction,
values greater than one lead to an enlargement.
Box filter
In this operation, images can be filtered by means of a box filter. A pixel in the
destination image is calculated from the mean value calculation of the pixels in
the source image in the near neighborhood. This algorithm reduces the noise in
the image, it makes, however, the edges of the objects in the image blurred. The
second source parameter is the size of the filter to be used. This size should be an
odd integer number.
Circular box
In this operation, images can be filtered by means of a circular box. This operation
is like the box filter above, but the used filter is not rectangular but circular.
Median filter
In this operation, images can be filtered by means of a median filter. A pixel in the
destination image gets the median value of the sorted pixel list in the neighborhood
of the pixel. A median filter reduces the noise in the image and does not make the
edges of an object in the image blurred. The calculation of median values, however,
is slower than the use of a box filter.
The second source parameter is the size of the image range where the list of pixels
is set up. This size should be an odd integer number.
Mask filter
There is the possibility to filter an image with an user defined filter. The first
source parameter is the name of the source image. The second source parameter
is the name of a text file (*.filter), which contains the filter coefficients.
An example of such a file:
218
5 5 10
-1 0 2 0 1
-1 0 2 0 1
-1 0 2 0 1
-1 0 2 0 1
-1 0 2 0 1
The first row contains the height and width of the filter (in the example both are
5) and the divisor of every filter coefficient. The following rows contain the filter
coefficients themself.
In comparison with other image processing operations the mask filter needs a lot
of time.
Erosion
In this operation, a pixel in the destination image gets the smallest value of the
sorted pixel list in the neigborhood of the pixel.
Dilatation
In this operation, a pixel in the destination image gets the greatest value of the
sorted pixel list in the neigborhood of the pixel.
14.10.3. Register card Message box“

”
On this side, the display of a message box can be parameterized. These display windows
can be used when recording a macro in order to later stop the macro at this position or to
cancel it. The break forced in this way in executing the macro can be used, for example,
to modify some measuring object settings and then generating some other captures of
the scene.
219
If the radio button Messagebox“ is selected, the parameter input on the right-hand
”
side of the dialog will be disabled since all input for the message box desired is done on
the left-hand side of the dialog. There, the headline of the window and the text to be
displayed can be entered. Furthermore, the type of the message box and the buttons to
be shown can be selected. If the two buttons (Ok-Cancel or Yes-No) are used, pressing
the first button (Ok or Yes) results in a continuous execution of the macro, pressing
the second button (Cancel or No) leads to a termination of the macro. With the option
modeless“ the user could decide, whether the message box works in modal or modeless
”
mode.
In the image below, the results of the input into the example above are shown when the
message box is tested by means of the button Execute“.
”
14.11. Recording recurrent operations
In the previous chapter, we mentioned that it is possible to record user-defined data

in a macro, to save this macro as a file and to make it available for the program as a
user-defined menu item. The user-defined data to be recorded is as follows:
• Creating, modifying and deleting an evaluation image by means of the menu items
Image | New“, Image | Properties“ and Image | Delete“.
” ” ”
• Capturing luminance and color images via the menu items Capture | Single-
”
Pic“, Capture | MultiPic“, Capture | HighDyn“, Capture | Color
” ” ”
HighDyn simple“, Capture | Color MultiPic“ and Capture | Color
” ”
HighDyn“.
• Switch on or off darkening during captures, see section 6.2.3 on page 61.
• Loading user-defined calibration data records before capturing, see section 5.3 on
page 44pp.
• Capturing of many images in a measurement series via menu points in popup
menu Capture | Measurement series“. Manual, time-controlled, mechanics-
”
controlled and file-controlled measurement series can be recorded in a macro. The
possibilities of measurement series are described in chapter 7 beginning on page 78.
• Working with motor control via menu points in popup menu Motors“: Initiali-
”
zation, setting of speeds and moving to positions. See section 18.1 on page 262.
• All image processing operations initiated in the dialog Image processing“. This
”
dialog is opened via the menu command Evaluation | Image processing“. It
”
has been described in detail in the chapters above.
220
14.11. Recording recurrent operations
• Evaluating color images by means of the menu items Evaluation | Decompose

”
into color extracts“, Evaluation | Compose from color extracts“,
”
Evaluation | Color difference between images“ and Evaluation | Co-
” ”
lor difference to a color“. These options of color image processing will be
documented in the chapter below.
• Exporting data to MS Word and MS Excel. To accomplish that, opening and clo-
sing Word or Excel documents and transferring images, tables, graphics and dia-
grams to these two programs are recorded if these operations are carried out in the
dialogs Export to MS Word“ or Export to MS Excel“. See section 16.3
” ”
on page 236 and section 16.4 on page 240.
• Calculation of a luminous intensity distribution (see section 14.12 on page 223)
and export of such a distribution (see section 14.13 on page 224).
• Retrieving a macro already existing by the menu item concerned of the menu
Macro“.
”
• Generating manual series of images, see section 7.1.1 on page 79. Use of menu
point Capture | Measurement series | Manual“ and start of captures there
”
is recorded.
• Generating time-controlled series of images, see section 7.1.2 on page 82. Use of
menu point Capture | Measurement series | Time-controlled“ and start
”
of captures there is recorded.
• Generating mechanics-controlled series of images, see section 7.1.3 on page 83. Use
of menu point Capture | Measurement series | Mechanics-controlled“
”
and start of captures there is recorded.
• Generating file-controlled series of images, see section 7.1.4 on page 84. Use of
menu point Capture | Measurement series | File-controlled“ and start
”
of captures there is recorded.
• Use of Motor control dialog“ can be recorded. For usage of this dialog see
”
• Use of Image set-up dialog“ can be recorded. For usage of this dialog see
”
• Use of Isoline and isocolors dialog“ can be recorded. For usage of this dialog
”
• Use of Searching for regions dialog“ can be recorded. For usage of this
”
dialog see section 14.6 on page 201.
• Recording of menu points Protokoll | New“, Protocol | Load“, Pro-
” ” ”
tocol | Save as“, Protocol | Update“, Image | Load“, Image | Save
” ” ”
as“, Regions | Load“, Regions | Save as“, Coordinate system | Load“,
” ” ”
Coordinate system | Save as“ und setting the used color space in a color
”
image via menu point Image | color space“ is also possible.
”
The dialog for the recording and processing of user-defined macros can be opened by:
• the button Macro recorder“ in the dialog Image processing“.

” ”
221
• the menu item Macros | Macro recorder“ in the main menu of the program.
”
There, the user-recorded macros are also displayed as a menu item.
The figure on the left shows the menu Macros“ with the item Macro recorder“
” ”
and also some user-defined menu items. The dialog Macro recorder“ is shown in
”
the figure on the right.
The recording of a macro is started by setting the option Record“ in the dialog. After
”
that, the dialog can be closed while recording, and it can be opened again when the
finished macro is to be saved as a file and as a new menu item. In the figure below, the
dialog state during a recording is shown.
The commands in the text field are commands in the script language TCL“. For more
”
details on this used script language in the macros see section 17.2 on page 260.
For the recording of macros a detailed knowledge of the script language is not required!
222
14.12. Calculation of a luminous intensity distribution
The recording of a macro is finished by turning off the option Record“. Then, the
”
name of the new menu item has to be defined in the input box Menu item“. In the
”
example, My test“ has been entered. Additionally a shortcut can be defined. In the
”
example Alt+3“ is used.
”
The macro is saved as a file by the button Save“. After that, the dialog Macro
” ”
recorder“ can be closed and the macro is available in the program as a new menu
item:
14.12. Calculation of a luminous intensity distribution
In order to be able to calculate a luminous intensity distribution by means of a luminance

measuring camera, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
• A fixed test set-up must be available:

– The object to be measured illuminates a projection wall.
– The camera is firmly installed and captures an image of the projection wall.
223
• This measuring set-up has been installed and calibrated by the TechnoTeam“
”
company.
After adjusting and calibrating, the menu item Evaluation | LID calculation“
”
is available. Using this item, the dialogue Calculation of luminous intensity
”
distribution“ is opened.
In the selection list Calibration record“, a record can be chosen. It is possible, for
”
example, to calculate from the luminance image a luminous intensity distribution just
as an illuminance distribution or, if a color camera is available, to determine similar
distributions also for color images.
In the two following boxes of the dialog Source image“ and Target image“, the
” ”
used images for the procedure are displayed. They are firmly determined and cannot be
modified. Any target images which are not available will be set up automatically.
Upon pressing the button Execute“, the calculations are started. When they are
”
over, the display of the coordinate system of the luminous intensity distribution can be
switched on using the menu item View | Coordinate system“.
”
14.13. Exporting a luminous intensity distribution
In the preceding paragraph, the procedure of calculating a luminous intensity distributi-

on was described. By means of the dialog Export luminous intensity distributi-
”
on“, this image can be converted into a format which can be processed also with other
programs. This dialog is opened using the menu item Evaluation | LID-Export“.
”
The following file formats are supported:
224
14.13. Exporting a luminous intensity distribution
• Eulumdat (file extension *.ldt)

• IES (file extension *.ies)
In the selection box Image“, the image to be exported can be chosen. In the paragraph
”
General information“, any items can be edited which will then be adopted by the
”
file headers of the formats supported as supplementary information.
In the paragraph Range of angles“, the user can select that range of angles from
”
which the luminous intensity distribution data shall be exported. Here, the information
is extracted from that coordinate system which is assigned to the image. In order to
facilitate entries, the two buttons From image“ and From rectangle marked“
” ”
are available. Upon pressing one of the buttons, the corresponding angle values are
transferred to the input fields Min. Theta“ ... Delta Phi“.
” ”
In the paragraph Change coordinates“, the user can choose and change the coor-
”
dinates for a type A or type C goniometer.
225
Using the button Save parameters“, the entries made in this dialog can be saved
”
for later uses. However, neither the user name nor the date nor the time will be saved.
Using the button Load parameters“, entries made previously can be restored.
”
Upon pressing the button Save LID“, the desired LID-file is displayed. In the file
”
selection dialog, the format in which export shall be carried out is determined by the
file extension.
The data exported can be further processed in all programs in which the readout function
of the file formats supported is provided.
226
15. Evaluating color images
In the previous chapters some options of color evaluations have already been presented:
• In the status line of a color image the chromaticity values at the cursor position are
displayed. The used color space can be selected via the menu command Image |
”
Color space“.
• Using a Line cursor“ a sectional view representation of the color behavior in the
”
neigborhood of the cursor position can be displayed. Plane cusors such as Rec-
”
tangle cursor“ and Circle cursor“ show a histogram of the chromaticity
”
values in the neighborhood of the cursor. See chapter 12 beginning on page 130 for
a more detailed description.
• While cursors offer an instable result representation, the sectional views presented
in chapter 13 beginning on page 135 (section 13.1.2 on page 138) and histograms
(section 13.1.3 on page 139) allow a result output connected to fixed evaluation
regions in the image.
• Other statistic evaluation options which can be used for monochrome and color
images are Standard statistics“ (section 13.1.1 on page 136) and Projecti-
” ”
ons“ (section 13.1.4 on page 142).
• Especially for color images it is possible to calculate Chromaticity diagrams“,
”
see section 13.1.11 on page 153.
• By means of Color symbol object“ (section 13.1.8 on page 149) the algorithm
”
of the Symbol object“ developed for monochrome images can be used for color
”
images as well.
• The algorithms for the projective rectification introduced in chapter 14 beginning
on page 194 (section 14.7 on page 205) and for the coordinate transformation
(section 14.8 on page 208) can also be used in color images.
• Arithmetic calculations with color images can be carried out by means of evaluation
images and the dialog Image processing“ (section 14.10 on page 212).
”
Additional methods of evaluating color images will be presented in the chapter below:
• The dialogs for the decomposition of color images or for the later possible compo-
sition of the processed color extracts allow those color extracts to be processed as
monochome images. (Being processed in such a way, they can be combined into a
color image again.) The options of image arithmetic described in section 14.10 on
page 212 are of some interest here.
• Two specialized dialogs allow color differences to be calculated, see section 15.3 on
page 229:
- between two images,
227
- to a reference color.
The color spaces and color differences implemented in the program will be documented
in detail in chapter B beginning on page 309.
15.1. Decomposing into color extracts
Using the menu command Evaluation | Decompose into color extracts“ a dia-
”
log will be opened where a color image can be decomposed into one to three monochrome
images at maximum. Therefore, each monochrome destination image contains one color
component each after the decomposition.
A possible application is the extraction of the luminance and a comparison to the desired
standard values in the partial monochrome image for the luminance.
In the section Color space“ three possible color components are selected which can be
”
created by a decomposition. In the selection box Src image“ one of the color images
”
existing in the program can be selected. In the three lines below, the possible color
component will be displayed on the left, on the right-hand side monochrome destination
images can be assigned to these color components. If one component is not needed, the
item No image“ can be selected.
”
As the destination images can possibly have a different size compared to the source image
a modification can be caused via the option Adapt size of destination images“.
”
The decomposition is started by the button Execute“. The dialog can be left via
”
Close“.
”
228
15.2. Merging color extracts
15.2. Merging color extracts
Using the menu item Evaluation | Compose from color extracts“ a color image
”
can be merged from three monochrome images, with each of them supplying a color com-
ponent. A color image cannot be composed of each color space which is implemented in
the program for decomposing into color extracts because some color space transforma-
tions are not reversible.
A possible application of this method is the creation of synthetic color patterns from
monochrome images or the composition of a color image which had been decomposed
before after some image processing algorithms have separately been performed with some
color components.
In the section Color space“ the color space can be selected where the three mono-
”
chrome source images are to be composed to a color image. On the left-hand side of the
three lines below, the color components needed are displayed. On the right-hand side
the three source images have to be defined in the selection boxes. The name of a color
image existing in the program is required in the line Dst image“.
”
The three source images have to be of the same size, the size of the destination image
can be corrected by means of the option Adapt size of destination image“. Having
”
pressed the button Execute“ the merging process will be started. The dialog can be
”
left via Close“.
”
15.3. Calculating the color difference
There are two possible applications for the calculation of color differences. In the first
case, the colors of two images can be compared to each other point-by-point. A possible
application is the capture of the same object at two different times. The second app-
lication is the evaluation of an image with respect to a reference color. This option is
available via the menu item Evaluation | Color difference to a color“.
”
229
15.3.1. Color difference between two images
To open the dialog Color difference between two images“ the menu item Eva-
” ”
luation | Color difference between images“ can be used.
Color difference in a color space without reference color
Color difference in a color space with reference color
On the right-hand side of the dialog, the two color images the color difference has to
be calculated for are to be determined in the selection boxes Source image1“ and
”
Source image2“. In Destination image“ a monochrome image has to be defined
” ”
which is expected to include the result of the operation.
In the selection box on the top left of the dialog the desired difference measure is to
be selected. (For the implemented difference measures see section B.2 on page 315).
Depending on the difference measure selected the appearance of the dialog changes:
230
15.3. Calculating the color difference
• If the difference measure is calculated in a color space without a reference color,

no other parameters will be needed (see upper figure).
• If a difference measure of two images in a color space with a reference color is to
be calculated, the reference colors of both images will be shown in the dialog (see
lower figure). The buttons in the section Reference color“ will facilitate the
”
input and the adjustment of the reference colors of both images:
– Using the button From standard light“ a dialog wii be opened where a
”
fixed standard illuminant can be selected as the reference color.
– The button From marked rectangle“ is active if a rectangular measuring
”
region is marked in the image concerned. Having pressed the button the mean
value of this region will be taken over as the new reference color.
– The buttons Copy to the right“ and Copy to the left“, respectively
” ”
can be used to take over the reference color of one image to the other one.
In the input box Minimum luminance“ a threshold value can be defined, under which
”
no difference is to be calculated. (In case of very low brightness the accuracy of the color
coordinate determination is worse than in well-illuminated image parts.)
If a value greater than 1 is selected in the input box Smoothing“, the source images
”
will be filtered by a smoothing filter of a corresponding size before the difference is
formed. Thus, the influence of noise can be reduced in both images.
Using the button Save file“ the data of the dialog can be filed in order to allow them
”
to be used later via the button Load file“.
”
The calculation is started via the button Execute“. Working on the dialog is finished
”
via the button Close“.
”
15.3.2. Color difference to a color
The menu item Evaluation | Color difference to a color“ can be used to open
”
the dialog Color difference to a color“.
”
This dialog is quite similar to the dialog which has just been documented. Instead of
a second image, a reference color which is to be compared with all pixels in the source
image has to be entered. Therefore, there is an input option for the reference color on the
right-hand side of the dialog, whereas on the left-hand side, as in the application above,
the reference color of the colored source image can be entered for some color differences.
All the other input elements and buttons show the same behavior in both dialogs.
231
Color difference in a color space without a reference color
Color difference in a color space with a reference color
232
15.4. Color look-up table transformation
15.4. Color look-up table transformation
By means of a color look-up table transformation color values of a source image can be
converted into corrected color values. Such a correction is needed for example in the case
of a CFA camera capturing narrowband light sources (LED or so). The transformation
needs three previously calculated images with correction data.
These correction images can be made by request from TechnoTeam“ for accurately
”
defined capturing situations and ligth sources.
The dialog Color look-up table transformation“ can be opened by means of the
”
menu item Evaluation | Color look-up table transformation“. In this dialog
”
the three index images are to be loaded, the correction can be executed and be saved
for a later reusage.
In this dialog the source image and the destination image of the transformation can be
selected first. Both images should be color images. After that, the three index images are
to be loaded. The names of the index images will be displayed and then the image size will
be checked. These checks having been successful, the color look-up table transformation
can be started by means of the button Execute“.
”
A data record with transformation parameters can be saved for later use in a file by
means of the button Save parameters“. Later, this data record can be retrieved via
”
the button Load parameters“. It is also necessary to save the data record if the color
”
look-up table transformation in a self-created macro is to be used as an independent
menu item. See also page 215ff.
233
16. Printing and exporting
In each of the four result views of the program there are options available to directly
output the measuring data to a printer or to copy them into the clipboard.
16.1. Immediately printing images, tables, graphics and

diagrams
Images
Using the menu item Image | Print“ the current image is immediately output to the
”
printer. The image printed is equal to the current view in the program:
• Visible image section

• Color palette
• Measuring regions
• Coordinate system
Tables
A table is output to the printer either by the main menu item Table | Print“ or via
”
the context menu item Print“. (The context menu will be opened if the mouse pointer
”
is in the table, with the right-hand mouse button being pressed.)
Tables are output to the printer in their current state. If any lines of the table are marked
(recognizable by their yellow color), they will also be output in the corresponding color.
Tables which are too large for a standard output will either be made up or printed in
oblong format.
Graphics
The menu items Graphic | Print“ and Graphic | Print all graphics“ are availa-
” ”
ble for the printing operation. The operations can also be initiated in the context menu
of the graphic by the menu items Print“ and Print all graphics“, respectively.
” ”
If Print“ is used, only the currently visible graphic will be printed. Via Print all
” ”
graphics“ several graphics will be printed one below the other if the views of the current
statistic are distributed to several tab sheets.
234
16.2. Copying via clipboard
The graphics are output in the same form as currently represented on the screen. The-
refore, it could make sense to optimize the representation as desired by, for example,
modifying the program or window size.
Diagrams
The current diagram is output to the printer via the menu item Diagram | Print“.
”
And again, the diagram will be printed in the same form as represented on the screen.
16.2. Copying via clipboard
The four result views (images, tables, graphics and diagrams) can be copied into the
clipboard of Windows and pasted into other programs from there.
Images
If the menu item Image | Copy“ is selected in the main menu, the image can be copied
”
into the clipboard in the formats listed below:
• Bitmap: The bitmap of the current image copied into the clipboard is identical
to the image representation in the program. For details of the representation see
the notes in the previous section.
To copy the image as bitmap into the clipboard the option Image | Options
”
while copying | Bitmap“ has to be turned on. This is the default setting.
• Binary format: The image is copied into the clipboard in a TechnoTeam-specific
data format and can be pasted in this format into other images or image sections:
– Pasting into another image is accomplished by switching the display to a

different image and selecting there the menu item Image | Paste“.
”
– Pasting into another image section is accomplished by marking a rectangular
measuring region in the image and selecting the menu item Paste image
”
content“ in the context menu. See section 10.5 on page 122 for a more
detailed description.
• Text format: The image is copied into the clipboard in a format that can be read
by a word processing program. This option is turned off in the default settings. It
can be activated via the menu item Image | Options while copying | Text“.
”
A description of the used text format can be found in section A.1 on page 298.
The complete image can be copied into the clipboard as bitmap, in binary and text
formats, and so can the content of a marked rectangle. The corresponding menu items
( Copy“ and Options while copying“) are in this case in the context menu of the
” ”
image. See section 10.5 on page 122.
235
Tables
• As Text: The lines of the table are separated from each other by Newline characters
whereas the columns are separated by tabulators.
• As Bitmap.
In both cases, the copy in the clipboard only contains the columns which are currently
displayed in the program. (The visibility of the columns can be modified by the menu
item Table | Visibility of columns“ or by the context menu item Visibility of
” ”
columns“.
Graphics
Using the menu item ”Graphic | Copy“ or the context menu item Copy“ the current
” ”
graphic will be copied into the clipboard as bitmap. The appearance of the graphic is
equal to its representation on the screen. Therefore, it makes sense to optimize the
representation as desired by, for example, modifying the program or window size.
Diagrams
The current diagram will be transferred to the clipboard via the menu item Diagram
”
| Copy“. And again, the copy is the same as visible on the screen.
16.3. Export to Microsoft Word
In the two sections above options have been described to individually print results or
to copy them via the clipboard. For the data export to Microsoft Word and (see next
section) to Microsoft Excel two specialized dialogs are available providing some more
options of creating a report with measuring data.
236
The dialog for the output of measuring values to Microsoft Word“ is opened by
”
means of the menu item Protocol | Export to MS-Word“.
”
In the upper part of the dialog the different types of results are displayed on four different
pages. In the figure, the table Images“ contains a list with the four images currently
”
existing in the program. In the columns of the table there are:
• Image: The corresponding image is shown under this name in the program. The
same is true on the other pages where the first columns are labeled with Table“,
”
Graphic“ or Diagram“.
” ”
• Marker: In the Word document opened later the position of the image can be
fixed by a text marker. A more detailed description of the work with text markers
can be found at the end of this chapter.
Having pressed the button Open document“ a new or an existing Word document
”
can be selected via a file selection dialog where the measuring results are to be copied to.
Later, the work with the document has to be finished by the button Close document“.
”
The command to Microsoft Word to actually save the document is only given when the
document is closed. Using the option Word visible“ the program can be prompted
”
to display the Word document just processed otherwise all operations would take place
in secrecy.
If a Word document is opened, one or more objects can be copied into this document.
To accomplish that the objects to be copied have to be marked in the tables. Using the
button Select all“ it will be possible to mark all objects on all four pages of the
”
table. Having pressed the button Deselect all“ the marking state of all objects will
”
be reset. Using the button All to Word“ all objects just marked on all four pages
”
will be copied to Word.
The buttons and the input boxes in the upper part of the dialog directly below the table
only relate to the marked objects in the table displayed.
237
In the figure on the left, a modified name has been entered into the input box Marker“.
”
Before the corresponding image can be transferred to the indicated text marker, the
modification is either to be accepted by the button Accept“ or rejected by the button
”
Reject“. Only then, copying will be possible via the button Copy to Word“.
” ”
If there is a text marker with the same name, the content of this marker will be replaced
by the new content. If there is no text marker, such a marker will be created at the end
of the document, with the image being written at this position. Thus, it will be possible:
• To replace the content of a prepared document with existing text markers by new
data or
• to successively take over new data into the document by means of new text marker
names.
And here is an example: First, the table of the standard statistic is copied to a Word
document which has already been opened.
When checking the result we will find out that the information on the used parameter
set and on the size of the measuring region is of no importance. Therefore, the visibility
of these columns will be switched off by means of the menu item Table | Visibility
”
of columns“. Copying the table again will lead to the result below:
After capturing a new luminance image a new table with modified statistic results is to
be written into the file. The old table is to remain unchanged. Therefore, the name of
the text marker will be changed before the copy operation:
238
Having copied a second time there will be two tables in the Word file since the new table
has been saved under a new text marker:
By means of the button Save parameters“ the state of the dialog can be filed in a
”
parameter file and reconstructed later via the button Load parameters“. Hence, it is
”
possible to create user-defined reports. The operational procedure required is as follows:
1. Opening a new blank Word document.

2. Copying the data needed to this document.
3. Editing this document, e.g. by adding company-specific information and help texts.
4. Saving and closing the document as a pattern and the parameter file for the data
export.
Later, this document can be opened again. The parameter file having loaded, the pre-
pared document can be supplied with updated data by a new data export.
The data entered into the dialog can be recorded in a macro and used as an independent
menu item, see section 14.11 on page 220. The recorded data is:
• Opening the Word document.

• Copying some objects (images, tables, graphics and diagrams).
• Closing and saving the Word document.
239
16.4. Export to Microsoft Excel
Selecting the menu item Protocol | Export to MS-Excel“ a dialog will be opened
”
which allows masuring values to be output to Microsoft Excel.
As the appearance and the operation of this dialog are similar to a large extent to the
dialog for the export to MicrosoftWord, only the differences between the two dialogs will
be described below.
In contrast to Microsoft Word, the destination of copying will not be defined by a text
marker but by a table sheet and a cell on this sheet (range) defining the position of the
upper-left corner of the object to be copied. Furthermore, it can be defined whether the
sheet concerned is to be cleared before copying or not. A general clearing of the sheets
concerned can possibly not make sense if there are already some inscriptions, numbers
or calculations on the sheet.
• Image: the name of the image to be copied. On the three other sheets Tables“,
”
Graphics“ and Diagrams“ the names of these objects concerned can be found.
” ”
• Sheet: The name of the table sheet where an object is to be copied to.
• Clear: A flag showing whether the table sheet concerned is to be cleared before
copying or not.
• Range: Upper-left of the copy range.
If a line of the table has been marked, the input boxes Sheet“ and Range“ and the
” ”
option field Clear sheet before“ show the state of the corresponding line of the
”
table. If modifications are performed in the input fields, it can be decided afterwards
whether the modifications are to be taken over into the table or not by pressing the
buttons Accept“ or Reject“.
” ”
All the other dialog options are completely equal to those for the export to Microsoft
Word:
240
16.5. Print reports
• Opening a new or an existing file.

• Copying some or all objects to the Excel file.
• Saving and closing the processed file.
• Creating, saving, loading and using parameter files.
• Working with prepared template files.
• Recording user inputs in order to use them as independent menu items.
16.5. Print reports
Using the menu item Protocol | Print report...“ the dialog Print report“ can
” ”
be opened. In this dialog, all images, tables and graphics can be combined to a common
print report.
In the upper part of the dialog, a title appearing on the first page of the print report
can be entered. In addition to this, a logo which can be selected in a file selection dialog
by pressing the button Logo“ can be shown to the right of this title. If neither the
”
title nor the logo shall be displayed, this can be set by means of the two option switches
arranged underneath.
In the middle part of the dialog, all printable elements are represented in a table. These
elements include the commentary on the measurement, all images, tables, graphics and
diagrams. If one or several lines are selected there, they can be moved within the list by
means of the buttons Upwards“ and Downwards“, which means that they will be
” ”
printed earlier or later in the report. Furthermore, these elements can be excluded from
the print by switching off the button Print“, or a pagebreak can be provided before
”
the element concerned by switching on the button Page feed“.
”
241
If only one single line is selected in the list, the title of the paragraph appearing before
the image, the table or the graphic can be changed in the box Caption“.
”
By means of the switches Save parameters“ or also Load parameters“, the chan-
” ”
ges made can be saved in a file so that they can be used again at a later time.
By pressing the button Print“, a printer selection dialog is opened. After having
”
selected a printer, the report is printed by the device chosen.
Before printing, however, the user may get an impression of the printout by pressing the
button Preview“.
”
In this additional dialog, it is possible to scroll through the formatted document and
to look at it in various magnifications. In addition, it is possible to activate the print
process directly from the preview mode. The preview dialog contains a number of menu
buttons for these options.
242
17. External Program Control
17.1. ActiveX-server interface
17.1.1. Introduction
The programming interface of the LMK LabSoft provides an ActiveX server, which
allows important functions of the program from other applications having an ActiveX
interface (e.g. MS Excel and NI Lab-View) to be controlled. In general, the measurement
preparations should always be made interactively with the LMK LabSoft interface. The
programming interface will then allow the prepared settings and evaluations which are
saved, for example, in a protocol, to be utilized. Thus, the functions of the programming
interface are designed for the utilization of already existing structures rather than for
setting up images, regions or evaluations. The ActiveX server is automatically registered
during the installation of the LMK LabSoft software.
The description of the functions can be found in the subdirectory doc/Lmkaxserver“ of
”
your installation in HTML format.
The information concerning the type of the interface is found in the file lmk4.tlb“. If
”
necessary, this file is utilized by your software in order to determine the description of
the interface.
243
The programming interface provides numerous functions which permit the LMK LabSoft
to be included in other programs. Thus, the users can define processes for their appli-
cations in a very purposeful way, with these processes including the spatially resolved
measurement of luminances and color coordinates. If, for certain cases of application, the
functions provided are not sufficient, it will be a pleasure for us to adapt the interface
accordingly.
The functions can be classified as follows:
• Using the application

– Opening and closing
– Controlling the application
∗ Calling up menu items
∗ Executing TCL commands
– Loading and saving protocols
• Features of the camera
– Starting the camera and loading the calibration data
– Setting and querying the integration time
– Accessing the filter wheel of the color camera
• Capturing luminance and color images
– Controlling the capturing algorithms
– Querying the features of the capture
• Read and write data
– Images
– Lists of regions
– Coordinate systems
– Statistical parameter and results
• Using image processing functions
244
17.1.2. Preparation of MS Excel
After its registration during the installation of the LMK LabSoft, the interface is also
available in MS Excel. In the case of problems arising when using the interface or when
installing updates, the user should click on Extras / References“ in the VBA interface of
”
MS Excel and activate the interface (or also disable it first and activate it again). In the
figure, the interface is represented through the description lmk4X.XX Type Library“,
”
with X.XX“ standing for the respective version of the interface. Clicking on Browse“,
” ”
the file lmk4.tlb“ can be given as the description of the interface.
”
When the examples are loaded, the execution of macros must be activated.
245
17.1.3. Example 1: Test frame in MS Excel
The file LMK4AxServerTest.xls“ provides a test frame for all available functions. This
”
file is found in the subdirectory Examples“ of your installation. Each function can
”
individually be called up by means of a button. To each of the buttons a VBA function
is assigned which is called up when pressing it. The parameters just as the return values
will be read from the corresponding cells of the XLS files or also entered there.
246
17.1.4. Example 2: Linearity measurement in MS Excel
For this example, the file LMK4AxServerLinRun.XLS“, which is found in the subdirec-
”
tory Examples“ of your installation, is used. The linearity measurement is an application
”
originating from the field of the characterization of photometers or image resolved lu-
minance measuring devices. Here, in the simplest case, a constant light source (e.g. a
luminance standard) is captured by the camera. For doing this, the luminance is set in
such a way that a total of 90% of the full drive range is achieved for a given exposure
time.
Then, the linearity measurement is initiated, and the algorithm will reduce the exposure
time by a given factor until modulation is less than 1% of the full drive range. After each
modification of the exposure time, an image is captured, and the measurement value
of a pre-defined region is added to the evaluation table. When the measurements are
complete, the data will automatically be represented in the form of a diagram, and the
parameter value can be calculated.
Steps:
1. Interactive setting of the LMK LabSoft
• Opening the LMK LabSoft

• Starting with the camera to be used
• Setting the image
• Fixing a region within the luminance standard
• Setting up a set of standard statistics for this region
• Setting up a LinRun.ttcs“ protocol
”
247
2. Entering the application-specific data in the XLS-file (table LMK Setup)
• Place of the LMK installation

• Name and place of installation of the used camera including lens
• Name and place of the protocol to be used ( LinRun.ttcs“)
”
In the red area of the table, entries are made which are then used in the functions for
opening and closing the LMK. For this purpose, the red area is labeled with names of
variables (LMKDrive, LMKPath, LMKCameraPath, LMKProtocol).
All operations effected with the LMK LabSoft programming interface can be found in
the LMK4 module. Here, VBA functions are provided which are necessary for making
the measurements, such as:
• Function lOpenLMK()“: opening the LMK LabSoft

”
• Function lCloseLMK()“: closing the software
”
• Sub LMKIni()“: opening and loading the camera data
”
• Function dCheckAutoScan() As Double“: fixing the integration time; corresponds
”
to menu item Capture | Auto Scan“
”
• Sub MeasureTime(ByRef dIntegrationTimeSet As Double, ByRef dValue As Dou-
”
ble)“: making a measurement at fixed integration time and determining the mean
luminance of the region fixed
All functions are explained in greater detail in the module.
248
3. Making the measurement

After opening the LMK (button LMKOpen“ in the Workbook LMKSetup“), the func-
” ”
tion CheckAuto“ can be called up in the table LinTest“. This function permits the
” ”
user to fix the maximum exposure time at which no overdriving occurs, and to enter it
at TI Start“.
”
Now, the measurement can be made using LinRun“. Starting from TI Start“, the
” ”
integration time is shortened always by the Factor“, and the constant luminance is
”
measured. The diagram shows the deviation from the first measured value. The maximum
of the deviations is called parameter f3“.
”
17.1.5. Example 3: Glare evaluation according to the UGR method
For this example application, the Excel file LMK4AxServerUGR.xls“ is used. You can
”
find it in the subdirectory Examples“ in your Lmk LabSoft installation. With this
”
example of the glare evaluation of interiors according to the UGR method, some functions
for manipulating image data and reading out statistical measuring data of the ActiveX-
server interface are presented.
For the evaluation of glare situations according to the UGR method, a number of various
steps are necessary to obtain the measuring data for the UGR calculation formula. This
formula reads:
249
It requires the measurement and determination of photometric and appertaining geome-

trical quantities:
• mean luminance in the surrounds

• mean luminance of the glare sources
• solid angle at which the glare sources are seen
• position index according to Guth (results from the elevation angle according to
table)
Procedure:
1. Starting the Excel worksheet LMK4AxServerUGR.xls“
”
2. Calling and starting the LMK LabSoft from this Excel sheet
To do so, the button Start LMK LabSoft“ in the worksheet must be pressed. The
”
appertaining Visual Basic Source Text:
P u b l i c Sub OpenLMK( )
S e t LMK = New LMKAxServer
rc = 1
r c = LMK. iOpen
I f r c = 0 Then
isLMKOpen = True
Else
isLMKOpen = F a l s e
End I f
250
3. Loading the protocol

The subdirectory Examples“ of the Lmk-installation contains the two example proto-
”
cols UGR 3.5mm 350D Example.ttcs“ and ÜGR 4.5mm 450D Example.ttcs“. Before
” ”
loading a protocol, the path name must be adapted in the Excel sheet accordingly.
sLMKProtocol=Worksheets ( ”LMKTest ” ) . Range ( ” LMKProtocol ” ) . Value
r c = LMK. i L o a d P r o t o k o l l ( sLMKProtocol )
I f r c <> 0 Then
GetErrorInformation
End I f
After pressing the button Load UGR protocol“, the following Visual Basic Source Text
”
is executed:
In the two example protocol files, some calculations are already prepared in the images
and the statistical evaluations. Thus, it is possible to refer to the image, statistics and
region numbers used there using the following function calls.
4. Loading or capturing the images to be evaluated
The two example protocols are prepared for the use of the cameras Canon D350 and
Canon D450. If any captured images are to be evaluated using these cameras, then the
example protocol which fits well this camera type must be used. For using an image,
it must be loaded into the luminance image via the menu item Capture | Canon
”
files“.
5. Copying the data of the gray value histogram statistic of the luminance
image into the Excel worksheet Threshold determination“
”
For this, the button Evaluate histogram“ in the worksheet must be pressed, which
”
entails the execution of the following Visual Basic Source Text:
iObject = 0
r c=LMK. iGetGreyHistogramValues ( i O b j e c t , i r S i z e , srlX , s r l V a l u e s )
Worksheets ( ”LMKTest ” ) . Range ( ” RC ” ) . Value = r c
I f r c <> 0 Then
GetErrorInformation
End I f
In the Excel worksheet, a threshold is determined from the data of the histogram stati-
stics. This value separates the glare luminances from the surrounding brightness, and is
necessary for making the next steps.
6. Preparing the separation of the luminous glare sources
For preparing the separation of the luminous glare sources from the measuring image
data, so-called masks in the form of images must be generated. For this, the correspon-
ding image processing operations Binarization“ and Negation“ are called using the
” ”
TCL command interpreter, and the result data are saved in two predefined evaluation
images.
A TCL command is called using the following function:
iExecTclCommand (qCommand , iReturn , qValue )
251
For this, however, the TCL class module must explicitly be named before, and also the
error variable must globally be defined:
’ c a l l i n g t h e TCL−c l a s s modul
qCommand = ” s o u r c e ” + Chr ( 3 4 ) + Chr ( 3 6 )
+ ” ModulePath / t t i p . module ” + Chr ( 3 4 )
r c = LMK. iExecTclCommand (qCommand , iReturn , qValue )
Worksheets ( ”LMKTest ” ) . Range ( ” ETC RETURN ” ) . Value = i R e t u r n
Worksheets ( ”LMKTest ” ) . Range ( ” ETC VALUE ” ) . Value = qValue
’ g l o b a l d e f i n i t i o n o f TCL−e r r o r v a r i a b l e
qCommand = ” s e t E r r o r ” + Chr ( 3 4 ) + Chr ( 3 4 )
When pressing the button Binarization“ in the worksheet, the following Visual Basic
”
Source Text is executed:
’ r u n n i n g t h e B i n a r i z a t i o n a c c o r d i n g t h e UGR t h r e s h o l d
qCommand = Worksheets ( ” Schwellwertbestimmung ” )
. Range ( ” UGR Schwelle ” ) . Value
qCommand = ” : : t t I P : : B i n a r i z a t i o n { B i n a r i s i e r u n g H i s t o S c h w . }
{ LUMPIC } {” + qCommand + ”}”
’ r u n n i n g t h e Negation o f t h e B i n a r i z a t i o n
qCommand = ” : : t t I P : : Negation { N e g B i n a r i s i e r u n g H i s t o S c h w . }
{ Binarisierung HistoSchw .}”
I f i R e t u r n = 0 Then
Worksheets ( ”LMKTest ” ) . Range ( ” B i n S t a t ” ) . Value = ”Ok”
Else
Worksheets ( ”LMKTest ” ) . Range ( ” B i n S t a t ” ) . Value=”F e h l e r ”
End I f
7. Separating the luminous glare sources

The actual separation of the luminous glare sources from the measuring image data is
now effected by multiplying the mask images with the measuring image within the LMK
LabSoft program. The result images are saved in specially provided evaluation images.
In the last section of the source text, the surface-related weighting of the background
luminance with the solid angle or also the solid angle projection per pixel is carried out
additionally.
252
By pressing the button Multiplication“ in the worksheet, the following Visual Basic
”
Source Text is executed:
’ s e p a r a t i n g t h e l i g h t s o u r c e s from t h e ambient
qCommand = ” : : t t I P : : MulImgImg { L e u c h t e n s e p . } { LUMPIC }
{ Binarisierung HistoSchw .}”
’ squaring the l i g h t s o u r c e s
qCommand = ” : : t t I P : : MulImgImg { L e u c h t e n 2 s e p . ( temp ) }
{ Leuchten sep .} { Leuchten sep .}”
’UGR w e i g h t i n g o f t h e l i g h t s o u r c e s
qCommand = ” : : t t I P : : MulImgImg {L2 x UGR} { L e u c h t e n 2 s e p . ( temp ) }
{UGR}”
’ s e p a r a t i n g t h e ambient from t h e l i g h t s o u r c e s
qCommand = ” : : t t I P : : MulImgImg { L U mf el d s ep . } { LUMPIC }
{ NegBinarisierung HistoSchw .}”
’ s o l i d a n g l e w e i g h t i n g o f t h e ambient
qCommand = ” : : t t I P : : MulImgImg {L Umfeld RW} { L Um f el d s ep . }
{k RW}”
’ s o l i d a n g l e p r o j e c t i o n w e i g h t i n g o f t h e ambient
qCommand = ” : : t t I P : : MulImgImg {L Umfeld RWp} { L U mf el d s ep . }
{k RWp}”
I f i R e t u r n = 0 Then
Worksheets ( ”LMKTest ” ) . Range ( ” M u l S t a t ” ) . Value = ”Ok”
Else
253
Worksheets ( ”LMKTest ” ) . Range ( ” M u l S t a t ” ) . Value = ” F e h l e r ”

End I f
8. Adopting the measurement values

After having carried out steps 4 to 7, the results are available in the luminance ob-
ject statistic contained in the program. This statistic can now be adopted directly into
the Excel worksheet LMKTest“. Then, the UGR value is calculated from these data
”
according to the UGP method, and displayed in the worksheet.
After pressing the button Import data“, the following Visual Basic Source Text is
”
executed:
r c = LMK. i G e t S t a n d a r d S t a t i s t i c ( i S t a t i s t i c , i O b j e c t , i C l a s s ,
i S i z e , dMin , dMax , dMean , dVar )
I f r c <> 0 Then
GetErrorInformation
End I f
The following figure shows the result of the adoption of the calculated values into the
Excel sheet:
254
17.1.6. Preparation in NI LabView
After its registration, this interface is also available in ”NI LabView”. In a block diagram
of the current project, an instance of the Lmk-ActiveX-interface can be set up. For doing
this, the following menu item must be selected:
The selection of the menu item opens the tool palette. Here, click on the item ActiveX“
”
in the folder ”Connectivity”.
Toolpalette Folder Connectivity“

”
Using the mouse, click on the upper left-hand symbol ( Open ActiveX object“) and
”
move it to the block diagram using the Drag and drop“-function.
”
By clicking on the symbol with the right-hand mouse button, the context menu is opened.
In order to assign a class to the Open ActiveX Object“-node, select the following entry
”
in this menu:
255
This opens a dialog in which the type library can be chosen.
Opened dialog Selection of type library
The type library chosen is then displayed in the dialog. In the Objects“ list, select the
”
entry LMKAxServer(lmk4.LmkAxServer.1)“ and quit the dialog by clicking on OK“.
” ”
The block diagram now displays the new object.
Type library Block diagram with object
256
For accessing the methods and features of ActiveX-Control, the list already used above
must be opened again. Then, a Method node (ActiveX)“ (2nd symbol from the left in
”
the lower row) is moved to the current block diagram by using the Drag and drop“ func-
”
tion. Afterwards, the output ActiveX(reference) of the Open ActiveX object“ symbol
”
is connected with the input Reference“ of the Method node (ActiveX)“ symbol.
” ”
List Block diagram
If further methods of an ActiveX-instance are to be generated, some more method nodes

can be set up. They have to be connected with each other via the Reference“ inputs
”
and outputs. The method of a node is chosen in the method menu where all available
methods are listed. Afterwards, the function arguments are displayed in the form of
connecting nodes.
Method menu Function arguments
257
17.1.7. Example 4: Measurement series in LabView
In diesen Beispielen soll die Verwendung grundlegender Funktionen veranschaulicht wer-

den. Die zugehörigen Virtual Instruments“ (VIs) LabSoft ActiveX ColorHigh-
” ”
DynLV13.vi“ und LabSoft ActiveX SinglePicLV13.vi“ finden Sie im Unterver-
”
zeichnis Examples“ Ihrer Installation. Die VIs wurden für LabVIEW 2013 erstellt,
”
auf Anfrage können die VIs auch für andere LabVIEW-Versionen zur Verfügung gestellt
werden.
In these examples, the use of basic functions has to be illustrated. The related Virtual In-
”
struments“ (VIs) LabSoft ActiveX ColorHigh-DynLV13.vi“ and LabSoft ActiveX SinglePicL
” ”
can be found in the subdirectory Examples“ of your installation. The VIs were created
”
for LabVIEW 2013. On request the VIs can be provided for other LabVIEW versions
too.
Before the first start of the VIs the path to the calibration datas should be adjusted in
the front panel in accordance with your camera.
258
The VIs include the following functionality:
• Opening the LMK LabSoft

• Reading the calibration data
• Creating a region in the luminance or color image (rectangle)
• Performing Autoscan or Color Autoscan
• Capturing an image with the SinglePic or Color Highdyn algorithm
• Reading the previously created statistics in the region
259
17.2. Tcl as script language
17.2.1. Basics
In the program there is a built-in command interpreter based on the open-source-script

language Tcl (Tcl is an abbreviation of Tool command language“). The command
”
interpreter is used in the program in order to allow the recording and playing of macros,
The interpreter allows objects used in the program such as images, regions, coordinate
systems, the camera and most of the used algorithms in user-written scripts to be acces-
sed. In the two sections below, some principles of the script language will be presented,
its use in software will be shown.
If macros are only to be recorded and used later as self-defined menu items by means of
the macro recorder introduced in section 14.11 on page 220, a detailed knowledge of the
script language will not be required.
Please, contact the web links below for more detailed information:
German Web links
Einfach Tcl“: http://wiki.tcl.tk/2548

”
Kommentierte Sprachregeln: http://wiki.tcl.tk/4592
Einführung als PDF: https://www.bg.bib.de/portale/bes/pdf/Einfuehrung Tcl.pdf
Forum zu Tcl/Tk: http://www.self-tcl.de/
Lernsoftware für Tcl/Tk: http://www.tcl-coach.de/
English Web links
Tcl/Tk main page: http://www.tcl.tk/

Wikibooks: Tcl programming: http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Programming:Tcl
Tcl FAQ: http://www.faqs.org/faqs/tcl-faq/
Tcl’ers Wiki & Code examples: http://wiki.tcl.tk/
17.2.2. Using Tcl in LabSoft
Creating independent or editing existing macro files, modules and Tcl scripts requires
a detailed programming knowledge. Before implementing user routines TechnoTeam“
”
should be contacted in order to find a joint optimal solution for the application concerned.
260
17.2. Tcl as script language
Makros
This is a source text example of a macro file:
ı̈ ¿ i f 0 {
[ Macro ]
Menu=D u p l i z i e r e n
}
#Content>
s o u r c e ” $ModulePath / t t i p . module ”
s e t E r r o r ””
namespace e v a l : : t t I P {
CreateImage { E v a l u a t i o n [ 1 ] } { f l o a t } {1000 1400 0 0}
ImageQuantityUnit { E v a l u a t i o n [ 1 ] } {} {}
ImageSkal { E v a l u a t i o n [ 1 ] } {1 1 0 0} { 3 . 0 } {0 0 0 0} {0} {0}
I m a g e S t d P a l e t t e { E v a l u a t i o n [ 1 ] } lmk1
ImageSkal { E v a l u a t i o n [ 1 ] } {1 1 0 0} {3} {0 0 0 0} {0} {0}
CopyImage { E v a l u a t i o n [ 1 ] } { LUMPIC }
CopyRegions { E v a l u a t i o n [ 1 ] } { LUMPIC }
ImageQuantityUnit { E v a l u a t i o n [ 1 ] } {} {}
}
#<Content
File content
Display in the macro recorder
261
18. Extras
18.1. Motor control
The job of the motor control is to provide the computer-controlled movement of a travel-
ling unit or a goniometer. Depending on the mechanical structure, either the camera or
the measuring object can be moved. If the software components necessary for the usage
of those mechanics are available, the user will find the menu point New calibration
”
data“ in the menu Motors“ after starting the program, to take over the initialization
”
data of the mechanics.
After calling this menu point a dialog is opened to chose the directory with the initiali-
zation data of the mechanics. After selecting the directory the files are copied into the
program. Afterwards the menu Motors“ contains one ore more menu points to use a
”
travelling unit or a goniometer.
When selecting a menu item in the menu Motors“, the dialog Motor control“
” ”
will be opened.
If this dialog is opened for the very first time after starting the program, it is necessary
to establish the connection to the mechanism and to initialize it. The easiest way to
262
18.1. Motor control
do this is by pressing the button Init. all“ in the lower section of the dialog. The
”
button Stop all“ can be found there, too. All axes of the mechanism can be stopped
”
immediately by pressing it.
In the upper section of the dialog, an overview of the states of the available axes, which
can be controlled by means of the dialog, is displayed. In the current example, two axes
are available, with the Theta axis“ being moved right now. The other axis is standing
”
still.
In the lower section of the dialog, the parameters of the individual axes are displayed on
the left-hand side in a tab window. On the right-hand side, options for controlling the
axes are offered.
Each axis of the moving unit is characterized by the two limits for possible positions and
speeds, by the default values and the currently set values.
On the right-hand side, the current values for the speed at which a certain position is
approached just as the position itself can be set:
• If several devices are mounted on the travelling unit, e.g. a photometer or a spec-
trometer next to the camera, then the selection box Sensor“ permits the user
”
to select the device which is just being used. This is necessary as the devices are
attached to different places and, therefore, have different coordinate systems. For
example, the minimum and the maximum positions are slightly different for each
device.
263
18. Extras
• If a position has been entered in the box Desired position“, the motor con-
”
trol will execute the command upon pressing the Enter key or the button Set
”
position“.
• When pressing the button Default“, the standard speed of the axis is set, and
”
the axis is then moved to the standard position.
• If the button Reduce“ is kept depressed, the motor control will move the axis
”
towards the Min. position“ at the currently set speed. There, it will stop either
”
when the button is released or when this position has been reached.
• This procedure is completely analogous when the button Increase“ is pressed
”
in order to move the axis to Max. position“.
”
• If a new value is entered in the box Desired speed“, this value can be transmitted
”
to the motor control either by pressing the Enter key or the button Set speed“.
”
• The kind of the display and input of a speed depends on the selection of the option
Speed in %“. This option being switched on, all speed values will be displayed
”
in percent referring to the maximum speed.
• The movement of the motor can be stopped by pressing the button Stop motor“.
”
• If it turns out to be necessary to initialise again a motor separately from all others,
this can be carried out by pressing the button Init. motor“.
”
Using the menu item Close dialog“ a dialog can be quitted. The mechanism will
”
remain active, which means that it can be used immediately again when the dialog is
reopened.
Travelling units and goniometers generally contain end-point switches for the protecti-
on of the devices against mechanical damages. If positions are reached which activate
these switches, with the movement being fully software-controlled, then a malfunction
can be assumed as the initialisation data of the software also include end position data.
Consequently, the software should allow the travelling unit to approach only those posi-
tions which are admitted. Therefore, a new initialisation of the hardware and a restart
of the software will have to be carried out after determining and rectifying the causes of
reaching the end position, so that the user can go on working.
264
18.2. Template image generator
With the template image generator synthetic images can be created. Possible applications
include:
• The development of image processing operations. Here it is recommended prior to

application to the camera recorded luminance or color images, to test the develo-
ped algorithms to artificial images. Therefore the template images are needed in
evaluation images of the program.
• The measurement and photometric evaluation of displays. For this, the generated
images are to be loaded to the display under test. This can be done either directly
via the DVI port of the computer when the display has an appropriate port, or
the generated test images are saved as a file and copied with another program on
the display.
265
18. Extras
The template image generator can be opened through several menu items:
• Via menu point Evaluation | Create a luminance test image“. This option
”
is available from the Standard Monochrom program version.
• Via menu point Evaluation | Create a color test image“. This option is
”
available in the Standard Color program version.
• Via menu point Camera | Camera set-up dialog“ und the associated dialog.
”
See section 6.5 Camera set-up (orientation, focussing)“ at page 68.
”
• Via menu point Evaluation | BlackMura-application“. The prerequisite
”
for this is the existence of the program package BlackMura“. See section 18.3
”
BlackMura software package“ at page 275.
”
• Via menu point Evaluation | StickingImages application“. The prerequi-
”
site for this is the existence of the program package StickingImages“. See sec-
”
tion 18.4 Sticking images software package“ ab Seite 285.
”
• Via menu point Evaluation | Pixel crosstalk“, if the program package Pi-
” ”
xel Crosstalk“ is installed. See section 18.6 Pixel Crosstalk software package“
”
at page 294.
18.2.1. Dialog part Target“

”
In this section of the dialog, the target can be selected for the generated test pattern.
At least one screen is of course available on every computer, otherwise a use of the
program would not be possible. Other connected screens are detected and displayed in
the program. The sizes of these displays in pixels can be detected automatically by the
program. The interactive input of the size of a display or image in millimeters is only
necessary if this is to be later printed out as a file. From the size in pixels and the size
in millimeters, the correct pixel size in DPI (dots per inch) can be calculated.
If one chooses as the target for generating Image“, then one of the currently available
”
images can be selected in the selection box below. Here the correct image type is to be
considered: Color test images can only be created in color images, monochrome sample
images are stored only in luminance images.
266
18.2.2. Dialog part Border size“

”
If the option Border size“ is set, then you can adjust a margin width for the test
”
image to be generated. The margin is filled with the constant Value“. The use of these
”
boundary option is useful, for example, when the display to be measured does have a
certain size, but there is only a part of it visible or relevant for the measurement.
18.2.3. Tab sheet Adjustment“

”
The look of the this kind of pattern image is shown on the page 68. The only parameter
is the users choice whether white patterns on black background or black structures on
white are to be displayed.
18.2.4. Tab sheet BlackMura“

”
With the program package BlackMura“ the uniformity of the display will be mea-
”
sured. For a description of this package, see the section 18.3 starting on page 275. For
the measurement are only two pattern images required: Switched on all pixels (Bright
image) and switched off all the pixels (Dark image). For it no further parameters are
required.
18.2.5. Tab sheet Sticking images“

”
267
18. Extras
In the program package StickingImages“, see the section 18.4 Sticking images“ be-
” ”
ginning on page 285, there are two template images that need to be loaded on the display
to be measured:
On the right side of the dialog the Parameter“ options are available, to change the
”
appearance of images. In general, it is not necessary to change the standing here default
values. The button Default values“ can be used after own experiments to return to
”
the basic setting of the parameters.
When setting up a measuring station, it may be useful to reveal additional labels in the
template image. For the generation of these labels the two options Circular fields“
”
and Modulation fields“ can be used.
”
With Circular fields“ rectangles at the four corners of the template image are re-
”
placed by small circles. Modulation fields“ replaces two rectangles centrally located
”
by a respective horizontal and a vertical stripe structure:
Burn-in template Relaxation template
Template images with brands can only be

used for the establishment of the test site to
verify the orientation of the display and fo-
cus the lens. For the following instruction of
the burn-in image they are not allowed. Here
the marks have to be removed.
18.2.6. Tab sheet Pixel cross talk“

”
The template images, which can be configured in this tab, are needed for the program
package Pixel Crosstalk“. See the section 18.6 on page 294. It creates a dot matrix
”
on the selected screen or target image. The shown parameters are creating the following
image:
268
18.2.7. Tab sheet Luminance“

”
On this page, various types of luminance test patterns can be parameterized, which are
mainly useful for testing algorithms. The number and interpretation of the parameters
depends on the selected pattern type.
Specifically, the following options are available:
• Horizontal wedge: In the test image thus generated the value of a pixel is equal
to its x-coordinate. For this reason, the brightness increases in the image linearly
from left to right.
• Vertical wedge: Analogous to the horizontal wedge, only this time in the y direction.
• Horizontal stripes: It creates an image with horizontal stripes. Parameters are the
strip width and the strip spacing.
• Vertical stripes: Analog horizontal stripes, only this time with vertical stripes.
• Grid of stripes: Creates a grid with a combination of horizontal and vertical stripes.
The parameters of both strip directions can be set independently.
269
18. Extras
• Rectangular raster: It creates a grid of white rectangles with selectable size and
arbitrary intervals on a black background.
• Circle raster: Analogous to the rectangular grid here a pattern of circles is genera-
ted.
• Circular polynomial: It is calculated an image with a brightness curve, centered at
(Xm, Ym) in the picture, and with the equation
L(x, y) = P 0 + P 1 ∗ r + ... + P 5 ∗ r5
with
p
r= (x − Xm)2 + (y − Y m)2
• Horizontal polynomial: It is a test image generated, the pixel values thereof satisfy
the following equation:
L(x, y) = P 0 + P 1 ∗ x + ... + P 5 ∗ x5
• Vertical polynomial: This type corresponds to the horizontal polynomial, only this
time in the vertical direction.
• Complex structures:
• Manhattan Gamma:
270
• Checkerboard: There is a pattern of black and white areas generated whose mesh
size is selectable in horizontal and vertical directions.
• Point cloud: There is a dot pattern generated which does not repeat itself for a
sufficiently large image section within the image. Therefore, from the dot arran-
gement, the absolute position of the image section within the entire image can be
calculated.
In addition to selecting the type of pattern you can the Add noise“ option. In this case,
”
random values are added to the calculated pixels. So you can test the image processing
algorithms to simulate the influence of noise and other disturbances in the recording of
images.
If the noise option is enabled, the parameters of the noise can be set on the right side of
the dialog. With Mean“ and Dispersion“ properties of a noise process are set which
” ”
is independent of the theoretically calculated pixel values.
With Percentual“ a noise process is added, which is a percentage depending on the
”
calculated pixel values. Large pixel values are then absolutely more noisy than small.
18.2.8. Tab sheet Color“

”
271
18. Extras
On this page, various types of color test patterns can be parameterized, which are mainly
useful for testing algorithms. The number and interpretation of the parameters depends
on the selected pattern type.
• Tiles, horizontal lines, vertical lines, color gradient: There the primary colors red,
green and blue are distributed in various ways in the image.
Tiles Horizontal lines
Vertical lines Color gradient
• HSV image: For testing in the HSV color space, the colors in a suitably way are
circular splitted in the image.
272
• Grid: There is produced a grid of horizontal and vertical lines in the three primary
colors red, green and blue.
• xy image, uv image, u’v’ image and rg image for 2◦ und 10◦ observers: Generates
test images, which correspond to common chromaticity diagrams in their construc-
tion.
xy image, 2◦ observer
• Homogeneous color: On the right side the values for red, green and blue can be
given in the three boxes, with which the whole image is filled evenly.
• Border wedges: If additionally clicked on, four color stripes are complemented on
the four sides of the image.
273
18. Extras
18.2.9. Tab sheet User defined“

”
On this page, no new template types are defined or can be configured, instead, here
the opportunity is provided to upload your own images into the program or one of the
displays.
The following formats will be accepted:
• The TechnoTeam image formats *.puc, *.pus, *.pf, *.pco und *.pcf. For information
about these formats, see the section A.1 Images“ on page 298.
”
• All common image formats such as *.png, *.bmp und *.jpg.
18.2.10. Buttons in the lower part of the dialog
• With Create“ a test image corresponding to the currently set requirements (Tar-
”
get, type, parameters) is created. If the selected target is Image“, it should be
”
noted that the type of image is adequate. For images of the tab sheet Color“,
”
must have been selected the color image or a color evaluation image. In all other
tab sheets the target images are monochrome. For displays as a target both mo-
nochrome and color images are possible.
• With the Delete“ button on a display loaded images can be deleted.
”
• The buttons Save parameters“ and Load parameters“ are used to save the
” ”
current state of the dialog and to reconstruct later.
• The button Load image“ have only a meaning on the tab sheet User defined“.
” ”
• With the button Save Image“, any test image according to the current settings
”
in the dialog is written in a file.
274
18.3. BlackMura“ software package
”

”
The BlackMura“ software package supports the analysis of display screens quality,
”
providing an extension to the functions of the LabSoft package. The program implements
version 1.3 of the 2017 BlackMura standard.
18.3.1. Installation and Call-up
The installation program 14 Lmk LabSoft BlackMura *.exe“, in which the *“

” ”
stands for the version number, must be started in order to integrate the package into
LabSoft“. This program requires the user to give the directory into which a previous
”
LabSoft“ installation has taken place, e.g. C:\Program files\TechnoTeam\Lab-
” ”
Soft“.
When the program is restarted, the BlackMura package will show as a new menu item,
Evaluation | BlackMura application“, and can also be started with the quick-
”
start icon . This is what will happen if either the menu item or the icon are selected:
• If not already present, the necessary images will be created: Adjustment image“,
”
Bright image“, Dark image“ and Gradient image“,
” ” ”
• also the tables BlackMura parameters“ and BlackMura results“,
” ”
• the BlackMura dialog“ will be opened
”
• and if possible, the data from the last task carried out with the dialog will be
loaded.
When it is first called up after installation, the dialog is empty:
275
18. Extras
18.3.2. Making a project file
The prerequisite for photometry of a display panel is that the measuring station has
already been set up between camera and panel. The camera adjustment dialog“
”
should be used to align the positions of the two components and to focus the lens onto
the panel. This dialog is described in Section 6.5, page 68 ff.
The result from the camera adjustment must be written to a file in this dialog by clicking
the Save result“ button. This type of file has a name ending in .car“ (camera
” ”
adjustment result), and the relevant file must then be loaded for a project to be created
in the BlackMura dialog, by clicking the Load“ button in the Adjustment file“
” ”
line.
Once the .car“ file has been loaded, the relevant information will appear in the
”
BlackMura parameters“ table. To enable the ensuing analysis of the display pa-
”
nel to supply usable results, the variations in the positioning must not exceed certain
limits in the horizontal or vertical or axial directions. If the deviations are too great, the
dimensions will appear with a yellow highlight in the table. However, there will be no
other influence on the measurement process; it is possible to continue work on a panel
which is not positioned with perfect accuracy.
If the displays are to be measured from an oblique view, then a projective rectification
of the luminance image will be necessary between the image capture and the measure-
ment according to the BlackMura-procedure. This and also a number of further options
concerning image capture will be presented later in Section 18.3.3 on page 279 ff.
Parameters not okay Parameters okay Projective rectification
If the projective rectification function is activated by means of the capture parameter

dialog, the usually applied colored marking of the excess of the limit values for the
angles of rotation and that of a too low modulation will be switched off in the table of
parameters.
If the camera adjustment has taken place immediately beforehand, the result of the last
shot of the template image will still appear as the camera image. This image can be
taken over by clicking on the Copy“ button in the Adjustment image“ line.
” ”
It is not essential for the continuing analysis but will be stored later in the project file and
can be loaded from there because it may serve documentation purposes. If the Show
”
276
”
regions“ checkbox is marked, the 5 circles for determining the geometric position and
the 12 grid type measurement regions will be displayed in the adjustment image to enable
the modulation to be calculated.
When the display panel has been switched on and is bright, the capture of the image
can be started by clicking the Capture“ button in the Bright image“ line. For this,
” ”
the optimum exposure time will be determined from the Autoscan“ algorithm and,
”
after that, the luminance image will be captured using the Multipic“ algorithm. This
”
image will be copied as the image for the Bright image“, which is where the rest of
”
the analysis will take place.
The pixels belonging to the particular display panel will be analysed in the image and the
mean minimum and maximum and position of the minimum and maximum luminous
figures will be calculated for the relevant area. The uniformity of the display panel
will be immediately clear from the minimum and maximum figures. By clicking Show
”
classification“ in the Bright image“ line, the user can be shown which pixels have
”
been allocated by the program to the display and which to the background.
Bright image with minimum and Result of pixel classification

maximum
277
18. Extras
If it proves impracticable in a particular case to create a dark enough environment for

the display panel, with the result that the optical separation of the display from its
background is not clear, it is possible to limit the area to be analysed to a single image
region. This is how to do so:
• In the Luminance image“, frame a rectangular region containing the part of the
”
display to be analysed but not the interfering margin.
• Mark this region and
• Click Selected region“ button in the Measurement region“ line.
” ”
• After this, the selected region can be displayed on the Adjustment image“,
”
Bright image“, Dark image“ and Gradient image“ tabs if the Show
” ” ” ”
regions“ option is switched on in the Measurement region“ line.
”
• To return to the procedure for evaluating the entire image, click the Entire
”
image“ button in the Measurement image“ line.
”
When a project file is being saved, the details of the areas of the image to be used are
also noted and are taken into account for succeeding evaluations.
To achieve subsequent evaluation of an image already captured, the method is to click
the Load“ button in the Bright image“ line, calling up a stored shot from a file
” ”
in Bright image“. After that, the same algorithm is used as applies normally to the
”
capture of a luminance image.
The results for the Bright image“ captured will be shown in the results table:
”
After the screen has been switched to dark, clicking the Capture“ button in the
”
Dark image“ line will start the luminance imaging. The Autoscan“ and Multipic“
” ” ”
algorithms will be applied and the result will be copied as the Dark image“. Then the
”
same evaluation algorithm as for the bright image will first be used, i.e. the mean, the
minimum and the maximum will be calculated, as well the positions of minimum and
maximum and the degree of uniformity.
Next, the local patches of non-uniformity will be defined in the captured image and then
represented as a further image, the Gradient image“. The algorithm used for this is
”
described in the BlackMURA Display V100.pdf“ (uniformity measurement stan-
”
dard for displays) document. In the Gradient image“, the minimum and maximum
”
and their positions will likewise be calculated and graphically displayed. The measured
values from the Dark image“ and the Gradient image“ will be transferred into the
” ”
results table like those from the Bright image“.
”
278
”
Gradient image Table of results
Before saving a project file, one can click on Comment“ and write an explanato-
”
ry text to be stored with the four images, Adjustment image“, Dark image“,
” ”
Bright image“, Gradient image“, and the two tables, BlackMura parame-
” ” ”
ters“, BlackMura results“. Once the Save project“ button has been pressed
” ”
and a name has been given to the project, it will be stored as a file.
A project file saved earlier can be called up into the program once more by clicking the
Load project“ button. The content of all four images, Adjustment image“, Dark
” ” ”
image“, Bright image“, Gradient image“, and the two tables, BlackMura
” ” ”
parameters“, BlackMura results“ will be reconstructed.
”
The creation of a project file is mainly justified because it supports documentation of the
parameters selected on setting up a measuring station for a particular type of display
screen and of the typical photometric results associated. For the actual photometry,
the only parameters required are those for the scale of the image in both the x and y
coordinate directions (see BlackMura parameters“ table), as it is from these that
”
the dimensions of the area measured to find the minima and maxima and their position
in the various images have to be calculated, together with the size of the filter to permit
calculation of the non-uniformity.
18.3.3. Deviating parameterisations of the captures
When capturing the bright and the dark images, the following default settings will be
used:
• Calculation of an optimum exposure time both for the bright and the dark capture
using the Autoscan-algorithm. For this, the entire image area will be evaluated in
each case.
• The camera view is directed perpendicular to the display with minimum rotations
in horizontal, vertical and axial direction.
• All those pixels which present a brightness of at least 10% of the brightest pixel
will be considered to be part of the display.
• For evaluation purposes, an edge of 2 millimeters will be cut off.
279
18. Extras
• The size of the filter for detecting the inhomogeneities within the display includes
2 millimeters.
• The distance between two display pixels is 0.204 mm.
If these assumptions are not suitable for a special application, changes can be made in the
dialog Capture parameters for BlackMura“. This dialog can be opened directly
”
from the BlackMura“-dialog by pressing the button Capture parameters“. The
” ”
following bitmap shows the default settings as they are used without this dialog or also
when it is opened in the program for the first time.
Parameterization of the MultiPic-algorithm
Both the bright image and the dark image are captured by applying the MultiPic-
algorithm. Here, the capture parameters can be modified for the bright image and for
the dark image separately:
• Autoscan in the image“: This is the default setting. Before each capture, the
”
optimum exposure time is determined on the basis of the maximum brightness in
the overall image.
• Autoscan in the region“: In this case, the optimum exposure time is also
”
calculated before each capture, but - in contrast to the preceding option - only
a region, which can be selected by the user, is examined. This is useful in the
case that there are disturbing light sources in the camera image which cannot be
suppressed by other means. Here, the region to be used is selected in an image
area which the user can fix in the section Autoscan in region“ arranged on
”
the right-hand side.
280
”
• Fixed exposure time“: If the prevailing capture conditions are known and
”
remain constant, the execution of the BlackMura-algorithm can be speeded up by
presetting a fixed time as no Autoscan will be necessary any more.
• Number of captures“: In the default setting, ten camera images are captu-
”
red consecutively and then combined to a common luminance image. The option
provided in the dialogue allows the number of camera images to be modified.
Fixing the Autoscan-region
In the preceding paragraph, reference has been made to the possibility of restricting that
region of the image which is used for the Autoscan-algorithm. In the section Autoscan
”
in region“, this region can either be reduced manually by entering the corresponding
values, or the coordinates of a rectangle marked in the luminance image can be read by
pressing the button From region marked“.
”
The button From image“ is useful for the manual input as it allows the user to find
”
out the maximum size of the Autoscan-region.
Projective rectification after capture
In most cases, the measuring station will be set up in such a way as to direct the
camera perpendicular to the display to be measured (cf. Section 6.5 Camera set-up
”
dialogue“ on page 68 ff). In this case, the coordinate system defined during set-up
in the camera image just as in the luminance image can also be used for making the
evaluations in the bright and in the dark capture as well as in the gradient image.
If, however, the display is, for example, of the type of a Split-Screen-display, it is ne-
cessary to capture it more from the side. For making the calculations according to the
BlackMura-procedure, however, a plan view (which is a virtual one here) of the display
is necessary. The conversion from the oblique capture to a perpendicular plan view is
effected through projective rectification (cf. Section 14.7 on page 205 ff).
The position of the display in the camera image and in the luminance image as well as
its size have been fixed while working with the camera set-up dialogue (cf. Section 6.5
on page 68 ff). Up to now, however, it has not been known how this capture shall be
rectified for the bright, the dark and the gradient image. If the option Projective
”
rectification“ is selected in the dialog, the parameters for this rectification and for
the coordinate system which is then valid for these images are calculated and displayed
to the user for checking purposes.
281
18. Extras
Further capture parameters
In the Section Calculation parameters“, the user can access a number of further
”
parameters which are used by the calculation algorithms:
• Background level“: After capturing a luminance image, the algorithm defines

”
which of the pixels are assigned to the display, and which pixels belong to the
background. The basis is the maximum brightness in the image. All pixels which
are brighter than the product of the background threshold and the maximum
brightness are taken as display pixels, all others as background pixels.
• Border size“: The evaluations in the display are made in a slightly reduced area
”
so as to prevent the measuring results from being affected by any edge effects.
• Filter size“: In the BlackMura-standard, the application of an edge filter is
”
fixed. Here in the dialogue, the size of the filter can be changed.
• Pixel pitch“: Size of edge and filter are given in millimeters. In general, these
”
parameters should be left at their default settings. Otherwise, the comparability of
measurement results is no longer present. For the calculations but their indication
in pixels is needed. For this, the program must know the size of a display pixel.
The bitmap below shows how the dialog presents itself after some default settings have
been changed. In this example, the Autoscan for the bright capture is effected in a
region of the luminance image fixed by the user. In addition, a projective rectification
into the bright, the dark and the gradient image is carried out after capturing. All other
parameters had been left as found in their default settings.
282
”
18.3.4. Measurement and analysis
When display screens are being analyzed in succession, it is possible to store the images
produced in serial order in a single directory. In addition a file is stored in the same
directory ending in .csv“ (standing for comma separated value) which will contain
”
all the values measured by the program so that they can be evaluated in an external
program such as Excel. The images will be stored in the directory in the same format as
is used by the serial measurement dialogs. There is more on this in Section 7, page 78
onwards.
Once the Select“ button has been clicked in the Target directory“ line, the name
” ”
of the existing directory can be entered or a new one created. The file BlackMura.csv“
”
will immediately be created in the directory which will capture all the measured values
from the ensuing analyses.
If the Capture“ button is clicked in the Dark image“ line, a new luminance snaps-
” ”
hot will be taken and the result copied into this Dark image“, then evaluated. The
”
procedure is the same for the calculation of the Gradient image“.
”
Dialog after saving a snapshot
When Save image“ is clicked, the Dark image“ will be saved to the directory in-
” ”
dicated and a further line of measured values will be added to the BlackMura.csv“
”
file. If there is no entry in the Serial number“ field, the file name for the image will
”
be created automatically from the date and time but if there is an entry, that serial
number will be adopted. It is possible to set up automatic saving of images after every
283
18. Extras
imaging episode by selecting the Save automatically“ box. This obviates pressing
”
Save image“ every time.
”
If at the time of saving there is a commentary (this may have been entered by pressing
the Comment“ button), it will be stored in an additional html file which has the same
”
basic name as the image in the directory.
The format of the BlackMura.csv“ file is self-explanatory. The values from the mea-
”
surement episode are separated by semicolons and each episode is in a separate line.
The first line contains the names of the values to be found in the relevant column. The
measured values for the dark image, the gradient image and the bright image are all
included.
Content of a directory Excel representation of BlackMura.csv
18.3.5. Automatic measurement (using the Template image generator)
In the lower part of the dialog, there is the section Automatic measurement (using
”
the Template image generator)“. If the display to be measurede is connected
via a DVI interface to the computer, then you can load the necessary templates for
BlackMura measurement from the program on the display, capture an image and evaluate
it automatically.
With the button Template parameter“ the template image generator is opened, see
”
the section 18.2 on page 265. There you can select the display to be controlled and set
additional parameters. Then the generator dialog can be closed again.
With the selection boxes Bright image“ and Dark image“ you can choose which
” ”
captures to be made. If both set, after pressing the button Automatic measurement“
”
the bright image is first recorded and evaluated, then the dark. If only one option is set,
only one image is captured. In Time delay“ you can set the time that should be
”
maintained between uploading the image on the display and the capturing starts.
284
18.4. Sticking images“ software package
”

”
The program package Sticking images“ supports the measurement of the burn-in
”
characteristics of displays. This package is an extension of the functionality of the
LabSoft“ program. In the following, the knowledge of the document Sticking-
” ”
Images Display V011.pdf“ (Area sticking standard for image display (TFT-LCD))
is assumed and it is only discussed the possibilities that the program package provides
to the user.
18.4.1. Installation and Call-up
The installation program 29 Lmk LabSoft StickingImages AddOn *.exe“, in

”
which the *“ stands for the version number, must be started in order to integra-
”
te the package into LabSoft“. This program requires the user to give the directo-
”
ry into which a previous LabSoft“ installation has taken place, e.g. C:\Program
” ”
files\TechnoTeam\LabSoft“.
When the LabSoft“ program is restarted, the Sticking images package will be shown
”
as a new menu item, Evaluation | StickingImages application“, and can also be
”
started with the quick-start icon . This is what will happen if either the menu item or
the icon are selected:
• If not already present, the necessary tables, images and diagrams will be created:
Sticking images - regions“, Sticking images - current image“, Sticking
” ” ”
images - all raw data“, Sticking images - black results“, Sticking
” ”
images - white results“, Sticking images - column results“, Sticking
” ”
images - results“ and Sticking images - diagram“
”
• and the Sticking images“ dialog will be opened:
”
285
18. Extras
If you want to analyze displays with the program package, the program expects to work
with template images that are loaded on the display to be measured and by which the
program can determine the time course of the burn-in behavior. These template images
can be generated in the program itself with the button Create templates“. After
”
pressing this button the dialog Template image generator“ is opened.
”
18.4.2. Create burn-in templates
The description of the Template image generator“ can be found in section 18.2
”
on page 265. The two image templates Burn-in“ and Relaxation“ and their para-
” ”
meterization are explained in subsection 18.2.5 on page 267 in detail.
18.4.3. Instruction with burn-in image
In order to measure the burn-in behavior, the program needs to know to be measured
in what regions. For this purpose, the burn-in image must be loaded onto the display
and displayed there. After that a luminance image with the LabSoft“ program has to
”
be captured. For this task, the different capturing methods are available that have been
described in detail in section 6.2 on page 55. When a picture is available, then you can
search for the measurement regions by pressing the button Teach burn-in image“.
”
The regions found are shown in the table Sticking images - regions“:
”
If in the dialog the option Show used regions“ is switched on, they are also shown in
”
the luminance image as measurement regions. Warning: Thereby already existing other
regions may be deleted!
286
”
The behavior of the program in the search for the measurement regions can be changed
through the parameters in section Teach burn-in image“. In general, that should
”
not be necessary and you can leave the basic settings in the dialog as they are. After
own experiments, you can return to these basic settings with the button Defaults“. If
”
you are not successful and you can not find appropriate settings, then save a luminance
image in pf-format and send it to us for analysis.
18.4.4. Analysis of burn-in behavior
After determining the measurement regions, the program is prepared to measure the
burn-in behavior of the display. The measurement can now be started by pressing the
button Start analysis“. For the continuous recording of many luminance images
”
there are different ways in the LabSoft“ program:
”
• The use of the dialog Live capture“. This dialog is opened by pressing the menu
”
item Capture | Live capture“. A description of this dialog can be found in
”
section 6.2.4 on page 63.
• The use of dialog Manual capture series“. This dialog starts after selecting
”
the menu item Capture | Measurement series | Manual“. The use of this
”
dialog is useful if the images should be stored for further use. The documentation
of this dialog can be found in section 7.1.1 on page 79.
• Similar to the dialog for manual capturing series, you can also work with a time
series of captures. In contrast to manual capturing series in which the program
takes pictures as quickly as possible, the capturing times may be set in advance
by the user here. This dialog is described in section 7.1.2 on page 82.
• If images have been stored with one of the dialogs mentioned before, they can also
be analyzed at a later time. For this, the dialog File-controlled capture
”
287
18. Extras
series“ can be used. It can be opened with Capture | Measurement series

”
| File-controlled“, see section 7.1.4 on page 84.
So you have to press the button Start analysis“ in the dialog Sticking images“
” ”
and then use pictures with one of the options just described before. When the time has
elapsed, in which the burn-in behavior will be investigated, you can stop shooting by
pressing the button Stop Analysis“.
”
Displaying the measurement results
During the recordings, the mean luminances in the measurement regions and the pa-
rameter lSI are calculated. For the definition of this parameter see StickingIma-
”
ges Display V011.pdf“ (Area sticking image standard for Displays (TFT-LCD)). The
time course of this parameter is presented in both tabular and graphically in the pro-
gram:
In table form Graphically
During the capturing the table Sticking images - current image“ is updated with
”
each image menu item Afterimages - date picture updated, indicating the average lu-
minance in each measurement region:
For additional evaluations in an external program, e.g. Excel, individual measured values
from all images and intermediate results are also recorded in other tables and graphs:
• Sticking images - all raw data“: This table contains the average luminance
”
in all regions of all images. From this table, all intermediate and final results can
be itself calculated in a foreign program in principle.
288
”
• Sticking images - black results“: Contains the calculated values lSI,Bj of all
”
black regions of all images.
• Sticking images - white results“: Contains the calculated values lSI,W j of
”
all white regions of all images. Because the white regions near the border are not
taken into account, this table contains one value less than the corresponding table
for the black areas for every column.
• Sticking images - column results“: This table shows the results lSI,j of every
”
image column separately.
• Sticking images - diagram“: On the side 1 of the graph as described above,
”
the time course of the whole sticking value is shown. The page 2 contains the time
course of sticking values of each column:
Save the measurement parameters in a project file
With the button Save project“ the current state of measurement is stored. The
”
created file contains, if available, the images Burn-in template“ and Relaxation
” ”
template“, the parameters for creating the template images, for the region search, the
four tables and the result graph. With the button Load project“ the user can reload
”
these data.
Export measurement results for evaluation in other programs
The standard output from the program LabSoft“ in protocols, to Excel and Word
”
also include images, tables and diagrams generated from the add-on package Sticking
”
images“, so special export functions are not necessary.
289
18. Extras
18.5. Add-on COLORzones“

”
After installing the add-on COLORzones“ additional regions in chromaticity diagrams
”
can be drawn. These regions provide an easy way to visually check the compliance of
color tolerances.
18.5.1. Installation
The installation program 32 Lmk LabSoft COLORzones AddOn *.exe“, in

”
which the *“ stands for the version number, must be started in order to integra-
”
te the package into LabSoft“. This program requires a previous installation of the
”
LabSoft“ program itself.
”
18.5.2. Usage
After the installation, the option dialog for chromaticity diagrams contains the option
Show regions“, see the red mark in the following image. This dialog can be opened
”
using the menu item Diagram | Options“:
”
Thus regions are displayed, you must pass them to the program in a file. After pressing
the button File name“, a file selection dialog opens, in which the appropriate file can
”
be selected and loaded. After successfully loading it can be viewed using the button
Test“, if the regions are loaded and displayed at reasonable places in the diagram
”
before leaving the dialog. By pressing the button Ok“ the settings will be accepted and
”
the dialog is closed.
290
”
In the chromaticity diagram displaying the regions is in addition to the measured values
of the corresponding statistics:
The drawn regions in the chromaticity diagrams are stored together with the measure-
ment protocols and loaded and displayed again when re-opening of these protocols.
18.5.3. Manual creation of a region file
You can create the region files manually by entering the xy chromaticity coordinates of
the points of the corresponding regions using a text editor into a text file:
RegionList
5
Polygon 4 0.721 0.259 0.735 0.265 0.665 0.335 0.645 0.335
Polygon 4 0.028 0.385 0.228 0.351 0.321 0.493 0.305 0.689
Polygon 4 0.612 0.382 0.618 0.382 0.560 0.440 0.546 0.426
Polygon 4 0.148 0.025 0.233 0.167 0.186 0.214 0.090 0.137
Polygon 3 0.148 0.025 0.181 0.008 0.161 0.046
The used file format here for region lists is described in this manual in section A.2. In
short form:
• The first line contains with RegionList“ the identifier for this type of text file.
”
• The second line contains the number of regions.
• Each additional line begins with the type of the region, here always Polygon“.
”
• The following number indicates the number of the following pairs of coordinates,
here 3 or 4.
• After that follow pairs of x-y color values.
291
18. Extras
18.5.4. Visual creation of a region file
A region list can be created in some applications visually in the program:
1. Creating a color test image with the menu item Evaluation | Create a color
”
test image“. In the dialog that opens, select the item xy image, 2◦ observer“.
”
There is calculated an image itself that has the form of a chromaticity diagram.
With the menu item Image view | Coordinate system“ you can switch on
”
the display of the coordinate system. It can be seen that in this image a coordinate
system is used, that for the horizontal and vertical axis respectively contains the
color coordinates x and y in a range of values between 0 and 1:
292
”
2. Regions can be created in this image in the normal way, either with the mouse or
with the Region properties“ dialog with the menu item Regions | Proper-
” ”
ties“:
3. With the menu item Regions | Load and save in units of coordinate
”
system“ you select the option that in subsequent saving of the region list the
information about the used coordinate system - here the color coordinates - are
also to be saved. Then, the region list created can be stored with the menu item
Regions | Save as“.
”
4. Then you can, as described in the previous sections, import the list of regions in
the chromaticity diagram:
293
18. Extras
18.6. Pixel Crosstalk“ software package

”
With the program package Pixel Crosstalk“ the quality of display glasses can be mea-
”
sured. Basis of recording and evaluation is the article Pixel Crosstalk: A New Metric
”
to Characterize DOI Loss Due to AG Treatments of Display Glasses“ by Thomas Fink
and Udo Krüger.
After installation of the software package there is the new menu item Pixel crosstalk“
”
in the menu Evaluation“ available, which opens the following dialog:
”
On the left side of the dialog in the section Automatic“ there are a number of check-
”
boxes, where you can select options for an automated process of measurement. On the
right side, in the section Manual“, there are action buttons that can be used to invoke
”
partial steps individually and understand the algorithm used.
18.6.1. Automatic sequence
Before you can start with the automated process, first the parameters of the later be
recorded template images must be defined. Therefore the button Template Genera-
”
tor“ opens the following dialog. See also section 18.2 Template image generator“ on
”
page 265.
294
”
In the example shown has been selected as the target and so as to be measured display
Display 3“, which can be driven via a DVI interface from the program. There is every
”
eighth pixels are turned on horizontally and vertically.
For a subsequent automated process and if the option Create template“ is turned
”
on, it is now not necessary to create the template image. In this case the template
generator dialog can be closed after setting the parameter.
In the measurement after pressing the button Execute automatically“ the program
”
captures a dark image first, if the option Dark capture“ is set. In this image all
”
pixels are switched to dark. It is used to correct the influences of ambient light and of
the remaining residual light.
If option Pixel capture“ is set, then individual pixels are sequentially turned on red,
”
green, blue and white and separate images captured. Prerequisite for inclusion in the
respective color are switched on options Red“, Green“, Blue“ and White“. In
” ” ” ”
these images the position of bright pixels after correction with the dark image is sought
and thereby set the measurement locations.
The size and location of regions to calculate the luminance can be determined from the
position and the distance of the light points found. In addition, the information from the
template imaging is needed, in which raster display lit pixel. To dispel any spot around
five measuring regions are set and there respectively calculates the average luminance.
295
18. Extras
These raw values are found for the last recorded image in the table PCT - raw data“.
”
During a subsequent recording the values are overwritten by the new one.
The raw values are the foundation of a quality standard that has been defined in the
aforementioned document Pixel Crosstalk: A new metric...“:
”
LLef t +LRight
P CTHorizontal = 100% ∗ 2∗LCenter
LT op +LBottom
P CTV ertical = 100% ∗ 2∗LCenter
While the table with the raw data contains only the measured values for the last re-
cording, provides a second table PCT - results“ both an overview of the relevant
”
parameters for the measurement also as well as an overview of the results for all colors:
In this table indicates the entry Number of pixels“ the number of measured re-
”
gions were found. In Pixel distance X and Y respectively“ the corresponding
”
parameters of the original image generator have been adopted.
From the distances between the measurement regions and the pixel distances in the
original image, the reproduction scales can be calculated. The other lines contain the
quality criterions according to the above equations, separated by color and orientation.
296
”
For further analysis, the program provides a copy of all the images and the measurement
regions generated there. In addition in these images the display of the coordinate system
is switched on, which could be calculated from the position of the measurement regions
and the reproduction scales.
18.6.2. Manual recording and further action buttons
The buttons Capture dark image“, Load dark image“, Capture pixel image“
” ” ”
and Load pixel image“ offer the possibility to access components of the process
”
individually.
With Save parameter“ and Load parameter“ current settings can be saved in
” ”
the dialog and reconstructed at a later time.
297
A. Formats
In this chapter the data formats will be described which can be of some interest with
respect to data exchange with other programs. Data formats which are only used in the
LabSoft program will not be documented here.
A.1. Images
Images can be saved and read in different formats. In the list below they are sorted
according to their file endings the program suggests for saving:
Camera images
For camera images with a pixel resolution of 10 or 12 bits the formats available are:
• *.pus“ The abbreviation pus“ stands for Picture unsigned short“. This
” ” ”
format is a very simply configured binary format developed by TechnoTeam which
will be described in section A.1.1 on page 299.
• *.tix“ This data format has been developed by TechnoTeam for internal use, it
”
is based on the Tiff standard.
• *.txt“ This format is a simply configured text format developed by TechnoTeam
”
which will be described in section A.1.2 on page 300.
• *.tif“ Some images can be read which have been saved as Tiff images. Since the
”
Tiff format supports many different versions, only those Tiff images can be loaded
whose Tiff tags meet the following conditions:
– BitsPerSample = 16
– SamplesPerPixel = 1
– Compression = No compression
• *.b16“ These files are images which exist in the PCO image data format for 12Bit
”
images.
Luminance image and monochrome evaluation images
• *.pf“ The abbreviation pf“ stands for Picture float“. This format is a
” ” ”
simply configured binary format developed by TechnoTeam which will be described
in section A.1.1 on page 299.
• *.tix“ This data format has been developed by TechnoTeam for internal use and
”
is based on the Tiff standard.
298
A.1. Images
• *.txt“ This format is a simply configured text format developed by TechnoTeam

”
which will be described in section A.1.2 on page 300. Images in this format can be
saved by the menu item Image | Save as“ and reloaded into the program via
”
Image | Load“.
”
Additionally, the menu item Image | Export image to text file“ offers ano-
”
ther option of transferring image contents into text files. This export option has
been documented in section 9.6.3 on page 111. A description of this format can be
found in section A.1.4 on page 302.
Color image and colored evaluation images
• *.pcf“ The abbreviation pcf“ stands for Picture color float“. It is a

” ” ”
simply configured binary format developed by TechnoTeam which will be described
in the next section.
• *.txt“ This simply configured text format has been developed by TechnoTeam
”
and will be described in section A.1.2 on page 300. In this format, color images are
saved in the color space RGB.
• *.cos“ The abbreviation cos“ stands for Color space“. It is a text format
” ” ”
developed by TechnoTeam. In contrast to image files in Txt format which are
always saved in the RGB color space, the saving operation here is performed in
the color space which is set in the image display for this image.
Not all the images of this type can be loaded again, for this the option of backward
conversion from the corresponding color space to RGB is required. Therefore, the
main application of this format is the image export to other color information
processing programs. The format will be described in section A.1.3 on page 301.
A.1.1. Binary formats *.pus, *.pf, *.pcf
These images consist of a header and the image content.
Header
The header is a zero terminated string according to the C standard. The entries into
the header are separated from each other by 0x0D 0x0A. A program which is capable of
reading-in images of this type has to evaluate the five entries below:
Typ=Pic98::TPlane¡float¿
Lines=1000
Columns=1400
FirstLine=3
FirstColumn=8
299
A. Formats
Camera, luminance and color images are different from each other by their type entries:
• Camera images *.pus“: Typ=Pic98::TPlane<unsigned short>

”
• Luminance images *.pf“: Typ=Pic98::TPlane<float>
”
• Color images *.pcf“: Typ=Pic98::TPlane<Pic98::TRGBFloatPixel>
”
A read routine can ignore this type entry as the file content is distinctly characterized
by the file ending.
All the other data in the header is of no importance for an external reading program. If
an image is created in this format which is then to be read by the Lmk LabSoft, these
entries can be neglected.
Image content
The image content begins directly after the header which is terminated by a single zero
byte. The pixels follow successively line by line. The pixel interpretation is dependent
on the type:
• Camera images *.pus“: Two bytes per pixel in the format unsigned short“.
” ”
• Luminance images *.pf“: Four bytes per pixel in the format float“.
” ”
• Color images *.pcf“: Twelve bytes per pixel. 3 Float“ values each for the
” ”
three colors. The chromaticity values in the file are in the order of blue - green -
red.
Based on the image size shown in the header and the number of bytes per pixel the
reading program can determine the number of bytes which follow the header. That
means for the example above: number of bytes = lines * columns * 2 = 2800000.
FirstLine“ and FirstColumn“ are of no importance for the reading-in process of
” ”
the image content. The shift of the origin of the coordinates has only to be taken into
consideration if the image content has to be put into relation to a coordinate system and
if, for instance, measuring regions have also to be exported to and used in a different
program.
A.1.2. Text format *.txt
An example of an image saved in text format:

float
204 383 369 499
3.659068e+002 3.676931e+002 3.694770e+002 ...
3.675441e+002 3.693331e+002 3.711197e+002 ...
3.691783e+002 3.709700e+002 3.727594e+002 ...
...
300
A.1. Images
The image type is encoded in the first line:
• Camera images: ushort

• Luminance images: float
• Color images: rgbfloat
In the second line the image size is displayed: FirstLine LastLine FirstColumn LastCo-
”
lumn“. Based on this data the image size can be determined.
Then, starting in line three, the image content follows line by line. Successive pixels of
a line are separated from each other by tabulators. The decimal separator depends on
the language settings in the operating system. In German-speaking countries a comma
is used whereas in a lot of other countries it is the point.
In color images, the three chromaticity values of a pixel in the color space RGB are one
after the other. The order of the colors is blue - green - red.
A.1.3. Color image format *.cos
In the previous section a text format for color images has already been introduced. The
pixels in these files are always in the RGB format. By means of the cos format images
can be saved in the color space in which they are displayed in the program. This option
makes sense when the chromaticity values are to be imported into another program. It
is not possible to read-in all files in this format as some color spaces are not invertible.
An example file in this format:
”ColorSpace” ”L*a*b*”
”RefColor” ”XYZ” 966.3099 1036.17 1689.5899
rgbfloat
8 1039 4 1382
23.848354 118.4457 -26.4505 23.838926 120.026550 ...
23.984262 120.0575 -26.7038 24.087620 119.872787 ...
24.167095 119.6843 -26.7634 24.273176 119.389404 ...
24.316652 119.4463 -26.7805 24.269077 119.919891 ...
...
In the first line, the color space is shown after the key word ”ColorSpaceı̈n which the
pixels have been saved in the file. In the example it is the color space L* a* b* . In the
second line the reference color of the color space is shown after the key word RefColor“.
”
It consists of the name of the color space of the reference color and the three chromaticity
values belonging to it. In the example the chromaticity values of the reference color are
in the color space XYZ.
From the third line on, the file configuration corresponds to that of a color image saved
in the Txt format. The pixel values, however, are in the color space which is defined in
the first line of the file. In the example it is the color space L* a* b* .
301
A. Formats
A.1.4. Export of images in a text format with a coordinate system
In section 9.6.3 on page 111 a method has been described showing how to export image
data in a predefined raster in a coordinate system to a text file. The generated data
format depends on the parameters used during the export and on the type of the image.
Examples of data exports:
Output as list
• Headers with name and unit: off

• Output of coordinates: off
• Use of image coordinate system: off
Black-and-white image: One value of a pixel per image line

9.452e+001
8.867e+001
8.479e+001
8.259e+001
8.192e+001
...
Color image: One pixel with three chromaticity values per line (in color space
Lxy here)
1.019e+002 5.832e-001 3.837e-001
1.621e+002 6.108e-001 3.692e-001
6.030e+002 6.513e-001 3.440e-001
1.131e+003 6.069e-001 3.891e-001
1.459e+003 6.005e-001 3.973e-001
...
Output as array
• Header with name and unit: off

• Output of coordinates: off
• Use of image coordinate system: off
Black-and-white image: All image pixels of a line per line

8.388e+001 8.413e+001 ...
8.233e+001 8.257e+001 ...
8.125e+001 8.149e+001 ...
8.062e+001 8.086e+001 ...
8.042e+001 8.066e+001 ...
...
Color image: All image pixels of a line per line, three chromaticity values
side by side per pixel
302
A.2. Region lists
1.01e+02 5.83e-01 3.83e-01 1.79e+03 6.39e-01 3.59e-01 ...

9.60e+01 6.36e-01 3.32e-01 1.90e+03 6.49e-01 3.46e-01 ...
1.10e+02 6.11e-01 3.72e-01 1.16e+03 6.17e-01 3.78e-01 ...
1.18e+02 5.74e-01 3.96e-01 6.87e+02 6.61e-01 3.33e-01 ...
1.25e+02 6.07e-01 3.62e-01 1.77e+03 6.10e-01 3.86e-01 ...
...
Output as list
• Headers with name and unit: on

• Output of coordinates: on
• Use of image coordinate system: on
Color image: One pixel per line, first its coordinates (X, Y), then the chro-
maticity values (L, x, y)
Y X L x y
Pixel Pixel cd/m2
4.000e+000 7.340e+001 1.621e+002 6.108e-001 3.692e-001
4.000e+000 1.468e+002 6.030e+002 6.513e-001 3.440e-001
4.000e+000 2.202e+002 1.131e+003 6.069e-001 3.891e-001
4.000e+000 2.936e+002 1.459e+003 6.005e-001 3.973e-001
4.000e+000 3.670e+002 2.127e+003 6.176e-001 3.802e-001
...
Output as array
• Header with name and unit: on

• Output of coordinates: on
• Use of image coordinate system: on
Black-and-white image: The coordinates are beyond the array
I I I
cd cd cd
1.000e+001 0.000e+000 -1.000e+001 ...
8.042e+001 8.577e+001 8.192e+001 8.577e+001 ...
8.285e+001 8.418e+001 8.040e+001 8.418e+001 ...
8.527e+001 8.308e+001 7.935e+001 8.308e+001 ...
8.770e+001 8.243e+001 7.873e+001 8.243e+001 ...
9.012e+001 8.223e+001 7.854e+001 8.223e+001 ...
...
A.2. Region lists
Region lists can be saved by the menu command Regions | Save as“ and loaded again
”
via ”Regions | Load“”. When loading the regions read can be appended to the ones
”
already existing or the existing ones can be overwritten.
303
A. Formats
The file formats available are:
• *.csv“ This file format has been developed by TechnoTeam for internal use.
”
• *.txt“ This text format is especially simple and can be used to exchange region
”
lists with other programs. The configuration of this format will be described now.
An example for a file in Txt format:

RegionList
10
Rectangle 11 22 33 44
Line 100 100 100 200
Circle 55 66 27
Polygon 3 111 121 111 133 122 133
Polyline 3 104 221 109 102 189 121
Ring 210 386 46 92
Ellipse 521 369 588 442 49
OrGroup 202 602 525 723 2 0 1
AndGroup 623 598 946 719 2 2 3
XorGroup 325 728 338 719 2 4 5
The first line contains the key word RegionList“, the second one the number of regions.
”
The parameters of each region are saved on a line of their own. The region types are
shown at the beginning of each line as a character string. There are four types available
and they are followed by the parameters of the corresponding region:
• Rectangle: The key word for a rectangle is followed by the four coordinates x1 , y1
for the top left-hand corner and x2 , y2 for the bottom right-hand corner.
• Line: The key word has to be followed by the coordinates of the two end points.
• Circle: A circle is defined by its center point x, y and the radius.
• Polygon: The first parameter of a polygon is the number of corners. It is followed
by a list with the xy values of these corners.
• Polyline: The first parameter of a polyline is the number of corners. It is followed
by a list with the xy values of these corners.
• Ring: A ring is defined by its center point x, y, and the radii of the two circles.
• Ellipse: An Ellipse is defined by its center point (x1,y1), the end point (x2,y2) of
the first semiaxis and by the length of the perpendicular second semiaxis.
• Group objects: The definition of such an object (OrGroup, AndGroup und Xor-
Group) begins with the coordinates of the surrounding rectangle. The following
parameter defines the number of regions, which create the object. The remaining
parameters are the indices of the regions in the group object.
304
A.3. Measuring value tables
A.3. Measuring value tables
Using the menu item Tabble | Save as“ a measuring value table can be saved as a
”
text file or a bitmap file. In both cases, only the currently visible columns are exported.
Reading-in the saved tables in the program again will not be possible.
An example of a measuring value table:
Stat.Nr. Bild Region Mittelwert Streuung
1 Leuchtdichtebild 1 76.14 32.36
A tab character will be used as a column separator.
As in the whole program, the type of the decimal separator will depend on the national
default settings of the operating system. In German-speaking countries a comma is
used, whereas a point is used in a lot of other countries. When the program is started
the corresponding values are taken from the operating system.
305
A. Formats
A.4. Parameter data records
The file ending of the parameter data records - as they can be read and written in the
statistics parameter table (cf. paragraph 13.4 from page 173 on ) - is *.spf“. Their
”
internal structure is similar to the structure of an inifile.
If you want to edit parameter data records outside the LabSoft“ program using a text
”
editor, the easiest way to do so is to set up a data record by using this program and to
just make the desired few changes in the prepared file by means of the external editor.
An annotated example of such a file is given below:
[Classificator]
Count=2
Two sections with two parameter data records follow.
[Classificator/1]
Name=Lum Gr[1]
Typ=LUMINANCE GREY
The first of these parameter data records is marked Lum Gr[1]“ and describes the
”
parameters for a luminance object. Some possible type names are:
Notation Statistic type
STANDARD GREY Standard grey statistic
STANDARD COLOR Standard color statistic
CUT GREY Grey image sectional view
CUT COLOR Color image sectional view
HISTOGRAM GREY Grey image histogram
HISTOGRAM COLOR Color image histogram
PROJECTION GREY Grey image projection
PROJECTION COLOR Color image projection
LUMINANCE GREY Luminance object
INTEGRAL GREY Integral object
SYMBOL GREY Symbol object
SYMBOL COLOR Color symbol object
LIGHTARC GREY Grey image Light arc
SPIRALWOUNDFILAMENT GREY Grey image spiral-wound filament
HORSESHOE LINE COLOR Chromaticity line diagram
HORSESHOE AREA COLOR Chromaticity area diagram
3D GREY 3D View diagram
INTEGRAL GREY NC Integral object (neg. contrast)
SYMBOL GREY NC Symbol object (neg. contrast)
SYMBOL COLOR NC Color symbol object (neg. contrast)
ARC GREY Arc object
FILAMENT GREY Filament object
CONTRAST GREY Contrast object
When loading a parameter data record file, the type of this data record is compared with
those which are already available in the program and which have the same name. If the
306
A.4. Parameter data records
types in the file and those in the program are not identical, loading will be aborted by
displaying an error message.
Geo=0
Photo=0
MinMax=0
Time=0
MaxTimeCount=1000
Chromaticity=0
Determining whether the geometrical centre of area, the photometric centre, the posi-
tion of the minimum and maximum, a time statistics or a tristimulus diagram shall be
calculated. (Some of these options are not available for all types of statistics.)
Param=3
Threshold 0=2.229700e+000
Threshold 1=4.459450e+000
Smoothing=1
The luminance object (type=LUMINANCE GREY, see above) has three parameters.
The designation of the entries in the file corresponds to the English names of the pa-
rameters in the corresponding parameter dialogs. Other types of statistics are provided
with a different number of parameters, which are also named differently. Therefore, the
user is again well advised to save a file containing the required parameters, and to adapt
in this file only the parameter values to one’s own requirements.
Class=3
Class1 Visible=1
Class1 Name=Bright
Class2 Visible=1
Class2 Name=Intermediate
Class3 Visible=1
Class3 Name=Dark
Class Colors=Blue Green Red
With the luminance object, the pixels are grouped into three brightness classes ( Bright“,
”
Intermediate“ and Dark“, which, in this case, shall be displayed all three both in
” ”
the result table and in the image (”* Visible=1”).
The classes shall be marked using the colours blue, green or also red. Possible colour
values are : Blue“, Green“, Red“, Yellow“, Magenta“ and Cyan“.
” ” ” ” ” ”
307
A. Formats
Equation=3 Equation1 Name=Test1

Equation1 Class=-1
Equation1 Text=A+B
Equation2 Name=Test2
Equation2 Class=0
Equation2 Text=A1+B1
Equation3 Name=Test3
Equation3 Class=2
Equation3 Text=C1+D1
In this set of parameters, three line formulas have been defined and named Test1“,
”
Test2“ and Test3“ . They are displayed under this name in the result table of the
” ”
corresponding type of statistics. Here, the first of the three formulas is applied to all
three brightness classes Bright“, Intermediate“ and Dark“ as Equation1 Class=-1“
” ” ” ”
whereas the two other formulas are only valid for the bright class (Equation2 Class=0)
and the dark class, respectively (Equation3 Class=2).
In paragraph 13.3 on page 170, it is described how equations have to be entered within
the program. The meaning of the variables A“, B“, A1“ to D1“ appearing in the
” ” ” ”
text of the formulas is explained in this paragraph, too.
With these entries, the description of the first set of parameters in the file is finished.
It now follows the second set of parameters whose structure is analogous to that of the
first one:
[Classificator/2]
...
308
B. Color metric
B.1. Color spaces
Generally speaking, the color spaces presented in the following relate to different possi-
bilities of displaying the color components of one and the same image in different ways.
Therefore, the possible change-over to another color space provided by the program, for
example using the menu item Image | Color space“ or when calculating the color
”
differences (menu item Color | Color differences“) exerts an influence only on
”
the display of the measuring results, but not on the contents of the images.
The color camera makes the images available in the XYZ color space. Therefore, the
connections between the single color spaces are represented in the following graphs always
starting from XYZ. For ensuring better openness, the implemented color spaces are
arranged in groups in the following graphs.
If required, further color spaces can be realized upon request.
B.1.1. CIE-RGB, sRGB, EBU-RGB, User-RGB
The connection between the RGB-color coordinates and the XYZ-color space is realized
via a 3x3-matrix multiplication. For the User-RGB-color space, the coeffients can be set
by the users themselves. In the case of the other RGB-color spaces, the coeffients are
defined by the program.
309
B. Color metric
RGB - XYZ
    
X XR XG XB R
 Y   Y YG YB 
= R  G 
 

Z ZR ZG ZB B
    
R RX RY RZ X
 G   G GY GZ 
= X  Y 
 

B BX BY BZ Z
CIE-RGB
   
XR XG XB +2.7689 +1.7518 +1.1302
 Y YG YB 
 =  +1.0000 +4.5907 +0.0601 
 
 R
ZR ZG ZB +0.0000 +0.0565 +5.5943
+0.4185 −0.1587 −0.0828

   
RX RY RZ
 =  −0.0912 +0.2524 +0.0157 
 G GY GZ   
 X
BX BY BZ +0.0009 −0.0026 +0.1786
sRGB
   
XR XG XB +0.4124 +0.3576 +0.1805
 Y YG YB 
 =  +0.2126 +0.7152 +0.0722 
 
 R
ZR ZG ZB +0.0193 +0.1192 +0.9505
−1.5372 −0.4986
   
RX RY RZ +3.2406
 =  − − 0.9689 +1.8758 +0.0415 
 G GY GZ   
 X
BX BY BZ +0.0557 −0.2040 +1.0570
EBU-RGB
   
XR XG XB +0.431 +0.342 +0.178
 Y YG YB 
 =  +0.222 +0.707 +0.071 
 
 R
ZR ZG ZB +0.020 +0.130 +0.939
+3.0596 −1.3927 −0.4747

   
RX RY RZ
 =  −0.9676 +1.8748 +0.0417 
 G GY GZ   
 X
BX BY BZ +0.0688 −0.2299 +1.0693
310
B.1. Color spaces
B.1.2. Lxy, Luv, Lu’v’, L*u*v*, C*h*s*uv, L*a*b*, C*h*ab
For the color spaces L* u* v* and L* a* b* , a reference color (”‘White point”’) is required.
C* h* s* uv is not a color space in the real sense, but only a further conversion from the
color space L* u* v* . The same is true for C* h* ab , here, two (!) new color coordinates are
calculated from L* a* b* .
Lxy=f(XYZ)
NXY Z = X + Y + Z (auxiliarynumber)
L=Y (Luminance)
X
x= NXY Z
Y
y= NXY Z
Z
z= NXY Z (redundant)
These equations are only useful if L = Y > 0 and X + Y + Z > 0.
Luv=f(XYZ)
NU V 0 = 0.5X + 7.5Y + 1.5Z

2X
u= 0
NU V
3Y
v= 0
NU V
L=Y
Lu’v’=f(XYZ)
0
NU V = 0.5X + 7.5Y + 1.5Z
u0 = 2X
0
NU V
v0 = 4.5Y
0
NU V
L=Y
311
B. Color metric
L* u* v* =f(Lu’v’)
 1
L 3 L
 116 − 16 f or LRef > 0.008856

∗ LRef
L =
L L

 903.3 LRef f or LRef ≤ 0.008856
u∗ = 13(L∗ )(u0 − u0Ref )
v ∗ = 13(L∗ )(v 0 − vRef
0 )
A reference color is required ( White point“), this reference color must be available in
”
Lu’v’.
C* h* s* uv
1
C ∗ = (u∗ )2 + (v ∗ )2
2
∗
h∗uv = arctan uv ∗
C∗
s∗uv = L∗
L* a* b*
 1
 116 Y 3 Y
− 16 f or YRef > 0.008856

∗ YRef
L =
Y Y

 903.3 YRef f or YRef ≤ 0.008856

a∗ = 500 f XX − f YRefY
Ref
b∗ = 200 f YRef Y
− f ZRefZ
1

 t3 f or t > 0.008856
mit f (t) = 16
 7.787 ∗ t + 116 f or t ≤ 0.008856
C* h* ab
1
C ∗ = (a∗ )2 + (b∗ )2
2
∗
hab = arctan ab ∗
B.1.3. HSL-color spaces such as HSI and HSV
HSL: Hue, Saturation, Lightness

HSV: Hue, Saturation, Value
HSI: Hue, Saturation, Intensity
312
B.1. Color spaces
HSV (Travis)
M ax = max(R, G, B)
M in = min(R, G, B)
M ax−M in
S= M ax
V = M ax
The color value H is indicated as angle between 0◦ and 360◦ , which makes its calculation
rule slightly more complicated:
N = M ax − M in
R0 = M ax−R
N
G0 = M ax−G
N
B0 = M ax−B
N
(1) H = undef ined |S = 0

(2) H = 60◦ (5 + B0) |R = M ax, G = M in
(3) H = 60◦ (1 − G0 ) |R = M ax, B = M in
(4) H = 60◦ (R0 + 1) |G = M ax, B = M in
(5) H = 60◦ (3 − B 0 ) |G = M ax, R = M in
(6) H = 60◦ (3 + G0 ) |B = M ax, R = M in
(7) H = 60◦ (5 − R0 ) |B = M ax, G = M in
313
B. Color metric
HSI (Gonzalez, Woods)
RGB = R + G + B
RG = R − G
RB = R − B
GB = G − B
a = min(R, G, B)
RGB
I= 3
3∗a
S = 1 − RGB


 nosense S=0

arccos √0.5∗(RG+RB)

H= RG2 +RB∗GB
S >0∩B <G

 360 − arccos √0.5∗(RG+RB)
◦


RG2 +RB∗GB
S >0∩B >G
B.1.4. WST-color space
Here, the iterative calculation rules for the dominant wavelength W“ and the saturation
”
S“ have been combined with the iterative calculation rule for calculating the color
”
temperature T“ into a color space“ with three color coordinates. As all three algorithms
” ”
constitute iterative procedures, it is not possible to give any closed equations.
However, it is important to know that the dominant wavelength and the saturation
depend on a reference color in the Lxy-color space, whereas the color temperature is
calculated directly from the xy-color coordinates, which means that it does not require
a reference color.
Reference literature: Wyszecki, G.; Stiles, W.S.: Color Science: concepts and methods,
quantitative data and formulae. Second Edition, Wiley, New York, 1982
B.1.5. LWS-color space
In this color space, the luminance L, the dominant wavelength W and the saturation S
are combined.
B.1.6. Lrg-color space
In the color space Lrg the luminance L was combined with the color coordinates r and
g. These color coordinates are calculated from the CIE-RGB color space:
L = 1, 0000 ∗ R + 4, 5907 ∗ G + 0, 0601 ∗ B

R
r= R+G+B
G
g= R+G+B
314
B.2. Color differences
B.2. Color differences
All color differences are equations which image a color difference between the color
coordinates in a certain color space in a scalar number. If required, further color difference
measures can be realized upon request.
∆E(L* u* v* )
q
∆E = (L∗ − L∗R )2 + (u∗ − u∗R )2 + (v ∗ − vR
∗ )2
∆E(L* a* b* )
q
∆E = (L∗ − L∗R )2 + (a∗ − a∗R )2 + (b∗ − b∗R )2
∆E(L* a* b* ,A,B,C)
q
∆E = A (L∗ − L∗R )2 + B (a∗ − a∗R )2 + C (b∗ − b∗R )2
The normal“ color difference in the L* a* b* -color space is a special case of this new color
”
difference with A=B=C=1.
∆E(Lu’v’,A,B)
 r 2
0 − u0 )2 + (v 0 − v 0 )2 + B L−LR

∆E = A (u R R LR f or LR > 0
0 else

L2 (Lxy)
p
L2 = (x − xR )2 + (y − yR )2
Loo (Lxy)
L∞ = max (abs (x − xR ) , abs (y − yR ))
315
316
C. Shortcuts
Shortcut Menu point or function
Alt+F4 Protocol | Exit
F7 Camera | Live
Shift-F7 Camera | Freeze
Alt-F7 Camera | Grab
Ctrl-F7 Camera | Exposure time
F6 Capture | MultiPic
Shift-F6 Capture | HighDyn
Alt-F6 Capture | ColorHighDyn
Ctrl-F6 Capture | Properties
F8 In the Exposure time dialog: Brighter
Shift-F8 In the Exposure time dialog: Darker
F3 Evaluation | Statistics or Image context menu | Statistics
Alt-1 . . . Alt-9 Macro | User defined macro
Ctrl-Z Regions | Undo
Ctrl-Y Regions | Redo
Ctrl-A Regions | Select all
Ctrl-D Regions | Deselect all
Ctrl-S Image view | Scaling | Via dialog
Ctrl-Del Image context menu | Delete point
Ctrl-Ins Image context menu | Insert point
Del Image context menu | Del
Ctrl-F Image context menu | Fill
Ctrl-C Bildkontextmenü | Copy
Ctrl-V Image context menu | Paste and replace
Ctrl-W Image context menu | Paste and append
Ctrl-I Image context menu | Paste image content
Esc Image context menu | Standard cursor
Ctrl-Plus Enlarge image or graphic
Ctrl-Minus Reduce image or graphic
Cursor keys Changes visible area in image
Ctrl-Cursor keys Move selected regions in image or move graphic
In the dialog Assignment of windows“ move the selected win-
”
dow
F9 Program view | Arrange
F1 Help | Handbook
317
D. Triggered captures
D.1. Software
In order to clear the option of triggered captures in the program LabSoft“, the follo-
”
wing steps must be executed:
1. In the subdirectory .\Camera\Camera name\“ of the LabSoft-installation, open

”
the file camera.ini“ with a text editor. Then,
”
• either set the entry EXTERN TRIGGER AVAILABLE=0“ to
”
EXTERN TRIGGER AVAILABLE=1“, if available, or
”
• add an entry EXTERN TRIGGER AVAILABLE=1“ in the paragraph
”
[PropertyList]“.
”
2. Then, save the modified file ”camera.ini”.
3. Afterwards, restart the program LabSoft“.
”
D.2. Hardware
LMK98-2/-3
Trigger input
The trigger input is controlled by an external signal connected via a phonoplug. The
signal is low-active“. It is always the negative slope of a triggering signal which is
”
decisive for the triggering time.
Trigger output
The trigger output releases a triggering signal for controlling external devices. The output
signal is released at the same time as the triggering input signal, however, its polarity is
high-active“.
”
318
D.2. Hardware
Phonoplugs for external triggering signals
Trigger input and trigger output are connected with a phonoplug mounted either on the
slot plate of the PCI-interface board (in the case of cameras with parallel interface) or
on the back-wall of the camera (in the case of cameras with FireWire-interface). The
three-pole phonoplug (3.5mm) is laid out as follows:
Trigger OUT: 5V TTL (low < 0,4V; high > 3,8V)

Trigger IN: 5V TTL (low < 0,9V; high > 3,5V)
Input wiring of the camera / Framegrabber for trigger input:
Output wiring of the camera / Framegrabber for trigger output:
LMK98-4
Trigger input
The trigger input is controlled by an external signal connected with the camera via the
MDR20 plug-in connector. It is always the negative slope of a triggering signal which is
decisive for the triggering time.
Trigger output
The trigger output sends to the MDR20 plug-in connector a signal for controlling external
devices. It provides a high-level“ for the integration duration.
”
319
D. Triggered captures
Layout of the MDR20 plug-in connector:
The connections for both the trigger input and the trigger output are provided on the
20-pole socket which also houses the connections for the power supply of the camera.
Layout of the MDR20 plug:
Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 VCC 11
2 VCC 12
3 GND 13 Trigger OUT -
4 GND 14 Trigger IN-
5 15
6 16
7 Trigger OUT+ 17
8 Trigger IN+ 18
9 19
10 20
Trigger OUT: LVDS (± 300mV, lines twisted in pairs)

Trigger IN: LVDS (± 300mV, lines twisted in pairs)
Structure of the input and output wiring of the camera:
320
E. Installation of a GigE camera
Installation of hardware
The camera is used with a Gigabit Ethernet card on the computer. Prerequisite for the
operation of the camera, therefore, is that the camera is connected with a network cable
to such a card, and the power of the camera is turned on.
Establishment of the network card
Please open in Windows 7 with Start | Control Panel | Network and Sharing
”
Center“ the appropriate window. (In Windows XP, click Start | Control Panel |
”
Network Connections“.) In general, there are two LAN connections appear, because
most computers are already connected by a first network adapter with its network, while
on the second the camera is connected.
Select the properties dialog for the network connection to the camera (left image) and
press the button properties“ in this dialog (right image):
”
321
First set all the check marks in the check boxes and then select the line Internet
”
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)“:
Then press the button properties“:

”
The address of the camera is set in the hardware of the camera and is reported in its
calibration data to the program that uses the camera. The default setting of Techno-
”
Team“ for this address is 192.168.0.51“. When configuring the NIC, the first three
”
numbers match those of the camera, the last number don’t match with this and may
also not be 0 or 255. Therefore, here in the dialog the address of the network card is
selected as 192.168.0.42“.
”
To ensure on slow computers interference-free reception of the camera images, it is
recommended that the tab Advanced“ is used to change the default settings for the
”
322
receive buffer and the Interrupt moderation rate. (The settings depend on the network
adapter in the example Intel Pro“.)
”
Checking of the communication with the camera
This finishes the configuration of the network card and the connection to the camera via
the network card can be verified. For this, open a console window, e.g. with Start |
”
Command prompt“ and there type in ping 192.168.0.51“ (if that’s the IP address
”
of the camera):
The figure shows the output of the command ping“. In this example, the communication
”
with the camera was flawless.
323
Configuration of the firewall
If in a network the communication is monitored by a firewall, then the necessary ports

for the connection between the camera and computer have to be enabled. These are
the ports TCP 30“ incoming, UDP 31“ incoming and TCP 1636“ outgoing. When
” ” ”
using Windows’ own firewall in Windows XP and Windows 7, the installation files are
located in the two scripts firewall xp.cmd“ or firewall w7.cmd“. In this case,
” ”
you do not have to change the firewall rules interactively in the corresponding dialogs.
The scripts must be executed with administrator rights: In Windows Explorer, select
the appropriate script file and after pressing the right mouse button click on item Run
”
as administrator“ from the context menu.
Configuration of the virus scanner
If on the computer being used, the network communications is monitored by a virus

scanner, then it has to be shut off in some cases, because the data stream from the
camera can contain any bit combinations, including those that are in antivirus software
is known as malware signatures.
Examination of the image acquisition
After this the program can be started (LabSoft or IPED), which will work with the
camera. After loading the required calibration of the camera please start Live Mode“
”
and check the image acquisition. Are there any difficulties, you can first test with turn
off the firewall and virus scanner and see if it can fix the problem. If that is the case,
the configuration of these programs has to be adjusted accordingly.
324
F. Translation
After having installed the software it is possible to change the used language in the
menu Protocol“ at any time. The available languages depends on the content of the
”
subdirectory Translation“ in the software installation directory.
”
Menu Directory structure
In this example on the right hand side the content of the French“ directory is shown.
”
File Content
lmk4 fr.ts, ttgui fr.ts Source files for translation in XML format: English source
words and their French translation. See next page for the
translation process itself.
lmk4 fr.qm, ttgui fr.qm Binary files with the results of the translation process.
translate french.bat This Batch file calls the program Qt Linguist“ for every
”
file to be translated and compiles the completed source files
*.ts“ in the binary file format *.qm“. See next page.
” ”
Menu.ini This file contains the string used for the language in the
program menu. In case of the French language this is
Français“.
”
Lmk4.pdf This file is the manual. The manual can be opened within
the program with the menu point Help | Handbook“.
”
Currently the manual is only available in German and Eng-
lish.
325
F. Translation
The most important task in the translation of the strings of the program is done with
the help of the program Qt Linguist“. (This is a tool for adding translation to Qt
”
applications, Copyright by Nokia Corporation.) If the Batch file translate xxx.bat“
”
is called, this program is opened one time for every *.ts file to be translated.
The list on the left side of the program Qt Linguist“ shows a list with two columns:
”
• Context“ contains the names of dialogs or windows within the Lmk Labsoft“
” ”
program.
• Items“ contains the number of strings within this is to be translated.
”
If a line in this list is selected with mouse click, the strings to be translated are shown
on the upper right side. In the example above the context QWordExportDialog“ is
”
marked. Therefore the upper right side contains all strings to be translated within this
context.
The first string in every context is <Context comment>“. If this string is marked on
”
the top of the right side the middle part of the right side shows a comment, for example:
If the user has simultaneously opened the Lmk LabSoft“ program, he can call the
”
menu point Protocol | Export to MS Word“. There he can find all strings of this
”
context to be translated.
If the the user has selected a string to be translated in the upper right list, he can type
in the translation in the edit field below.
326
Before translation After translation
After typing in the input has to be finished with Ctrl+Enter“. The program takes
”
over the translation and jumps automatically to the next string to be translated. Every
not translated string is marked by a question mark, every translated string by a check
mark.
If all strings are translated, every context and every string is marked with a check mark.
The user has to save his work, see the red arrow above.
It is possible to do parts of the translation at different times:
1. Call the Batch file once to translate a few dialogs.

2. Open the Lmk LabSoft“ to view the results of the translation.
”
3. Recall the Batch file a second time to continue.
After a Lmk LabSoft“ program update most of the strings are already translated by
”
the previous version. In this case only a few new translations have to be completed.
327

OperationmanualLMKLabSoft Eng

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

OperationmanualLMKLabSoft Eng

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Operation manual LMK LabSoft

TechnoTeam Bildverarbeitung GmbH, Ilmenau, Germany

1 Comparison of program versions 8

4 Starting and closing the program 30

5 Camera, lens and recalibration 43

5.3 Setting camera and lens properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

9.1.4 Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

10 Measuring regions 113

11 Coordinate systems 127

13 Statistic evaluations 135

14 Image processing and evaluation images 194

15 Evaluating color images 227

16 Printing and exporting 234

17 External Program Control 243

18.4.1 Installation and Call-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

B Color metric 309

D Triggered captures 318

E Installation of a GigE camera 321

2.1. How to start-up and quit the program?

Program start Program end

2.2. Where to find the different items?

2.4. How to prepare the camera for capturing images?

• The adaptation to the brightness of the scene to be captured by selecting a suitable

• Saturation: Here, the modulation of the image is measured. A sufficient brightness

2.5. How to capture images?

• By means of the SinglePic algorithm“ a camera image is captured and conver-

2.6. How to change the image display?

• Furthermore, it is possible to adjust the enlargement and the visibility of an image

Image view Scaling Palettes

2.7. Cursor options

Main menu Button Context menu

• A histogram of the values in a rectangular or circular region around the mouse

Nothing marked Marked region

2.8. How to define measuring regions?

2.9. How to use coordinate systems?

Geometric information in the image is always displayed in units of a coordinate system. If

work with coordinate systems in the program is described in chapter 11 beginning on

2.10. How to define statistical evaluations?

A statistical object is characterized by the 5 properties below:

• Image“: A black-and-white or a color image delivers the pixel values.

view“, Histogram“, Projection“, Luminance object“, Integral ob-

• Views“: The presentation of measuring results can occur in different formats.

• For each measuring region only one statistic can be calculated.

Table Standard color statistics

2.11. What are the image processing options?

• Projective rectification“: Perspective distortions which are produced by an

• Transformation of coordinates“: The correction of heavy lens distortions

of coordinates. This information can then be used to correct - through projective

2.12. How to record and replay courses?

• Capturing luminance or color images

• Generating and deleting evaluation images

• Loading and saving images

• Arithmetic and logic operations on images

2.13. What color evaluation options do exist?

2.14. How to print or export the results?

item Insert contents“ or Insert as“ should be used if available instead of

To generate, process and represent reports in a word processing system or in a table

2.15. How to store results for a later evaluation?

2.16. How to exchange data between different measuring

2.17. How can the program work with other programs?

• Access to the measuring values of the statistics.

2.18. How can the program be reset to the factory settings?

• The display of the results of statistical analyses,

2.19. Where to get help?